You are on page 1of 529

S UPERVISOR M ANUAL

S E R V I C E S C A L E
Quantum Scale System
®

Supervisor Manual

Models
Quantum Scale
Standard ML-29032
Narrow ML-29035
Prepack ML-29037
Linerless ML-29039
TCP/IP ML-29191

Quantum Printer
Standard ML-29044
Narrow ML-29048

Quantum Self Service


Standard ML-29041
Narrow ML-29042

Quantum Hanging Scale ML-29188

701 S. RIDGE AVENUE


TROY, OHIO 45374
937-332-3000
www.hobartcorp.com

F–34350 (12-99)
Quantum Scale

Quantum Self Service Scale

Quantum Hanging Scale


Quantum Scale System

Table of Contents

Chapter One: Introduction to This Manual.................................................................... 1-1


FCC Note................................................................................................................ 1-2
Verify Correctness of Weight & Price....................................................................... 1-2
Supervisor Manual Overview................................................................................... 1-3
How to Use This Manual ......................................................................................... 1-4

Chapter Two: General Information About the Quantum............................................... 2-1


General Information ................................................................................................ 2-2
Electrical Connections............................................................................................. 2-2
Communication Connections................................................................................... 2-3
Reset Button ........................................................................................................... 2-3
Control Panel Overview........................................................................................... 2-4
Screen Highlights .................................................................................................... 2-6
Label Stock ............................................................................................................. 2-8
Keyboard (Optional Feature) ................................................................................... 2-9
HELP Key Functions ............................................................................................... 2-10
Help on “F” Keys.............................................................................................. 2-11
About the Keyboard ......................................................................................... 2-11
Basic Help ....................................................................................................... 2-12
Moving Through the System ............................................................................ 2-13
Supervisor Mode Overview ..................................................................................... 2-14
Accessing the Supervisor Menu ....................................................................... 2-14

Chapter Three: Change Product ................................................................................... 3-1


Change Product Flowchart ...................................................................................... 3-2
Overview................................................................................................................. 3-3
Hobart Recommended Class Structure.................................................................... 3-4
Accessing the Change Product Function ................................................................ 3-5
Common “F” Keys for Change Product Functions .................................................... 3-7
Delete This Product ......................................................................................... 3-8
Change Another Field ...................................................................................... 3-9
Creating a New Class.............................................................................................. 3-10
Editing a Class ........................................................................................................ 3-13
Adding a New Product............................................................................................. 3-14
Support File Overview ............................................................................................. 3-19
Special Messages............................................................................................ 3-22
Expanded Text ................................................................................................ 3-31
NutriFacts Data................................................................................................ 3-42
Marquee Messages ......................................................................................... 3-50
Time Stamp Changes.............................................................................................. 3-62
Making Changes to Product Information .................................................................. 3-65

i  Copyright Hobart Corporation 1997


Quantum Scale System

Assessing the Change Product Menu Screen...........................................................3-66


Changing the Unit Price ....................................................................................3-68
Changing Tare..................................................................................................3-69
Changing Shelf Life / Product Life .....................................................................3-73
Changing a Product’s Reporting Class..............................................................3-74
Changing All Price Fields ..................................................................................3-76
Changing All Fields...........................................................................................3-81
Making Batch Price Changes ............................................................................3-81
Setting up a Forced Price PLU..........................................................................3-86

Chapter Four: Totals Menu.............................................................................................4-1


Totals Menu Flowchart.............................................................................................4-2
Totals Menu Overview .............................................................................................4-3
View Totals ..............................................................................................................4-7
View Product Totals..........................................................................................4-8
View Operator Totals ........................................................................................4-11
View Hourly Totals............................................................................................4-14
Clear Totals .............................................................................................................4-17
Clear All Product Totals ....................................................................................4-19
Clear One Product’s Totals ...............................................................................4-20
Clear One Totals Type for All Products .............................................................4-22
Clear All Operator Totals ..................................................................................4-24
Clear All Hourly Totals ......................................................................................4-25
Clear All Totals .................................................................................................4-27
Void Totals ..............................................................................................................4-28
Void Product Totals ..........................................................................................4-29
Void Operator Totals.........................................................................................4-31
Void Hourly Totals ............................................................................................4-32
Configure Totals Type..............................................................................................4-34
Create a Type...................................................................................................4-35
Edit Totals Type................................................................................................4-37
Delete Totals Type ...........................................................................................4-39
Collect Totals via MiniNet II......................................................................................4-40

Chapter Five: Print Reports Menu..................................................................................5-1


Print Reports Flowchart............................................................................................5-2
Print Reports Menu Overview...................................................................................5-3
Print Reports Menu ..................................................................................................5-5
Print Product Totals Menu.................................................................................5-6
Print All Operator Totals....................................................................................5-8
Print Hourly Totals ............................................................................................5-9
Print All Totals Reports .....................................................................................5-11
Print a Cutting Test Report................................................................................5-13
Print Products Menu ................................................................................................5-18
Print Product List Menu.....................................................................................5-19
Print Product Review Menu...............................................................................5-21
Print Time Stamp Changes ..............................................................................5-23
Print Flashkeys ........................................................................................................5-25
Print Operator ID List ...............................................................................................5-26

ii
Quantum Scale System

Print Label Related Items Menu............................................................................... 5-28


Print Reusable Text Menu................................................................................ 5-29
Print Label Types............................................................................................. 5-38
Print Graphics.................................................................................................. 5-40
Print Configuration .................................................................................................. 5-43
Print Miscellaneous Menu ....................................................................................... 5-45

Chapter Six: Backup/Restore ........................................................................................ 6-1


Backup/Restore Flowchart ...................................................................................... 6-2
Overview................................................................................................................. 6-3
Backup to Diskette .................................................................................................. 6-6
Unmark Changed Items ................................................................................... 6-10
Backup Changes to Diskette ................................................................................... 6-11
Restore from Diskette.............................................................................................. 6-15
Bad Record Scan............................................................................................. 6-18
Add Changes from Diskette..................................................................................... 6-19
Backup or Restore with IntraNet .............................................................................. 6-23
Send to Scales via IntraNet.............................................................................. 6-23
Send Changes via IntraNet .............................................................................. 6-25

Chapter Seven: Scale Setup .......................................................................................... 7-1


Scale Setup Flowchart ............................................................................................ 7-2
Overview................................................................................................................. 7-3
Creating Operator ID’s ............................................................................................ 7-3
Operator Log-on Required ............................................................................... 7-5
Flashkeys ............................................................................................................... 7-6
Positioning the Flashkeys ................................................................................ 7-8
Changing Flashkey Height/Width ..................................................................... 7-8
Creating Flashkeys .......................................................................................... 7-10
Creating a Product-Group Flashkey ................................................................. 7-15
View Flashkey Group ....................................................................................... 7-16
Edit Home Flashkey Group .............................................................................. 7-17
Delete Flashkey ............................................................................................... 7-18
Go To Flashkey Group..................................................................................... 7-19
Delete a Flashkey Group ................................................................................. 7-20
Clear a Flashkey Group ................................................................................... 7-22
Insert a Flashkey Group................................................................................... 7-23
Move a Flashkey Group ................................................................................... 7-25
Copy a Flashkey Group ................................................................................... 7-27
Working with Labels ................................................................................................ 7-30
Label Stock Styles ........................................................................................... 7-31
Die Cut Labels.......................................................................................... 7-31
Continuous Label Stock ............................................................................ 7-31
Linerless................................................................................................... 7-31
Using the Labels Menu............................................................................................ 7-32
Select Special Fields to Print on a Label........................................................... 7-33
Label Text Names............................................................................................ 7-34
Reviewing Available Fields............................................................................... 7-36

iii
Quantum Scale System

Label Information..............................................................................................7-37
Changing the Default Label Types .............................................................7-37
Using Word Wrap ......................................................................................7-39
Label Types......................................................................................................7-40
Selecting Label Types ......................................................................................7-41
Standard Labels by Family................................................................................7-43
Standard Labels by Size ...................................................................................7-64
Narrow Labels ..................................................................................................7-81
Custom Labels .................................................................................................7-83
Graphics...........................................................................................................7-84
Itemized Labels ................................................................................................7-86
Selecting Item Tickets ...............................................................................7-88
Selecting Itemized Receipts.......................................................................7-90
Scale Operation .......................................................................................................7-91
Set What the Operator Can Modify ...................................................................7-92
Date/Time.........................................................................................................7-94
Setup Normal Scale Operation..........................................................................7-95
Scale ID & Store Information ....................................................................................7-100
Communications ......................................................................................................7-102
Cassette/Disk ...................................................................................................7-103
Network............................................................................................................7-105
Marquee Setup ........................................................................................................7-107
Marquee Modes................................................................................................7-118
Creating a Permanent or Daily Message ...........................................................7-110
Timed Marquee Messages................................................................................7-113

Chapter Eight: Miscellaneous Menu ..............................................................................8-1


Miscellaneous Menu Flowchart ................................................................................8-2
Overview .................................................................................................................8-3
Delete Time Stamp Changes ...................................................................................8-3
Information Tracker..................................................................................................8-5
Network Report ................................................................................................8-6
Operator Changes ............................................................................................8-8
Return to Operate Mode ..........................................................................................8-9

Chapter Nine: Self Service..............................................................................................9-1


Overview .................................................................................................................9-2
Using the Keyboard and Keypad ..............................................................................9-3
Configuring Self Service...........................................................................................9-3
Setting the Date & Time....................................................................................9-4
Setting the Default Label Types ........................................................................9-5
Setting Up Security/Operator IDs ......................................................................9-6
Setting Up Auto Lookup ....................................................................................9-8
Setting Up Self Service .....................................................................................9-10
Setting Up the Consumer Default Screen..........................................................9-12
Zeroing the Scale .............................................................................................9-15
Using the Self Service Produce Keypad ...................................................................9-16
Setting Up Speedkeys ......................................................................................9-16
Deleting Speedkeys..........................................................................................9-19

iv
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Ten: Interfacing the SLA with the Quantum.................................................... 10-1


Overview................................................................................................................. 10-2
Programming a Security Label to be Issued for a Specific PLU ................................ 10-2
Programming a New PLU................................................................................. 10-3
Programming an Existing PLU ......................................................................... 10-5
Programming a Minimum Price Per Pound, Total Price, or Both............................... 10-6

Chapter Eleven: Working With Merchandising Programs ............................................ 11-1


Overview................................................................................................................. 11-2
Setting Up Your Scale for Merchandising Programs................................................. 11-2
Using Advertised Price ............................................................................................ 11-3
Advertised Sale Pricing .................................................................................... 11-4
Value Packing.................................................................................................. 11-4
Retail Comparison ........................................................................................... 11-5
Activating Advertised Price............................................................................... 11-6
Reactivating Regular Price............................................................................... 11-8
Using the Frequent Shopper Program ..................................................................... 11-10
Frequent Shopper Configuration Questions...................................................... 11-11
Configuring Frequent Shopper ......................................................................... 11-12
Activating Frequent Shopper ............................................................................ 11-13
Reactivating Regular Price............................................................................... 11-15
Using Bonus Points................................................................................................. 11-16
Setting Up Bonus Points .................................................................................. 11-17
Using Portion Pricing............................................................................................... 11-17
Activating Portion Pricing ................................................................................. 11-18
Setting Up Portion Pricing ................................................................................ 11-20
Using Percent Added .............................................................................................. 11-21
Activating the Percent Added ........................................................................... 11-21
Reactivating the Regular Price ......................................................................... 11-23

Chapter Twelve: Configuring an EAN13 Barcode......................................................... 12-1


Overview................................................................................................................. 12-2
Setting Up Your Scale for EAN13 Barcode .............................................................. 12-3
Setting Up the EAN13 Default Prefix ....................................................................... 12-3
Entering a New Product Using EAN13 Format......................................................... 12-5
Changing an Existing PLU to an EAN13 Format ...................................................... 12-9

Chapter Thirteen: Understanding Hardwired TCP/IP


Scale Communication ..................................................................................................... 13-1
Overview................................................................................................................. 13-2
Understanding the IP Addresses ............................................................................. 13-2
Setting Up IP Addresses on an Isolated Network.............................................. 13-3
Setting Up IP Addresses on an Existing Network.............................................. 13-3
IntraNet Scale IP Address Assignment Form ........................................................... 13-4
Setting Up TCP/IP Networks ................................................................................... 13-5
Sample Ethernet Wiring Illustration .................................................................. 13-6
Setting Up ScaleMaster Configuration.............................................................. 13-7
Example: ScaleMaster .................................................................................... 13-9
Setting Up ScaleMaster Located on a Different Network................................... 13-10

v
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up IntraNet Configuration......................................................................13-13


Example: IntraNet............................................................................................13-19
Setting Up ScaleMaster/IntraNet Configuration .................................................13-20
Example: ScaleMaster/IntraNet........................................................................13-20
Testing the Scales TCP/IP Connection.....................................................................13-22
Ping Test ..........................................................................................................13-22
L.E.D. ...............................................................................................................13-25

Chapter Fourteen: Understanding Wireless TCP/IP


Scale Communication......................................................................................................14-1
Overview .................................................................................................................14-2
Understanding Frequencies .....................................................................................14-2
What is Frequency Hopping? ............................................................................14-3
What is Direct Sequence?.................................................................................14-4
Frequency Protocols ................................................................................................14-4
Setting Up Wireless Communication ........................................................................14-5
What is an Access Point? .................................................................................14-5
What is a PC Network Card and Adapter Board? ..............................................14-6
Using an Antenna .............................................................................................14-6
Configuring Wireless TCP/IP Networks ....................................................................14-7
Configuring the Network Card ..................................................................................14-7
Signal Strength Meter Test.......................................................................................14-13

Appendix ..........................................................................................................................A-1
Understanding Network Configurations ....................................................................A-2
What Does Client & Server Really Mean? .........................................................A-2
ScaleMaster .....................................................................................................A-3
IntraNet ............................................................................................................A-3
ScaleMaster/IntraNet ........................................................................................A-5
Sending Data to the Scales.........................................................................A-5
Reading Data from the Scales.....................................................................A-5
MiniNet II ..........................................................................................................A-6
Understanding Ethernet Networks............................................................................A-6
Hubs ................................................................................................................A-6
Wiring...............................................................................................................A-6
Crossover Function...........................................................................................A-7
TCP/IP Troubleshooting Addresses..........................................................................A-11
Understanding EAN13 Scale Configuration ..............................................................A-16
EAN13 Barcode Examples................................................................................A-17
Understanding the Text Editor..................................................................................A-20
Select Font .......................................................................................................A-21
Mark Text .........................................................................................................A-22
Cut Text ...........................................................................................................A-23
Paste Text ........................................................................................................A-24
Copy Text.........................................................................................................A-25
Marquee Editor ........................................................................................................A-27

vi
Quantum Scale System

Creating Macros (Using the Save/Recall Key) ......................................................... A-28


Recording a Macro........................................................................................... A-28
Executing a Macro ........................................................................................... A-29
Deleting a Macro.............................................................................................. A-30
Proportional Tare (Percentage Tare) ....................................................................... A-30
Percentage Tare Procedure ............................................................................. A-31
How the Percentage Tare is Calculated............................................................ A-31
Hobart Recommended Class Structure.................................................................... A-33
Quantum Function Codes........................................................................................ A-37

Glossary of Common Terms

Index

vii
Quantum Scale System

Chapter One: Introduction to This Manual

♦ FCC Note
♦ Verify Correctness of Weight & Price
♦ Supervisor Manual Overview
♦ How to Use This Manual

1-1 Introduction to This Manual


Quantum Scale System

Quantum Scale System


SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

FCC Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference; in
which case, the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Verify Correctness of Verification of information on labels should be made


Weight & Price routinely. Check the multiplication of price-per-pound
times weight, and check the indicated weight against
printed weight. Weigh the same package several times to
verify consistency. Bear in mind that some packages which
weigh near the middle of the .01 lb. increment will normally
vary up or down by .01 lb. Greater variation than .01 lb.
indicates a need for adjustment of the system. In such cases,
or whenever necessary, contact your authorized Hobart
service representative.

Introduction to This Manual 1-2


Quantum Scale System

Supervisor Manual This manual will use the following methods to explain
Overview keystrokes and data entry procedures:

♦ The word PRESS means to press a key on the Control


Panel.

♦ The word TYPE means to press a series of keys on the


Control Panel and press [ENTER].

♦ The word SELECT means to choose an item from the


display, using the “F” Keys, “S” Keys or Flashkeys.

♦ The word ENTER means to press the [ENTER] key on


the Control Panel.

♦ Words in uppercase enclosed in brackets (for example


[ENTER]) represent specific keys.

The following special instructions are used in the manual:

☛ Note
A note is information that you need to know, but it is not an
actual step in the procedures.

✎ Tip
A tip is additional information that may be useful when you
are using the scale system.

Look At This
Look At This is information to alert you that you may be
doing something that will permanently alter your scale
system.

1-3 Introduction to This Manual


Quantum Scale System

How to Use This Refer to the following sections for information about using
Manual the Quantum Scale System.

♦ Chapter Two: General Information provides you basic


information about the Quantum’s features including:
* Standard Features
* Communications Connections
* Reset Button
* Control Panel Overview
* Screen Highlights
* HELP Key Functions
♦ Chapter Three: Change Product provides you information
on how to create or edit a class, add a new product, or
make changes to product information already in the
database. It also provides an overview to class
structures and common “F” Keys for the Change
Product function.
♦ Chapter Four: Totals Menu provides you the necessary
information so that you can view, clear, or void totals,
configure totals types, and collect totals via MiniNet II.
♦ Chapter Five: Print Reports Menu gives detailed
information on how to print product, operator and
hourly totals, flashkeys, an operator ID list, and label
related items. You can also print the scale’s
configuration from this menu.
♦ Chapter Six: Backup/Restore provides the procedures for
backing up or restoring the scale’s database to/from a
diskette or cassette, as well as through MiniNet II.
♦ Chapter Seven: Scale Setup provides you information on
creating and/or editing Operator ID’s and Flashkeys,
specifying label information (i.e., text names, label types,
graphics, etc.), designating scale operation, setting up
the scale ID and store information, determining the
communications setup for the scale, and setting up
marquee messages to display.
♦ Chapter Eight: Miscellaneous Menu provides you
information on how to delete time stamp changes, and
track information such as network information and
operator changes. It also explains how to return to the
Operate Mode from the Supervisor Menu.
♦ Chapter Nine: Self Service provides you with information
about on the Self Service Scale and provides procedures
on setting up the scale for self service operation.
♦ Chapter Ten: Interfacing with the Security Label Applier or
Security Label Dispenser explains how to set up the scale
to use a security label applier or security label dispenser.

Introduction to This Manual 1-4


Quantum Scale System

How to Use This Manual ♦ Chapter Eleven: Working With Merchandising Programs
Continued... provides information and procedures for using
Advertised Price, Frequent Shopper, Percent Added,
Portion Pricing, and Bonus Points Programs.
♦ Chapter Twelve: Configuring an EAN13 Barcode explains
how to configure an EAN13 Barcode.
♦ Chapter Thirteen: Understanding TCP/IP Communication
provides information and procedures for setting up
TCP/IP Networks and testing a scales TCP/IP
connection.
♦ Chapter Fourteen: Understanding Wireless Communication
provides information about Frequencies and Wireless
Communication and explains how to setup wireless
networks for several providers.
♦ The Appendix provides information on the following
topics:
* Understanding Network Configurations
* Understanding EAN13 Scale Configuration
* Text and Marquee Editors
* Creating Macros
* Label Types and Graphics
* Recommended Class Structure
* Function Codes
♦ The Glossary provides a definition of some common
terms used throughout the manual.
♦ The Index provides you a listing of the topics in this
manual and their corresponding page numbers.

1-5 Introduction to This Manual


Quantum Scale System

Chapter Two: General Information About


the Quantum
♦ General Information
♦ Electrical Connections
♦ Communication Connections
♦ Reset Button
♦ Control Panel Overview
♦ Screen Highlights
♦ Label Stock
♦ Keyboard (Optional)
♦ HELP Key Functions
• Help on “F” keys
• About the Keyboard
• Basic Help
• Moving Through the System
♦ Supervisor Mode Overview
• Accessing the Supervisor Menu

2-1 General Information


Quantum Scale System

General Information The Quantum Scale System is perfect for your over-the-
counter weighing applications. This state-of-the-art
weighing system can handle a broad variety of products for
deli, bakery, produce, fish and cheese departments. It can
also function in a Prepack Scale mode when necessary.

With 512K memory, the system can store information on


thousands of products; including NutriFacts which allows
you to meet labeling law requirements and Expanded Text
for Recipes and Cooking Instructions.

A new feature with the Quantum is Flashkeys which allow


easy access to product information. A maximum of 16
Flashkeys can be displayed on a screen at one time.
Multiple screens can be programmed to mirror your
product case. When an item is called up from memory, the
product information can be reviewed or changed before
weighing or label printing. This allows quicker and easier
service to your customers.

Another new feature is the On Screen Library which


provides you with the ability to locate the PLU information
using the Class Structure. A detailed description of this
feature is found later in this manual.

The Quantum Scale System should be installed or moved


only by qualified Hobart-trained service technicians. It can
operate in a temperature range from 32oF to 104oF
(0oC to 40o C).

Electrical Connections The Power Cord receptacle is located on the bottom side of
the Quantum base. The power cord is connected to 120V.,
60 Hz., Single (1) Phase electrical power. Once the Quantum
is plugged in, the system is ready to begin the Power-up
Sequence.

General Information 2-2


Quantum Scale System

Communication In addition to the Power Cord, there are up to four (4)


Connections additional ports.

On the left side of the scale, there are several ports for
peripherals such as:
♦ Disk Player/Recorder & Cassette Player/Recorder
(RS232)
♦ IBM PC Keyboard (Keyboard)
♦ Floppy Disk Drive or Secondary Printer (MODNET)
♦ Future Expansion (i.e., parallel port for Report Printer)

Reset Button Also located on the left side of the scale is the Reset Button.
In the unlikely event the scale stops responding to keyboard
input, you will use the Reset Button to reset the scale back to
the Start a Run Screen.

To reset the scale, you must:

• Hold in the Reset Button (small black button) for 2 - 3


seconds. (See Photo above for Reset Button location.)

☛ Note
The POWER key on the front of the Control Panel turns the
displays (both operator and customer) ON and OFF. It is
only functional from the Start a Run Screen. This key should
be used at the end of the day to conserve power.

2-3 General Information


Quantum Scale System

Control Panel
Overview

Key/Highlight Function
POWER Turns the screen and the keyboard ON/OFF.
“F” Keys (F1-F8) Allows you to make selections from the menu screens or select a row of
Flashkeys.
Numeric Keypad Allows you to enter numeric data.
BACKSPACE Allows you to remove the highlighted character or the character to the left of the
cursor.
CLEAR Allows you to reset a numeric field to zero. This key is not active in a text field.
ESC (Escape) Allows you to return to the previous screen. Pressing [ESC] will save any
changes you make on a screen.
PRINT Allows you to print a label or report.
ENTER Allows the scale to accept the selected data and move to the next field. It also
may advance the cursor to the next screen.
PREV (Previous) Moves you back one screen.
NEXT Moves you to the next screen.
ARROW KEYS Allows you to move the cursor from field-to-field (UP and DOWN Arrow Keys)
or from character-to-character (LEFT and RIGHT Arrow Keys) in a field.

General Information 2-4


Quantum Scale System

Key/Highlight Function
Alpha Characters Allows you to enter upper case or lower case alpha characters while in a text
field.
SPECIAL CHARS. Press this key to type a special character (found in the upper left corner of each
alpha-key). You must press Special Chars. for each Special Character.
CHANGE CASE Allows you to switch between Upper or Lower Case. You must press Change
Case each time you want to change the case in a text field.
RETURN Advances the cursor to the next field or inserts an End-of-Line in a text field.
SPACE Allows you to type (add) a space between words or characters.
“S” Keys (S1-S4) Allows you to select the column when selecting a Flashkey.
SAVE/RECALL Press this key to have the scale remember a series of keystrokes which can be
recalled later by pressing a Flashkey or by entering a reference number (Macro
ID).
SUPER MENU ON/OFF Allows you to access the Supervisor Menu from the Start a Run Screen or from
any other screen in the Supervisor Mode.
REZERO Allows you to set the scale to 0.00 pounds from the Start a Run or Run Screen.
HELP Allows you to access the Help Screens. From the Run Screen in the Operate
Mode, it allows you to access the On Screen Library and select a PLU.
CONTRAST Allows you to adjust the lightness and darkness of the screen image based on the
viewing angle.
Cursor Highlights text or the position where you will enter data.

2-5 General Information


Quantum Scale System

Screen Highlights The Quantum Scale System has several common screen
characteristics that assists you in interacting with the scale.
We refer to these as “Screen Highlights.” The highlights act
the same regardless of your screen location.

Highlight Description

Active Field A box surrounding text or numeric


fields indicates that this field is the
active field. If you begin typing from
the keyboard or control panel, the
data will be entered into this field.

Bar Cursor A bar cursor (❚) indicates that the


field is a text field.

Block Cursor A block cursor (■) indicates that the


field is a numeric field.

Changeable Fields If a field has a dotted line (.............)


under it, this means that the field is
able to be changed or edited.

Grayed Fields If a field or selection is grayed, it


means that it is not available for that
particular screen or transaction.

General Information 2-6


Quantum Scale System

Highlight Description
Screen Highlights
Prompt Line The Prompt Line is white text,
reversed out of a black box. It is
typically located at the bottom
portion of the screen. It prompts you
on what your next step should be.
Depending on your scale’s
configuration, it may be black text
reversed out of a white box.

Screen Title The Screen Title identifies the screen


name and function that you are
attempting to complete.

Highlight Description
Control Panel
ESC (Escape) This key on the Control Panel is used
to move you back a level (i.e., one
screen).

“F” Keys These keys are located to the right of


the display screen and are used to
make menu selections.

Left/Right Arrow Pressing either of these keys moves


Keys you within an active field allowing
you to move the cursor back one
character at a time.

“S” Keys These keys are located below the


display screen and are used to make
selections of operators, products and
macros.

2-7 General Information


Quantum Scale System

Label Stock The following list details important information about labels
and label printing.
♦ The Quantum thermal printhead requires no ink or
ribbon.
♦ Thermal labels used for transactions may be preprinted
or blank.
♦ Preprinted labels may be printed with a customer logo
and/or other merchandising information.
♦ When using blank labels, the Quantum can be set up to
print all of the necessary information.

Labels are available in the following sizes:


♦ 1.5” x 1.0” ♦ 2.25” x 2.375”
♦ 1.5” x 1.5” ♦ 2.25” x 3.0”
♦ 1.5” x 2.0” ♦ 2.25” x 4.5”
♦ 1.5” x 3.0” ♦ 2.25” x 6.0”
♦ 2.25” x 1.75” ♦ 2.25” x 8.0”

☛ Note
A complete explanation of the Label Types can be found in
the Appendix of this Manual.

✎ Tip
Hobart supplied labels are recommended to minimize
service problems and extend the life of the printhead.

General Information 2-8


Quantum Scale System

Keyboard (Optional) The Quantum Scale System is equipped with a serial port
that allows you to use an optional keyboard for computer-
like editing of your product files.

♦ There are three (3) styles of keyboards. One of these


styles will be supplied.

Maxi Switch Keyboard Cherry Keyboard Key Tronic Keyboard

This is the drawing of a typical computer keyboard. Keep in


mind that not all keyboard layouts are the same.

2-9 General Information


Quantum Scale System

The Keyboard Plug-In is located on the left side of the unit.

HELP Key Functions The Quantum is equipped with context sensitive Help
Screens to assist you in quick, efficient scale operation. The
HELP Function has four (4) levels of assistance.

♦ Help of “F” Keys


♦ About the Keyboard
♦ Basic Help
♦ Moving Through the System

☛ Note
In addition to assisting you with scale operation, you will
also press HELP to access the On Screen Library. Refer to
the “On Screen Library” section later in this manual for a
complete explanation of this function.

General Information 2 - 10
Quantum Scale System

(F1) Help on “F” Keys By pressing [F1] on the Help Screen, you get an explanation
of the functions you can perform when you select the
various “F” Keys available for the current function (i.e., the
function for which you pressed HELP).

Example: From the Start a Run Screen:

1. PRESS [HELP].
2. PRESS [F1] to select Help on “F” Keys. You get an
explanation of Date/Time, the only “F” Key available on
that screen.

(F2) About the Keyboard By pressing [F2] to select “About the Keyboard,” you get a
detailed explanation of the following keys:

♦ ENTER ♦ NEXT
♦ ESCAPE ♦ PREV (Previous)
♦ ARROW KEYS ♦ REZERO
♦ BACKSPACE ♦ SAVE/RECALL
♦ CLEAR ♦ FLASHKEYS
♦ POWER ♦ SUPER MENU ON/OFF
♦ PRINT

2 - 11 General Information
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Basic Help When you press [HELP], the default automatically sends
you to the Basic Help Screen(s) for the selected function or
field. As you might suspect, Basic Help gives you a brief
description of the function or selected field, including notes
to help you process the transaction better. From any other
HELP selection, PRESS [F3] to access Basic Help.

General Information 2 - 12
Quantum Scale System

(F4) Moving Through the Moving Through the System is found by pressing [F4] while
System in the HELP mode. When you select [F4], you get an
explanation of how to:

♦ Return to the Previous Screen


♦ Execute a Forced Operator Log-on
♦ Access the Supervisor Menu

2 - 13 General Information
Quantum Scale System

Supervisor Mode From the Supervisor Mode, you can complete the following
Overview major functions:
♦ Change or Create Product Information (Change Product)
♦ View and Modify Totals Information (Totals Menu)
♦ Print Reports on all scale data (Print Reports Menu)
♦ Backup or Restore scale data (Backup /Restore Menu)
♦ Setup the configuration of the scale (Scale Setup)
♦ Return to the Operate Mode

Accessing the Supervisor From the Start a run Screen:


Menu
1. PRESS [SUPER MENU ON/OFF] on the Control Panel.
2. Type your Secret ID Number (if required) and PRESS
[ENTER]. You should now be on the Supervisor Menu.
QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [SUPER MENU
ON/OFF]
2. TYPE Secret ID Number
and PRESS [ENTER] (If
required)

☛ Note
The Enter Secret ID prompt will only appear if security has
been enabled in your system. Refer to the Scale Setup
section later in this manual for a complete explanation of
this function.

✎ Tip
You may also use the Function Codes listed in the Appendix
of this manual to access a particular Supervisor Function
without having to use the menus.

✎ Tip
While in the Supervisor Mode, pressing the SUPER MENU
ON/OFF Key sends you back to the Supervisor Menu. If you
press it again, it returns you to the screen you were
previously on.

General Information 2 - 14
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Three: Change Product

♦ Overview
♦ Hobart Recommended Class Structure
♦ Accessing the Change Product Function
♦ Common “F” Keys for Change Product Functions
• Delete This Product
• Change Another Field
♦ Creating a New Class
♦ Editing a Class
♦ Adding a New Product
• Support File Overview
• Special Messages
• Expanded Text
• NutriFacts Data
• Marquee Messages
♦ Time Stamp Changes
♦ Making Changes to Product Information
• Accessing the Change Product Menu Screen
• Changing the Unit Price
• Changing Tare
• Changing Shelf Life/Product Life
• Changing a Product’s Reporting Class
• Changing All Price Fields
• Changing All Fields
• Making Batch Price Changes
♦ Setting Up a Forced Price PLU

3-1 Change Product


Quantum Scale System

Change Product Flowchart

CHANGE
PRODUCT

PRESS [F1] PRESS [F1]


Change Change
Product Product

Change
Immediate Time Stamp Delete This
Another
Changes Changes Product
Product
(F1) (F2) (F3)
(F1)

Change Change
Another Pricing
Field Mode
(F5) (F7)

Unit Price Tare


(F1) (F2)

Shelf Life Class


(F3) (F4)

All Price
All Fields
Fields
(F7)
(F6)

Change
Another Delete This
Product
Product
(F3)
(F1)

Change
Another Change Text
Field
Field
(F6)
(F5)

Change
Pricing Next Page
Mode (F8)
(F7)

Page 2 of 3 Page 3 of 3

Special
Graphics
Message

Primary
Expanded
Printer
Text
Label Type

Secondary
Printer NutriFacts
Label Type

Marquee
Messages

Batch Price
Changes
(F8)

Change Product 3-2


Quantum Scale System

Change Product The Change Product option allows you to:


Supervisor Menu
“F” Key = F1 ♦ Set-Up a Class Structure
♦ Add a New Class or Edit Class Information
Add a New Product
♦ Change Product Information fields such as:
• Unit Price
• Tare
• Shelf Life/Product Life
• Class
♦ Change All Price related fields for a Product (See Note)
♦ Change All Fields (See Note)
• Includes fields already discussed
• Label Information (Graphics & Label Types)
• Support Files (Expanded Text, Special Messages,
NutriFacts and Marquee Messages)
♦ Communicate product information changes
immediately or at a specified time (Time Stamp
Changes)
♦ Change the Price of a Class or Range of PLU’s

☛ Note
The fields that can be changed during this function will vary
depending on the PLU type (i.e., Random Weight, Fixed
Weight, By Count or Fluid Ounce).

The remainder of this chapter discusses each one of these


functions in greater detail. However, before we actually
work with the Change Product function, there are some key
concepts that must be understood.

3-3 Change Product


Quantum Scale System

Hobart Recommended
Class Structure

☛ Note
The paragraphs that follow are an excerpt from the Hobart
PLU Scales Product Look-Up Data Standards Workbook, F-2066
(R3-91). The Appendix contains several examples of how to
set up your Class Structure. For the complete workbook,
request Form 2066 (R3-91) from your local Hobart office.

Whenever an item is weighed on a Hobart PLU Scale, the


total’s information (i.e., the number of packages, pounds
and dollars weighed) are stored in the Scale’s memory.
These totals are stored by individual items, but they can also
be stored by groups of items, called Classes.

For example, in the meat department, the item file can be


easily grouped into major commodities such as BEEF,
PORK, VEAL, etc. The major commodities can then be
grouped into their primal cuts such as CHUCK, RIB, LOIN,
GROUND, etc. This allows you to monitor major groups of
items (classes), instead of having to monitor each individual
item.

There is a chart in the Appendix that shows the Hobart


Recommended Class Structure, including a detailed
structure for the Meat Department. The class descriptions
have been established in accordance with the UPC Council
Standards, and the Class Numbers have been assigned
using PLU’s 009000-009989. (These numbers were chosen
because not many retailers are using these upper level
numbers as PLU’s in their own files.) The numbers and
descriptions can be changed as needed in order to customize
the file for each individual retailer, but this class system
should be used in the absence of a preferred alternative.
Other random weight departments should be structured
according to the needs of the department’s merchandisers.

With a Class Structure in place, it then becomes easy to set-


up your products so that you can track totals for each Class
and SubClass.

Change Product 3-4


Quantum Scale System

Accessing the Change To access the Change Product function from the Start a Run
Product Function Screen:

1. PRESS [SUPER MENU ON/OFF].


2. TYPE your Operator ID (if required) and PRESS
QUICK STEPS [ENTER].
3. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Change
From the Start a Run Screen:
Product.
1. PRESS [SUPER MENU
ON/OFF]
2. TYPE ID Number
3. PRESS [ENTER]
4. PRESS [F1]

☛ Note
If you have previously configured your scale with IntraNet
turned ON, the Change Product Menu Screen will appear.
Follow the directions for setting up the scale to make
Immediate or Time Stamp Changes. (An explanation of
how to set Time Stamp Changes is found later in this
chapter.)

3-5 Change Product


Quantum Scale System

For the remainder of this chapter, let’s assume that IntraNet


is turned ON and that all changes will take place
immediately.

By pressing F1, Immediate Changes, you are confirming that


you want the product information changes to be saved as
you make them.

1. PRESS [F1] to confirm Immediate Changes. You should


now be on the Change Product: Unit Price Screen.

Before we get to the specifics of using the Change Product


function, let’s take a look at some commonly used functions
that are consistent for all of the change functions.

Change Product 3-6


Quantum Scale System

Common “F” Keys for While in the Change Product function, you have the ability
Change Product to quickly accomplish a task for one PLU and move to the
next without exiting back to the Change Product Menu
Functions Screen. Most Change Product screens have five (5) “F”
keys:

♦ F1 - Change Another Product: This selection allows you


to quickly move to another PLU so that you can make
additional product changes.
♦ F2 – Do Not Apply Security Label: This selection allows
you to issue a security label when interfacing with a
Security Label Applier or Security Label Dispenser. (See
further explanation in Chapter 10).
♦ F3 - Delete This Product: This selection deletes the
product from the scale’s memory. (See explanation on
the following page.)
♦ F5 - Change Another Field: This selection returns you to
the Change Product Selection Menu and allows you to
select another field to change. (See explanation on the
following pages.)
♦ F6 - Change Text Field: This selection allows you to
change the text field. It is not available on all functions
and is only enabled when the active field is a text field
(i.e., Description).
♦ F7 - Change Pricing Mode: This selection is only enabled
if you are on a price field and you have configured the
scale for Lbs. for Pricing or Fractional Pricing.

3-7 Change Product


Quantum Scale System

(F3) Delete This Product To delete a product:

1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1].


QUICK STEPS 2. PRESS [F1] to select Immediate Changes --OR-- PRESS
[F2] to select Time Stamp Changes.
From the Supervisor Menu: 3. TYPE the Product Number you want to delete.
1. PRESS [F1] 4. Verify the Description of the product you want to delete.
2. PRESS [F1] or [F2] 5. PRESS [F3] to delete the Product Number and
3. TYPE Product Number permanently remove the PLU from memory.
4. Verify Description
5. PRESS [F3]
6. Repeat Steps 3-5 or PRESS
[ESC]

6. Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to delete additional PLU’s or PRESS


[ESC] to save the changes and return to the Supervisor
Menu or the Change Product Menu if IntraNet is
configured.

Change Product 3-8


Quantum Scale System

(F5) Change Another Field The Change Another Field softkey is available on any
Change Product screen except Batch Price Changes. When
you press this key, you are sent to the Change Product
Selection Menu Screen. From this menu, you can select the
following:
♦ F1 - Unit Price
♦ F2 - Tare
♦ F3 - Shelf Life
♦ F4 - Class
♦ F6 - All Price Fields
♦ F7 - All Fields
♦ F8 - Batch Price Changes

To Change Another Field:


QUICK STEPS
1. From the Change Product: Unit Price Screen (or any other
From the Supervisor Menu: Change Product Screen except Batch Price Changes),
1. PRESS [F5] PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field. You are now
on the Change Product Selection Menu Screen.

2. You may now select any of the softkeys to begin making


your product changes.

☛ Note
A complete explanation of how to execute the change
product functions from this screen are found later in this
chapter.

3-9 Change Product


Quantum Scale System

Creating a New Class As already discussed, your PLU information can be


organized into Classes. To simplify the data tracking
process, you can create the Class Structure before you start
adding product information into your data file. The
following explanation details how to create a new class.

QUICK STEPS To add a new Class:

From the Change Product Unit 1. On the Change Product: Unit Price Screen, TYPE the New
Price Screen: Class Number in the Product Number field. (See Note)
1. TYPE the Class Number 2. PRESS [F2] to select Add a New Class. You will now be
2. PRESS [F2] on the Change Class Screen.
3. PRESS [F6]
4. TYPE Description
5. PRESS [ESC]
6. TYPE the Reporting Class
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

☛ Note
In order to add a new class or product, the number you
enter in this field must be unique. If the number already
exists as a PLU you will remain on the current Change
Product screen. If the number you enter is new, you will be
asked if you want to add the new number as a Product or a
Class. (The screen will be similar to the one above.) If you
select New Product, you will be sent to the Change Product
Screen. If you select New Class, you will be sent to the
Change Class Screen. From these screens, you can change
any field as necessary.

Change Product 3 - 10
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. From this


selection, you can edit the Description field.

4. TYPE the Description.


5. PRESS [ESC] when you have finished typing the
Description. The cursor should now be on the Reporting
Class field.

3 - 11 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
The Reporting Class in Step No. 6 is the Class to which
another Class (i.e., SubClass) or Product reports its Totals
information.

6. TYPE the Reporting Class. The default is Grand Totals,


Class No. 999999.
7. PRESS [ENTER] to move to the Class Number field and
add another class --OR-- PRESS [ESC] to return to the
Supervisor Menu. (If IntraNet is turned ON, pressing
[ESC] will send you to the Change Product Menu.)

☛ Note
From the Class Number field, if you enter a PLU Number,
the screen will change to Change Product: All Fields Screen.
You can switch back and forth between PLU’s and Classes
in the Change Product and Change Class Screens.

Change Product 3 - 12
Quantum Scale System

Editing a Class In order to edit information within an existing Class:

1. From the Change Product: Unit Price Screen, TYPE the


Class Number in the Product Number field.
2. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)].
3. PRESS [F6] to edit the Description. Make your changes
and PRESS [ESC] and move to the Reporting Class field.

4. TYPE the new Reporting Class (if needed).


5. To change another Class, PRESS [F1] or [ENTER]. This
moves the cursor to the Class Number field.

6. To exit, PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu or


the Change Product Menu if IntraNet is turned ON.

3 - 13 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

Add a New Product Initially, the steps to Add a New Product and Add A New
Class are similar.

To add a new product to your PLU database:


QUICK STEPS
1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Change
From the Supervisor Menu: Product.
1. PRESS [F1] 2. If IntraNet is turned ON, PRESS [F1] to select Immediate
2. If IntraNet, PRESS [F1] Changes. You should now be on the Change Product:
3. TYPE Product Number Unit Price Screen.
4. PRESS [ENTER] 3. TYPE the new Product Number in the Product Number
5. PRESS [F1] field.

4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move you


to the next field. A message box will appear informing
you that the Product Number you entered doesn’t exist.
5. PRESS [F1] to add the PLU as a new product.

Change Product 3 - 14
Quantum Scale System

QUICK STEPS 6. A message box will now appear asking you to specify
whether the new PLU is a Random Weight, Fixed
Continued: Weight or Fluid Ounce item. PRESS [F1] to add it as a
6. PRESS [F1], [F2] or [F3] Random Weight item -- OR -- PRESS [F2] to add it as a
7. PRESS [F6] Fixed Weight item, --OR-- PRESS [F3] to add it as a Fluid
8. TYPE Description Ounce item. You should now be on Change Product -
9. PRESS [ESC] Page 1.
10. TYPE UPC Number System
(If needed)
11. TYPE UPC Number /
PRESS [ENTER]
12. TYPE By Count Value (If
appropriate)

☛ Note
Random Weight includes products sold By Weight or By
Count.

7. To edit the product’s Description, PRESS [F6] to select


Change Text Field.

This Screen Print is for a Random Weight PLU.


Fixed Weight and Fluid Ounce PLU’s vary
slightly.

3 - 15 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

8. TYPE the Product Description. (A complete explanation


of how to use the Text Editor is found in the Appendix.)

9. PRESS [ESC] to save the Description. You should now


be on the UPC Number System field.
10. Change the UPC Number System (if needed).
11. TYPE the UPC Number and PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN
ARROW (▼)].
12. If the PLU is to be sold By Count, TYPE the By Count
value.

Change Product 3 - 16
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
♦ Random Weight PLU’s with a By Count = 0 are priced as
they are weighed. A Random Weight PLU with a By
Count ≥ 1 will be priced by the count (i.e., 3 for $1.00). A
Fixed Weight PLU (including Fluid Ounce PLU’s must
have a By Count ≥ 1.
♦ If you enter a By Count value ≥ 1, the Tare field changes
to Exception Price.

QUICK STEPS 13. TYPE the Unit Price and PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN
ARROW (▼)].
Continued: 14. TYPE the Tare value and PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN
13. TYPE Unit Price / PRESS ARROW (▼)]. (See Note on next page)
[ENTER] 15. TYPE the Proportional Tare value and PRESS [ENTER]
14. TYPE Tare / PRESS or [DOWN ARROW (▼)]. (See Note on next page)
[ENTER] 16. TYPE the Shelf Life value and PRESS [ENTER] or
15. TYPE Proportional Tare / [DOWN ARROW (▼)].
PRESS [ENTER] 17. TYPE the Product Life value and PRESS [ENTER] or
16. TYPE Shelf Life / PRESS [DOWN ARROW (▼)].
[ENTER] 18. TYPE the Class Number to which this PLU Number
17. TYPE Product Life / should report.
PRESS [ENTER]
18. TYPE Class Number

3 - 17 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
♦ By Count, Fixed Weight and Fluid Ounce PLU’s do not
have a Tare value.
♦ The Proportional Tare field is used for candy or other
items that are individually wrapped and then sold by
weight. Proportional Tare can be defined as the
percentage of the total product weight that is the
“wrapper” for the individual item. This value
represents the proportion of tare material in comparison
with the gross weight of the item (commodity). For a
complete explanation of Proportional Tare (also known
as Percentage Tare) reference the Appendix.

QUICK STEPS 19. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to


Change Product - Page 2.
Continued:
19. PRESS [ENTER]
20. TYPE Graphic Number /
PRESS [ENTER]
21. TYPE Primary Printer
Label Type No. / PRESS
[ENTER]
22. TYPE Secondary Printer
Label Type No. / PRESS
[ENTER](If needed)
23. TYPE number of points (if
applies) / PRESS [ENTER]
or [▼] (If needed)
24. PRESS [ENTER]

Change Product 3 - 18
Quantum Scale System

Page 2 allows you to enter Label Information for the new


PLU:

20. TYPE the Graphic Number you wish to be printed on


the product label and PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN
ARROW (▼)]. (User Graphics can be viewed in the
Scale Setup function.)
21. TYPE the Primary Printer Label Type (A complete list
and display of the Label Types available within the scale
can be found in the Scale Setup function).
22. If your system is setup to function with a Secondary
Printer, TYPE the Secondary Printer Label Type.
23. If you have a custom label set up with the Bonus Points
feature, enter the number of points you want assigned.
(Refer to Chapter 11 for further explanation.)
24. To move to the next field on Page 3, PRESS [ENTER] or
[DOWN ARROW (▼)].

Support File Overview Page 3 allows you to create Support Files for each PLU such
as: Special Messages, Expanded Text, NutriFacts and
Marquee Messages. While this information is still part of
Adding a New Product, the following pages explain in
detail how to create, copy, edit, use and delete each of the
available Support Files.

3 - 19 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
There are some common characteristics among the Page 3
functions.

♦ Depending on the active field, if you are creating a


“message” for the very first time (i.e., no Special
Messages exist, no Expanded Text exists, no NutriFacts
exist, or no Marquee Messages exist), you will be sent
straight to the Text Editor or Marquee Editor.

♦ If you have created “messages” for other PLU’s but not


for the one you’re currently working on, a screen like the
following appears. Notice that the Edit and Delete
functions are disabled (because there is nothing to edit
or delete).

Change Product 3 - 20
Quantum Scale System

♦ The following screen appears if you have previously


created a “message” for the product. Notice that it lists
all the PLU’s that use the current “message.”

The following table explains what each “F” Key selection


means. They are the same for Special Messages, Expanded
Text, NutriFacts and Marquee Messages.

“F” Key Function


F1 - Create New Makes a new Special Message, Expanded
Text, NutriFacts or Marquee Message.
F2 - Copy and Edit Copies Text and Format from another
PLU; allows you to make changes to it;
and saves it as a separate “message”
when you press ESC.
F3 - Use Allows you to use the same Text for more
than one PLU, thus reducing memory
requirements. This key is disabled when
creating NutriFacts information.
F4 - Edit Allows you to change a Special Message,
Expanded Text, NutriFacts or Marquee
Message.
F5 - Delete Permanently removes a Special Message,
Expanded Text, NutriFacts or Marquee
Message from scale memory.
F8 - View More Allows you to view additional PLU’s that
Products use the particular “message.” This “F”
key will only appear if more screens are
needed to view other PLU’s that use the
same “message.”

3 - 21 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

Special Messages This function allows you to create, copy from another PLU,
edit, use or delete a Special Message.

(F1) Create New Special To Create a New Special Message:


Message
1. Make sure the active field is the Special Message field.
2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
be on the Change Special Message Screen.
QUICK STEPS

From Page 3:
1. Position Cursor at Special
Message field
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. TYPE Special Message Text
5. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F1] to select Create New.

Change Product 3 - 22
Quantum Scale System

4. TYPE the new Special Message.

5. PRESS [ESC] to save the Special Message and return to


Change Product - Page 3. The Expanded Text field is now
the active field.

☛ Note
♦ You can create a New Special Message even if one
already exists for this PLU.
♦ The size of the Special Message is determined by the
label type(s) for the PLU. If the Label Type has a Special
Message field, the field determines the size. If both the
Primary and Secondary Label Types have a Special
Message field, the smaller field size is used. If no Special
Message field exists on the label, the large window
appears.

3 - 23 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

(F2) Copy and Edit Special This function allows you to copy and edit a Special Message
Messages from another PLU. You can make changes to it and save it
as a separate Special Message.

QUICK STEPS To Copy and Edit a Special Message:

From Page 3: 1. Make sure the active field is the Special Message field.
1. Position Cursor at Special 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
Message field be on the Change Special Message Screen.
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F2]
4. TYPE Product Number
5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
6. TYPE new Special Message
7. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F2] to select Copy and Edit.

Change Product 3 - 24
Quantum Scale System

4. TYPE the Product Number of the Special Message you


want to copy.

5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to view the


Special Message.
6. If required, use the Text Editor to change the Special
Message. Refer to the Appendix to get a complete
description of how to use the Text Editor.
7. PRESS [ESC] to save the Special Message and return to
Change Product - Page 3. The Expanded Text field is now
the active field.

3 - 25 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Use Special Messages This selection allows you to use the same Special Message
for numerous PLU’s. This is especially helpful in reducing
the amount of memory that’s required to store the
information in the scale.
QUICK STEPS
To access the Use Special Message function:
From Page 3:
1. Position Cursor at Special 1. Make sure the active field is the Special Message field.
Message field 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
2. PRESS [F6] be on the Change Special Message Screen.
3. PRESS [F3]
4. TYPE Product Number
5. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F3] to select Use.

Change Product 3 - 26
Quantum Scale System

4. TYPE the Product Number of the Special Message you


want to use.

5. PRESS [ENTER] to save the change. The cursor moves


automatically to the Expanded Text field.

(F4) Edit Special Messages This function allows you to edit a previously created Special
Message.

1. Make sure the active field is the Special Message field.


QUICK STEPS 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
be on the Change Special Message Screen that details the
From Page 3: Products that use this Special Message.
1. Position Cursor at Special
Message field
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F4]
4. PRESS [F5] or [F7] (If
necessary)
5. Edit Special Message Text
6. PRESS [ESC]

3 - 27 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F4] to select Edit.

4. When you select Edit, you will be asked if you are


editing the Special Message for this product only or for
all of the products that use this Special Message. (This
screen will only appear if there are other PLU’s that use
this Special Message.)
5. If there are no other PLU’s that use the Special Message,
the scale goes directly to the Text Editor.
6. PRESS [F5] to edit the Special Message for All Products -
-- OR -- PRESS [F7] to edit the Special Message for This
Product Only.

Change Product 3 - 28
Quantum Scale System

7. Use the Text Editor to edit the Special Message. Refer to


the Appendix to get a complete description of how to
use the Text Editor.

8. PRESS [ESC] to save the Special Message and return to


Change Product - Page 3. The Expanded Text field is now
the active field.

(F5) Delete Special Message This selection permanently removes the Special Message
from the scale’s memory.

To Delete a Special Message:


QUICK STEPS
1. Make sure the active field is the Special Message field.
From Page 3: 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
1. Position Cursor at Special be on the Change Special Message Screen that details the
Message field Products that use this Special Message.
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F5]
4. Confirm All or This PLU
Only (If necessary)
5. PRESS [F5] or [F7] (If
needed)
6. Verify Deletion
7. PRESS [ESC] to exit
Change Product

3 - 29 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F5] to select Delete. If the Special Message is not


used by any other PLU, then it will be deleted
immediately.

4. If several PLU’s use the same Special Message, when


you select Delete, you will be asked if you are deleting
the Special Message for this product only or for all of the
products that use this Special Message.
5. PRESS [F5] to Delete the Special Message for All
Products -- OR -- PRESS [F7] to Delete the Special
Message for This Product Only.

Change Product 3 - 30
Quantum Scale System

6. Verify that the Special Message was deleted. The cursor


automatically moves to the Expanded Text field.

Expanded Text From this selection, you can create, copy from another PLU,
edit, use or delete Expanded Text.

☛ Note
Before you begin working with Expanded Text, verify
whether Word Wrap is On or Off. Refer to Using Word Wrap
in Chapter 7 for a detailed explanation.

(F1) Create New Expanded To Create Expanded Text:


Text
1. Make sure the active field is the Expanded Text field.

3 - 31 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now


QUICK STEPS be on the Change Expanded Text Screen. (Remember, the
screen that appears depends on previous Expanded Text
From Page 3: entries.)
1. Position Cursor at
Expanded Text field
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. TYPE new Expanded Text
5. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F1] to select Create New.

4. TYPE the new Expanded Text.

Change Product 3 - 32
Quantum Scale System

5. PRESS [ESC] to save the Expanded Text and return to


Change Product - Page 3. The NutriFacts field is now the
active field.

(F2) Copy and Edit This function allows you to copy and edit Expanded Text
Expanded Text from another PLU. You can make changes to it and save it
as a separate Expanded Text file.

QUICK STEPS To Copy and Edit Expanded Text:

From Page 3: 1. Make sure the active field is the Expanded Text field.
1. Position Cursor at 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
Expanded Text field be on the Change Expanded Text Screen.
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F2]
4. TYPE Product Number
5. PRESS [ENTER]
6. TYPE new Expanded Text
7. PRESS [ESC]

3 - 33 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F2] to select Copy and Edit.

4. TYPE the Product Number of the Expanded Text you


want to copy.

Change Product 3 - 34
Quantum Scale System

5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to view the


Expanded Text.
6. If required, use the Text Editor to change the Expanded
Text. Refer to the Appendix to get a complete
description of how to use the Text Editor.

7. PRESS [ESC] to save the Expanded Text and return to


Change Product - Page 3. The NutriFacts field is now the
active field.

✎ Tip
If the all the Expanded Text information will be used on
another PLU, select Use (F3) to reduce the memory
requirements.

3 - 35 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Use Expanded Text This selection allows you to use the same Expanded Text for
numerous PLU’s. This is especially helpful in reducing the
amount of memory that’s required to store the information
in the scale.
QUICK STEPS
Expanded text can be automatically adjusted to fit the width
From Page 3: of the field when changing label types if there are no
1. Position Cursor at carriage returns in the expanded text. Refer to Using Word
Expanded Text field Wrap in chapter 7 for further explanation.
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F3] To access the Use Expanded Text function:
4. TYPE Product Number
5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼] 1. Make sure the active field is the Expanded Text field.
2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
be on the Change Expanded Text Screen.

3. PRESS [F3] to select Use.

Change Product 3 - 36
Quantum Scale System

4. TYPE the Product Number of the Expanded Text you


want to use.

5. PRESS [ENTER] to save the change. The cursor moves


automatically to the NutriFacts field.

(F4) Edit Expanded Text This function allows you to edit previously created
Expanded Text.

1. Make sure the active field is the Expanded Text field.


QUICK STEPS 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
be on the Change Expanded Text Screen that details the
From Page 3: Products that use this Expanded Text.
1. Position Cursor at
Expanded Text field
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F4]
4. PRESS [F5] or [F7]
5. Edit Expanded Text
6. PRESS [ESC]

3 - 37 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F4] to select Edit.

4. When you select Edit, you will be asked if you are


editing the Expanded Text for this product only or for all
of the products that use this Expanded Text. (This
screen only appears if more than one (1) PLU uses the
Expanded Text.)
5. If there are no other PLU’s that use the Expanded Text,
the scale goes directly to the Text Editor.
6. PRESS [F5] to edit the Expanded Text for All Products
-- OR -- PRESS [F7] to edit the Expanded Text for This
Product Only.

Change Product 3 - 38
Quantum Scale System

7. Use the Text Editor to edit the Expanded Text. Refer to


the Appendix to get a complete description of how to
use the Text Editor.

8. When finished, PRESS [ESC] to save the Expanded Text


and return to Change Product - Page 3. The NutriFacts
field is now the active field.

3 - 39 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

(F5) Delete Expanded Text This selection permanently removes Expanded Text from
the scale’s memory.

To Delete Expanded Text:


QUICK STEPS
1. Make sure the active field is the Expanded Text field.
From Page 3: 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
1. Position Cursor at be on the Change Expanded Text Screen that details the
Expanded Text field Products that use this Expanded Text.
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F5]
4. Confirm All or This PLU
Only (If necessary)
5. PRESS [F5] or [F7] (If
needed)
6. Verify Deletion
7. PRESS [ESC] to exit
Change Product

3. PRESS [F5] to select Delete.

Change Product 3 - 40
Quantum Scale System

4. If the Expanded Text is not used by any other PLU, then


it will be deleted immediately.
5. If several PLU’s use the same Expanded Text, when you
select Delete, you will be asked if you are deleting the
Expanded Text for this product only or for all of the
products that use this Expanded Text.
6. PRESS [F5] to Delete the Expanded Text for All Products
-- OR -- PRESS [F7] to Delete the Expanded Text for This
Product Only.

7. Verify that the Expanded Text was deleted.

8. The cursor moves automatically to the NutriFacts field.

3 - 41 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

NutriFacts Data This function allows you to create, edit, copy or delete
NutriFacts Data for a PLU. NutriFacts Data is specific to
one (1) PLU only. You can copy information from one PLU
to another; however, it then becomes unique for that PLU.

☛ Note
Before you can enter NutriFacts, you must select a Primary
or Secondary Printer Label Type that will print NutriFacts
information. A complete list of Label Types that will allow
you to print NutriFacts information is found in Chapter 7.
The FDA Nutrifacts secondary label defaults to 0 when
printing on label types smaller than the default primary
label type.

If you select a Label Type that does not print NutriFacts


data, then the Change Text Field option will be disabled
when the active field is NutriFacts.

Change Product 3 - 42
Quantum Scale System

(F1) Create New NutriFacts To Create NutriFacts Data:


Data
1. Make sure the active field is the NutriFacts field.
2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
be on the Change NutriFacts Data Screen.
QUICK STEPS

From Page 3:
1. Position Cursor at
NutriFacts field
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. TYPE NutriFacts Data
5. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F1] to select Create New.

3 - 43 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

4. TYPE the new NutriFacts data.

5. PRESS [ESC] to save the NutriFacts and return to Change


Product - Page 3. The Marquee Message field is now the
active field.

(F2) Copy and Edit This function allows you to copy and edit NutriFacts data
NutriFacts Data from another PLU. You can make changes to it and save it
as separate NutriFacts.

QUICK STEPS To Copy and Edit NutriFacts Data:

From Page 3: 1. Make sure the active field is the NutriFacts field.
1. Position Cursor at the 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
NutriFacts field be on the Change NutriFacts Data Screen.
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F2]
4. TYPE Product Number
5. PRESS [ENTER]
6. TYPE NutriFacts Data
7. PRESS [ESC]

Change Product 3 - 44
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F2] to select Copy and Edit.

4. TYPE the Product Number of the NutriFacts data you


want to copy.

3 - 45 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to view the


NutriFacts data.
6. Change the necessary fields. PRESS [ENTER] or
[DOWN ARROW (▼) to move to the next field.

7. PRESS [ESC] to save the NutriFacts and return to Change


Product - Page 3. The Marquee Messages field is now the
active field. Remember that the NutriFacts data is now
saved for this PLU only.

☛ Note
Because NutriFacts data is unique for each PLU, the Use
option (F3) is not available.

Change Product 3 - 46
Quantum Scale System

(F4) Edit NutriFacts Data This function allows you to edit previously created
NutriFacts Data.

1. Make sure the active field is the NutriFacts field.


2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
be on the Change NutriFacts Data Screen.
QUICK STEPS

From Page 3:
1. Position Cursor at Special
Message field
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F4]
4. Edit NutriFacts Data
5. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F4] to select Edit.

3 - 47 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

4. Use the ARROW KEYS to move the cursor to the fields


you need to edit. TYPE the new NutriFacts data.

5. PRESS [ESC] to save the NutriFacts and return to Change


Product - Page 3. The Marquee Message field is now the
active field.

(F5) Delete NutriFacts Data This selection permanently removes the NutriFacts Data
from the scale’s memory.

To Delete NutriFacts Data:


QUICK STEPS
1. Make sure the active field is the NutriFacts field.
From Page 3: 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
1. Position Cursor at the be on the Change NutriFacts Data Screen.
NutriFacts field
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F5]
4. Verify Deletion

Change Product 3 - 48
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F5] to select Delete.

4. Verify on the Change Product - Page 3 Screen that the


NutriFacts data was deleted. The NutriFacts box should
now read No NutriFacts Data. The cursor is now on the
Marquee Message field.

3 - 49 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

Marquee Messages Marquee Messages can be created for each product within
your scale system. They can be constructed in numerous
ways to gain customer attention. Depending on your
merchandising strategy, you may setup the Marquee
Message to display the following characteristics:

“F” Command Purpose


Marquee Editor F1 - Scroll This command moves each character
in the text group from right to left
across the display. (See note on next
page.)
F2 - Frame This command displays the text group
without moving characters to new
positions.
F3 - Blink On/Blink Off The Blink On/Off toggle blinks the
text group surrounded by Blink On
and Blink Off at 1.0 blinks per second.
F4 - Clear The Clear command clears the display.
F5 - Hold In the Scroll mode, this command
freezes the display for one (1) second.
In the Frame mode, it adds one (1)
second to the display time.
F6 - Roll This command rolls the message off to
the left before proceeding with
additional information.
F7 - Scroll/Frame Speed When in the Scroll mode, you can
choose from the following speeds:
♦ Slow - 2 Characters/Second
♦ Normal - 3 Characters/Second
♦ Quick - 4 Characters/Second
♦ XQuick - 5 Characters/Second

When in the Frame mode, you can


choose from the following speeds:
♦ Slow - 2.0 Seconds/Frame
♦ Normal - 1.5 Seconds/Frame
♦ Quick - 1.0 Second/Frame
♦ XQuick - 0.5 Seconds/Frame
F8 - Start/Stop Marquee This function allows you to start or
Test stop the Marquee Message preview on
the Control Panel Display.

Change Product 3 - 50
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
The term Text Block refers to an entire Marquee Message,
words within a message or characters within a message. In
the following explanation, the word is used
interchangeably.

✎ Tip
If you want a text block to perform a function, you must first
enter the command, then type the marquee message text
block.

3 - 51 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

(F1) Create New Marquee To Create a New Marquee Message:


Message
1. Make sure the active field is the Marquee Message field.
2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
be on the Change Marquee Message Screen.
QUICK STEPS

From Page 3:
1. Position Cursor at Marquee
Message field
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. TYPE Marquee Message
Text
5. Use the Marquee Editor (If
needed)
6. PRESS [F8] / PRESS [F8]
7. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F1] to select Create New.

Change Product 3 - 52
Quantum Scale System

4. TYPE the new Marquee Message.


5. If required, use the Marquee Editor to set Marquee
Message characteristics. Refer to the Appendix to get a
complete description of how to use the Marquee Editor.

6. To view the Marquee Message, PRESS [F8] to select Start


Marquee Test. PRESS [F8] again to stop the preview.
7. PRESS [ESC] to save the Marquee Message and return to
Change Product - Page 1. The Product Number field is
now the active field.

3 - 53 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

(F2) Copy and Edit Marquee This function allows you to copy and edit a Marquee
Messages Message from another PLU. You can make changes to it
and save it as a separate Marquee Message.

QUICK STEPS To Copy and Edit a Marquee Message:

From Page 3: 1. Make sure the active field is the Marquee Message field.
1. Position Cursor at Marquee 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
Message field be on the Change Marquee Message Screen.
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F2]
4. TYPE Product Number
5. PRESS [F8]
6. TYPE new Marquee
Message
7. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F2] to select Copy and Edit.

Change Product 3 - 54
Quantum Scale System

4. TYPE the Product Number of the Marquee Message you


want to copy.

5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to view the


Marquee Message.
6. PRESS [F8] to select Start Marquee Test. This allows you
to view the Marquee Message (in the Box at the bottom
of the display) as it will appear on the Marquee Display.

3 - 55 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

7. If required, use the Marquee Editor to change the


Marquee Message display characteristics. Refer to the
Appendix to get a complete description of how to use
the Marquee Editor.
8. PRESS [ESC] to save the Marquee Message and return to
Change Product - Page 1. The Product Number field is
now the active field.

(F3) Use Marquee Messages This selection allows you to use the same Marquee Message
for numerous PLU’s. This is especially helpful in reducing
the amount of memory that’s required to store the
information in the scale.
QUICK STEPS
To access the Use Marquee Message function:
From Page 3:
1. Position Cursor at Marquee 1. Make sure the active field is the Marquee Message field.
Message field 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
2. PRESS [F6] be on the Change Marquee Message Screen.
3. PRESS [F3]
4. TYPE Product Number
5. PRESS [ESC]

Change Product 3 - 56
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F3] to select Use.

4. TYPE the Product Number of the Marquee Message you


want to use.

5. PRESS [ENTER] to save the change. The cursor moves


automatically to the Product Number field on Change
Product - Page 1.

3 - 57 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

(F4) Edit Marquee Messages This function allows you to edit a previously created
Marquee Message.

1. Make sure the active field is the Marquee Message field.


QUICK STEPS 2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
be on the Change Marquee Message Screen that details
From Page 3: the Products that use this Marquee Message.
1. Position Cursor at Marquee
Message field
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F4]
4. PRESS [F5] or [F7]
5. Edit Marquee Message
Text and Format
6. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F4] to select Edit.

Change Product 3 - 58
Quantum Scale System

4. When you select Edit, you will be asked if you are


editing the Marquee Message for this product only or for
all of the products that use this Marquee Message.
5. If there are no other PLU’s that use the Marquee
Message, the scale goes directly to the Marquee Editor.
6. PRESS [F5] to edit the Marquee Message for All
Products -- OR -- PRESS [F7] to edit the Marquee
Message for This Product Only.

7. Use the Marquee Editor to edit the Marquee Message


display characteristics. Refer to the Appendix to get a
complete description of how to use the Marquee Editor.
8. PRESS [ESC] to save the Marquee Message and return to
the Change Product - Page 1. The Product Number field
is now the active field.

3 - 59 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

(F5) Delete Marquee This selection permanently removes the Marquee Message
Messages from the scale’s memory.

To Delete a Marquee Message:

QUICK STEPS 1. Make sure the active field is the Marquee Message field.
2. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field. You should now
From Page 3: be on the Change Marquee Message Screen that details
1. Position Cursor at Marquee the Products that use this Marquee Message.
Message field
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS [F5]
4. Confirm All or This
Product Only (If needed)
5. PRESS [F5] or [F7] (if
needed)
6. Verify Deletion
7. PRESS [ESC] to exit
Change Product

3. PRESS [F5] to select Delete.

4. If the Marquee Message is not used by any other PLU,


then it will be deleted immediately.
5. If several PLU’s use the same Marquee Message, when
you select Delete, you will be asked if you are deleting
the Marquee Message for this product only or for all of
the products that use this Marquee Message.

Change Product 3 - 60
Quantum Scale System

6. PRESS [F5] to Delete the Marquee Message for All


Products -- OR -- PRESS [F7] to Delete the Marquee
Message for This Product Only.

7. The cursor moves automatically to the Product Number


field on Change Product - Page 1. To verify that the
Marquee Message was deleted, PRESS [UP ARROW
(▲)] or [PREV] to return to Change Product - Page 3. If
the deletion took place, the Marquee Message field
should be empty.

8. PRESS [ESC] to return to Change Product - Page 1.

3 - 61 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

Time Stamp Changes As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, a different


screen appears if IntraNet is ON when you PRESS [F1] to
select Change Product from the Supervisor Menu. From this
menu, you may select to make changes immediately or at a
QUICK STEPS specified time and date. By selecting Time Stamp Changes
[F2], you are able to log onto any Quantum Scale in the
From the Change Product Menu: department and specify a date and time that you want the
1. PRESS [F2] changes to take place. Then, enter the changes that will take
2. TYPE Date (MM/DD/YY) effect at that specified date and time. Keep in mind that
3. PRESS [ENTER] these changes will affect all the Quantum Scales in the
4. TYPE Time (HH:MM) department networked by IntraNet.
5. PRESS [F3] - If Needed
6. PRESS [F1] To specify a specific date and time for changes to take place:

1. PRESS [F2] on the Change Product Menu.

2. TYPE the Date as a six digit number (MM/DD/YY).


3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the Time field.
4. TYPE the Time as a four digit number (HH:MM).
5. PRESS [F3] to change AM/PM as necessary.

Change Product 3 - 62
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
In the event you have previously set a time for changes to
occur and that time hasn’t arrived, the following screen will
appear.

3 - 63 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

6. When you have the correct Date and Time, PRESS [F1]
to Begin Making Changes. When you press [F1], you are
then sent to the Change Product: Unit Price Screen.

7. Proceed making necessary changes as you would if you


were making changes to take effect immediately.

☛ Note
All product changes will be recorded until you exit the
Change Product functions. The bottom of the Change
Product Screen shows you the date and time you’ve selected
for the changes to take effect.

Change Product 3 - 64
Quantum Scale System

Making Changes to In previous sections of this chapter, you learned how to Add
Product Information a New Class, Edit a Class and Add a New Product. For the
remainder of the chapter, we’re going to focus on Making
Changes to Product Information (i.e., editing a PLU record).

The Change Product function is designed so that you can


easily change:
• One specific field
* Unit Price
* Tare
* Shelf Life/Product Life
* Class
• All Price Fields
• All fields
• Batch Price Changes (Specific Range of PLU’s)

3 - 65 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

Accessing the Change To access the Change Product Menu Screen:


Product Menu Screen 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Change
Product.

2. If you are on the Change Product Screen, PRESS [F1] to


select Immediate Changes --OR-- PRESS [F2] to select
Time Stamp Changes. You should now be on the
Change Product: Unit Price Screen.

Change Product 3 - 66
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field. You should


now be on the Change Product Selection Menu Screen.

3 - 67 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

(F1) Changing the Unit Price To change only the Unit Price of a product:

1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1]. You are now on


the Change Product Screen.
QUICK STEPS 2. If IntraNet is turned ON, select Immediate or Time
Stamp Changes. The system defaults to the Change
From the Supervisor Menu: Product: Unit Price Screen.
1. PRESS [F1]
2. PRESS [F1] or [F2] (If
needed)
3. TYPE Product Number
4. PRESS [ENTER]
5. Verify Description
6. TYPE Unit Price
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

3. TYPE the Product Number you want to change.


4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the Unit Price field.
5. Verify the Description of the product you want to
change.
6. TYPE the Unit Price.

Change Product 3 - 68
Quantum Scale System

7. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field


so you can change another PLU or PRESS [ESC] to save
the changes and return to the Supervisor Menu or to the
Change Product Menu if IntraNet is ON.

☛ Note
If you need to Delete, Change Another Field or Add a New
Product Number, refer to those sections previously in this
manual.

(F2) Changing Tare From the Change Product: Tare Screen, you can change only
the Tare weight of a product.

To change only the Tare weight:


QUICK STEPS
1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1]. You are now on
From the Change Product the Change Product Screen.
Selection Menu Screen: 2. If IntraNet is turned ON, select Immediate or Time
1. PRESS [F1] Stamp Changes. The system defaults to the Change
2. PRESS [F1] or [F2] (If Product: Unit Price Screen.
needed) 3. PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field.
3. PRESS [F5]
4. PRESS [F2]
5. TYPE Product Number
6. PRESS [ENTER]
7. Verify Description
8. TYPE Tare Weight Value
9. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

3 - 69 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [F2] to select Tare.

5. TYPE the Product Number you want to change.


6. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the Tare field.
7. Verify the Description of the product.

8. TYPE the new Tare Weight.


9. TYPE the new Proportional Tare value.
10. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field
so you can change another PLU or PRESS [ESC] to save
the changes and return to the Supervisor Menu or the
Change Product Menu if IntraNet is turned ON.

Change Product 3 - 70
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
By Count and Fixed Weight PLU’s do not have a tare. If you
enter a By Count or Fixed Weight PLU Number, a message
windows appears alerting you to this fact.

3 - 71 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
The Tare field may be shown as Forced Tare and/or Platter
Tare. Platter Tare may be configured in the Service Mode
during the initial scale set-up.
1. If configured, each Random Weight PLU may be set-up
with Forced Tare or Platter Tare.

Operating in Forced Tare If you are operating in the Forced Tare Mode:
Mode 1. With the cursor on the Tare field, PRESS [CLEAR]. The
field name changes to Forced Tare.
2. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field or
PRESS [ESC] to exit and return to the Supervisor Menu
Screen.

Operating in Platter Tare If you are operating in the Platter Tare Mode:
Mode 1. With the cursor on the Tare field, place the platter
package container on the Scale Platter. The scale will
automatically insert the Tare value.
2. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field
or PRESS [ESC] to exit and return to the Supervisor
Menu Screen.

Change Product 3 - 72
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Changing Shelf From this screen, you can change the Shelf Life and Product
Life/Product Life Life of a product.

To change the Shelf Life/Product Life:

1. PRESS [F3] to select Shelf Life.


QUICK STEPS

From the Change Product


Selection Menu Screen:
1. PRESS [F3]
2. TYPE Product Number
3. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
4. Verify Description
5. TYPE Shelf Life Value
6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
7. TYPE Product Life Value
8. PRESS [F1] or [ESC]

2. TYPE the Product Number you want to change


3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the Shelf Life field.
4. Verify the Description of the product.

3 - 73 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

5. TYPE the new Shelf Life Number.


6. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the Product Life field.
7. TYPE the new Product Life Number.
8. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field
or PRESS [ESC] to exit and return to the Change Product
Menu Screen.

(F4) Changing a Product’s From this screen, you can change a Product’s Reporting
Reporting Class Class.

✎ Tip
A Class Structure is necessary to fully utilize the Product
LookUp Library (HELP) in the Operate Mode. Refer to the
Appendix to view a typical Class Structure.

Change Product 3 - 74
Quantum Scale System

QUICK STEPS To change a product’s Reporting Class:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. PRESS [F4] to select Class.


1. PRESS [F4]
2. TYPE Product Number
3. PRESS [ENTER]
4. Verify Description
5. TYPE new Class Number
6. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

2. TYPE the Product Number you want to change.


3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW].
4. Verify the Product Description.

5. TYPE the new Class Number.


6. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field
or PRESS [ESC] to exit and return to the Change Product
Menu Screen.

3 - 75 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

(F6) Changing All Price The All Price Fields selection allows you to change all price
Fields related information for a product.

To access All Price Fields:

QUICK STEPS 1. PRESS [F6] to select All Price Fields.

From the Change Product


Selection Menu Screen:
1. PRESS [F6]
2. TYPE Product Number
3. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]
4. Verify Description
5. Follow PLU Type
Guidelines

2. TYPE the Product Number.


3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the next field.
4. Verify the Description of the product you want to
change.
5. Follow the guidelines for changing the price fields based
on the PLU type (i.e., Items Sold By Weight, By Count,
or Fixed Weight)

Change Product 3 - 76
Quantum Scale System

Random Weight PLU’s 1. Complete Steps 1 - 5 from the Changing All Price Fields
section to prepare to change a Random Weight PLU.
2. TYPE the By Count Number of Zero (0).
QUICK STEPS 3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the Unit Price field.
From the Change Product 4. TYPE the Unit Price.
Screen: 5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
1. TYPE By Count Value the Tare field.
2. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼] 6. TYPE the Tare Weight, Platter Tare or Forced Tare
3. TYPE Unit Price Value Value.
4. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼] 7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
5. TYPE Tare Weight, Platter the Proportional Tare field.
Tare or Forced Tare Value 8. TYPE the Proportional Tare Value.
6. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼] 9. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field
7. TYPE Proportional Tare or [ESC] to save the changes.
Value
8. PRESS [ESC]

3 - 77 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

By Count PLU’s 1. Complete Steps 1 - 5 from the All Price Fields section to
prepare to change an Item Sold By Count.
QUICK STEPS 2. TYPE the By Count Number of two (2) or more.
3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
From the Change Product the Unit Price field.
Screen: 4. TYPE the Unit Price.
1. TYPE By Count Value > 2 5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
2. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼] the Exception Price field.
3. TYPE Unit Price Value 6. TYPE the Exception Price.
4. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼] 7. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field
5. TYPE Exception Price or [ESC] to save the changes.
Value
6. PRESS [ESC]

Change Product 3 - 78
Quantum Scale System

Fixed Weight PLU’s 1. Complete Steps 1 - 5 from the All Price Fields section to
prepare to change an Item Sold By Fixed Weight.
QUICK STEPS 2. TYPE the By Count Number.
3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
From the Change Product the Unit Price field.
Screen: 4. TYPE the Unit Price.
1. TYPE By Count Value 5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
2. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼] the Net Weight field.
3. TYPE Unit Price Value 6. TYPE the Net Weight (oz. or kg).
4. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼] 7. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field
5. TYPE Net Weight Value or [ESC] to save the changes.
6. PRESS [ESC]

3 - 79 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

Fluid Ounce PLU’s To change all the price fields on a Fluid Ounce PLU:

QUICK STEPS 1. Complete Steps 1 - 5 from the All Price Fields section to
prepare to change an Item Sold By Fluid Ounce.
From the Change Product 2. TYPE the By Count Number.
Screen: 3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the Unit Price field.
1. Complete Steps 1 - 5 4. TYPE the Unit Price.
2. TYPE the By Count 5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
3. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼] the Fluid Ounce field.
4. TYPE the Unit Price 6. TYPE the Fluid Ounce value (oz.).
5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼] 7. PRESS [ENTER] to return to the Product Number field
6. TYPE the Fluid Ounce or [ESC] to save the changes.
value
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC]

☛ Note
You will notice common changes to the screen when you
enter certain PLU types.
♦ Tare will change to Exception Price if By Count equals 1
or higher.
♦ Tare will change to Net Weight (oz. or kg) if it is a Fixed
Weight PLU.
♦ Tare will change to Fluid Ounces if it is a Fluid Ounce
PLU.

Change Product 3 - 80
Quantum Scale System

(F7) Changing All Fields A complete explanation of how to change All Fields is found
in the Add a New Product section of this chapter. Refer to
this section for a complete explanation of using this “F” Key.

(F8) Making Batch Price Batch Price Changes gives you the ability to change the price
Changes of a range of PLU’s at one time. The range can be
determined by either Class or a Range of PLU Numbers.
The price change can be handled as either an Increase or
Decrease; and by percentage or fixed dollar amount.

To access Batch Price Changes:

1. PRESS [F8] on the Change Product Selection Menu to


QUICK STEPS
select Batch Price Changes. You should now be on the
From Change Product Selection Batch Price Changes Screen.
Menu Screen:
1. PRESS [F8]

3 - 81 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

Batch Price Changes – 1. From the Batch Price Changes Screen, PRESS [F5] to
By Class select By Class.

QUICK STEPS

From Batch Price Changes


Screen:
1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F3]
3. PRESS [F4]
4. TYPE Dollar Amount or
Percentage Change
5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
6. TYPE Class Number
7. PRESS [F1]
8. PRESS [ESC]

2. PRESS [F3] to toggle between Increase or Decrease.


3. PRESS [F4] to toggle between By Dollar Amount or By
Percentage.
4. TYPE the Dollar Amount --OR-- Percentage Change.

Change Product 3 - 82
Quantum Scale System

5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to the


Class field.
6. TYPE the Class Number where you want the changes to
occur. This will change the Price of all the products that
report to the entered Class Number.
7. PRESS [F1] to Begin Making Changes. If for some reason
you need to stop the changes, PRESS [F1] again to Stop
Making Changes.

8. When the changes have been made, PRESS [ESC] to


return to the Change Product Menu Screen.

3 - 83 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

Batch Price Changes – 1. From the Batch Price Changes Screen, PRESS [F5] to select
By PLU Range By PLU Range.

QUICK STEPS

From the Batch Price Change


Screen:
1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F3]
3. PRESS [F4]
4. TYPE Dollar Amount or
Percentage Change
5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
6. TYPE the beginning
Product Number
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
8. TYPE the ending Product
Number 2. PRESS [F3] to toggle between Increase or Decrease.
9. PRESS [F1] 3. PRESS [F4] to toggle between By Dollar Amount or By
10. PRESS [ESC] Percentage.
4. TYPE the Dollar Amount --OR-- Percentage Change.

Change Product 3 - 84
Quantum Scale System

5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to the


Begin Changes at Product Number field.
6. TYPE the beginning Product Number.
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to the
End Changes at Product Number field.
8. TYPE the ending Product Number.
9. PRESS [F1] to Begin Making Changes. If for some reason
you need to stop the changes, PRESS [F1] again to Stop
Making Changes.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Change Product Menu


Screen.

3 - 85 Change Product
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up a Forced Price Forced price means that the PLU is set up to force the
PLU Operator to enter a price before the product can be weighed.
You can set up a forced price for Random Weight, Fixed
Weight, or By Count PLUs.

Fixed Weight or By Count PLUs recalculate the total price


when by count is changed.

☛ Note
You cannot use a forced price PLU in Self Service mode.

QUICK STEPS To set up a forced price PLU:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Change
1. PRESS [F1] Product.
2. Enter the PLU 2. Enter the PLU in the Product Number field.
3. PRESS [ENTER] or 3. If this is an existing PLU, PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN
[DOWN ARROW] ARROW] to move to the Unit Price field.
4. At Unit Price field, PRESS --OR--
[CLEAR] If this is a new PLU, a message displays informing you
5. PRESS [ENTER] or [ESC] that the Product Number you entered doesn’t exist.
A. PRESS [F1] to add the PLU as a new product. A
message displays asking you to specify whether the
new PLU is a Random Weight, Fixed Weight or Fluid
Ounce item.
B. PRESS [F1] to add it as a Random Weight item
-- OR -- PRESS [F2] to add it as a Fixed Weight item,
--OR-- PRESS [F3] to add it as a Fluid Ounce item.
C. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW] to move to the
Unit Price field.

☛ Note
Verify that the Number System is set to 02 in order to create
a forced price PLU.

4. With the cursor on the Unit Price field, PRESS [CLEAR].


The field name changes to Forced Price.
5. PRESS [ENTER] to continue changing the product
information or PRESS [ESC] to exit.

Change Product 3 - 86
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Four: Totals Menu

♦ Totals Menu Overview


♦ View Totals
♦ Clear Totals
♦ Void Totals
♦ Configure Totals Type
♦ Collect Totals via MiniNet II

4-1 Totals Menu


Quantum Scale System

Totals Menu Flowchart

TOTALS
MENU

PRESS [F2]
Totals
Menu

Clear Totals Configure


View Totals Void Totals
Menu Totals Types
(F1) (F3)
(F2) (F4)

All Product’s Product Create a


Product
Totals Totals Type
(F1)
(F1) (F1) (F1)

One Product’s Operator Edit This


Operator
Totals Totals Type
(F2)
(F2) (F2) (F3)

One Totals
Type Hourly Delete This
Hourly
for All Totals Type
(F3)
Products (F3) (F5)
(F3)

Weight & All Operator Totals


Price Totals Type
(F4) (F5) (F5)

Packages & All Hourly


Void
Runs Totals
(F8)
(F5) (F6)

Items All Totals


(F6) (F8)

Totals Menu 4-2


Quantum Scale System

Totals Menu From the Totals Menu, you can complete the following:
Supervisor Menu ♦ View Product, Operator, or Hourly Totals
“F” Key = F2 ♦ Clear Product, Operator, or Hourly Totals
♦ Void Product, Operator, or Hourly Totals
♦ Configure (Create, Edit or Delete) up to seven (7) Totals
Types
♦ Collect Totals from other Quantum Scales if a MiniNet II
network is installed

An explanation of each is listed in the following table:

Mode Function

View Totals Allows you to look at specific Product,


Operator and Hourly Totals.

Clear Totals Menu Allows you to designate which Totals


you want to delete from the records.

Void Totals Allows you to make an adjustment to


Product, Operator and Hourly Totals
information in the event an error was
made in the Operate Mode.

Configure Totals Types Allows you to create, edit and delete up


to seven (7) Totals Types that you need
to track Totals information in your
operation. The Production Totals type
cannot be changed.

Collect Totals Via Allows you to collect Totals information


MiniNet II if a MiniNet II network is installed.

4-3 Totals Menu


Quantum Scale System

What are Totals? In order to effectively use the Totals Menu Screens, you
must understand what Totals are and the different
components that make up a Totals record.

Totals can be defined as the accumulation of weight, price


(value), packages, runs and items for a given PLU or Class.

There are several different components of a Totals record:

♦ Weight: The total amount of a product weighed (for a


given PLU or Class)
♦ Price: The total value of product weighed (for a given
PLU or Class)
♦ Packages: The total number of packages processed (for a
given PLU or Class)
♦ Runs: Primarily used in the PrePackaged Products
mode, a “Run” is created every time you go into and exit
the Run Screen.
♦ Items: The total count of product’s sold; for every
Random Weight package it adds one item; for every By
Count package it adds the By Count value.

Totals Menu 4-4


Quantum Scale System

QUICK STEPS To access the Totals Menu:

From the Start a Run Screen: 1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [SUPER MENU
1. PRESS [SUPER MENU ON/OFF].
ON/OFF] 2. TYPE your Secret ID Number (if required) and PRESS
2. TYPE ID Number and [ENTER].
PRESS [ENTER] (If 3. (From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Totals
required) Menu. You should now be on the Totals Menu.
3. PRESS [F2]

4-5 Totals Menu


Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
The options that are available in the Totals Menu are
dependent upon whether Totals actually exist and the
configuration of the scale.
For example, the following screen appears if no totals exist
and you have configured the scale for MiniNet II. Notice
that View Totals, Clear Totals Menu and Void Totals are
disabled selections.

Collect Totals via MiniNet will not be shown on the screen if


you have not configured MiniNet II in Scale Setup. Refer to
the Scale Setup chapter for a complete explanation of how to
configure the scale for MiniNet II communication.

Totals Menu 4-6


Quantum Scale System

(F1) View Totals From this option, you can view the following totals
(provided Totals exist):
♦ Product
♦ Operator
♦ Hourly

View Totals allows you to display total weight, total price,


total packages, total runs, and the total items for a Product,
an Operator or for any hour of the day.

The table below gives you the definitions for each.

Term Definition

Product Totals This option displays totals information for


any product number. You must enable
the collection of Product Totals during
Scale Setup. This applies to all totals that
were accumulated since the last time they
were cleared.

Operator Totals This option displays totals information by


Operator Number (if configured). You
must enable the collection of Operator
Totals during Scale Setup. This applies to
all totals that were accumulated since the
last time they were cleared.

Hourly Totals This option displays Hourly Totals


information in a 24-hour breakdown.
You must enable the collection of Hourly
Totals during Scale Setup. This applies to
all totals that were accumulated since the
last time they were cleared.

4-7 Totals Menu


Quantum Scale System

(F1) View Product Totals To View Product Totals:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Totals


Menu.
QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F2]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. TYPE Product Number
4. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
5. Verify the Product
Description
6. PRESS [F5]
7. PRESS [F6]
8. PRESS [PRINT]
9. PRESS [ESC]

2. PRESS [F1] to select View Totals. The display defaults to


Product Totals provided Product Totals is setup to be
collected.

Totals Menu 4-8


Quantum Scale System

3. TYPE the Product Number in the Product Number box.


4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to view the
Product Totals. The default will display the Weight and
Price Totals.
5. Verify the correct Description for the Product Totals.

6. If you want to view the number of packages and runs


processed for this PLU, PRESS [F5] to select Packages
and Runs.

4-9 Totals Menu


Quantum Scale System

7. If you want to view the total number of items processed


for this PLU (i.e., By Count), PRESS [F6] to select Items.

☛ Note
If the PLU is not a By Count PLU, each transaction counts as
one (1) item.

8. PRESS [PRINT] to produce a label(s) with the displayed


totals.

9. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Totals Menu.

Totals Menu 4 - 10
Quantum Scale System

(F2) View Operator Totals To View Operator Totals:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Totals


QUICK STEPS Menu.

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F2]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. PRESS [F2]
4. PRESS [F5]
5. PRESS [F6]
6. PRESS [PRINT]
7. PRESS [ESC]

2. PRESS [F1] to select View Totals. The display defaults to


View Product Totals.

4 - 11 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F2] to select Operator Totals. The display shows


the Weight and Price of all Operator transactions
processed.
4. If you want to view the number of packages and runs
processed by the Operators, PRESS [F5] to select
Packages and Runs.

5. If you want to view the total number of items processed


by the Operators (i.e., By Count), PRESS [F6] to select
Items.

☛ Note
If more Operator Totals exist than can fit on once screen, F8
will be enabled to display the next page of Operator Totals.
[PREV] and [NEXT] can be used to move between pages as
well.

Totals Menu 4 - 12
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
If the PLU is not a By Count PLU, each transaction counts as
one (1) item.

6. PRESS [PRINT] to produce labels with the displayed


totals.

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Totals Menu.

4 - 13 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

(F3) View Hourly Totals To View Hourly Totals:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Totals


QUICK STEPS Menu.

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F2]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. PRESS [F3]
4. PRESS [F5]
5. PRESS [F6]
6. PRESS [PRINT]
7. PRESS [ESC]

2. PRESS [F1] to select View Totals. The display defaults to


Product Totals.

Totals Menu 4 - 14
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F3] to select Hourly Totals. The display shows


in one (1) hour intervals the production totals by the
hour (default is Weight/Price).
4. If you want to view the number of packages and runs
processed at a particular hour of the day, PRESS [F5] to
select Packages and Runs.

5. If you want to view the total number of items processed


at a particular hour of the day (i.e., By Count), PRESS
[F6] to select Items.

☛ Note
If the PLU is not a By Count PLU, each transaction counts as
one (1) item.

4 - 15 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

6. PRESS [PRINT] to produce a label for each hour that has


non-zero totals.

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Totals Menu.

Totals Menu 4 - 16
Quantum Scale System

(F2) Clear Totals From this option, you can do the following:
♦ Clear All Product Totals
♦ Clear All Totals for a Selected Item
♦ Clear All Totals for a Selected Totals Type
♦ Clear All Operator Totals
♦ Clear All Hourly Totals
♦ Clear All Product, Operator and Hourly Totals
simultaneously

The table below gives you the definition and outcome of the
selected function.

Term Definition

Clear All Product Totals Clears item totals for all products
without affecting Operator or Hourly
Totals.

One Product’s Totals Clears all Totals Types for the item
selected.

One Totals Type for All Clears all the totals for the Totals Type
Products selected.

All Operator Totals Clears all operator totals without


affecting Product or Hourly Totals.

All Hourly Totals Clears hourly totals (for all 24 hours)


without affecting Product or Operator
Totals.

All Totals Clears all Product, Operator and


Hourly Totals.

4 - 17 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

QUICK STEPS To access the Clear Totals Menu:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select the
1. PRESS [F2] Totals Menu.
2. PRESS [F2]

2. PRESS [F2] to select the Clear Totals Menu. You should


now be on the Clear Totals Menu.

Totals Menu 4 - 18
Quantum Scale System

(F1) Clear All Product 1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F1] to select All
Totals Product Totals.

QUICK STEPS

From the Clear Totals Menu:


1. PRESS [F1]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. PRESS [ESC]

2. From the Clear All Product Totals Screen, PRESS [F1] to


select Clear These Totals.

3. When finished, Press Any Key to return to the Clear


Totals Menu.

4 - 19 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

(F2) Clear One Product’s 1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F2] to select One
Totals Product’s Totals. You should now be on the Clear One
Product’s Totals Screen.

QUICK STEPS

From the Clear Totals Menu:


1. PRESS [F2]
2. TYPE the Product Number
3. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
4. Verify Product Description
5. PRESS [F5]
6. PRESS [F6]
7. PRESS [F1]
8. PRESS Any Key
9. PRESS [ESC]

2. TYPE the Product Number of the item you want to clear.

Totals Menu 4 - 20
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to enter the


Product Number.
4. Verify the Product Description.
5. View the Totals that will be cleared. PRESS [F5] to view
the Packages and Runs Totals.
6. PRESS [F6] to view the Items Totals.

7. PRESS [F1] to Clear These Totals.


8. After the Totals have been cleared, Press Any Key to
return to the Clear One Product’s Totals Screen.

9. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Clear Totals Menu


--OR-- enter another product whose totals you want to
clear.

4 - 21 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Clear One ‘Totals Type’ 1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F3]. You should
for All Products now be on the Clear One Totals Type for All Products
Screen.

QUICK STEPS

From the Clear Totals Menu:


1. PRESS [F3]
2. TYPE the Product Number
3. PRESS [▲] or [▼] to move
cursor
4. PRESS [F1]
5. Verify Totals Type selected
6. PRESS [F1]
7. PRESS [ESC]

2. PRESS the [UP ARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)]


to move the cursor to the Totals Type you want to clear.
3. When the correct Totals Type is highlighted, PRESS [F1]
to choose Select This Totals Type.

☛ Note
If the Totals Type is grayed so that you cannot select it, it
means that there is no totals information for that Totals
Type.

Totals Menu 4 - 22
Quantum Scale System

4. Verify that the listed Totals Type is the one you want to
clear.
5. To complete the function, PRESS [F1] to select Clear
These Totals.

6. Press Any Key to return to the Clear One Totals Type for
All Products Screen to select another Totals Type.

7. When finished, PRESS [ESC] to return to the Clear Totals


Menu.

4 - 23 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

(F5) Clear All Operator To Clear All Operator Totals:


Totals
1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F5] to select All
Operator Totals.
QUICK STEPS

From the Clear Totals Menu:


1. PRESS [F5]
2. View Totals
3. PRESS [F5]
4. PRESS [F6]
5. PRESS [F1]
6. PRESS Any Key
7. PRESS [ESC]

2. View the Totals.


3. If you want to view Packages and Runs, PRESS [F5].
4. If you want to view Items, PRESS [F6].
5. To clear the totals, PRESS [F1].

Totals Menu 4 - 24
Quantum Scale System

6. When the Clear is complete, Press Any Key to return to


the Clear All Operator Totals Screen.

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Clear Totals Menu.

(F6) Clear All Hourly Totals To Clear All Hourly Totals:

1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F6] to select All


QUICK STEPS Hourly Totals.

From the Clear Totals Menu:


1. PRESS [F6]
2. View Totals
3. PRESS [F8]
4. PRESS [F5] and [F8]
5. PRESS [F6] and [F8]
6. PRESS [F1]
7. PRESS Any Key
8. PRESS [ESC]

4 - 25 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

2. Before clearing these totals, view the totals for Weight


and Price.
3. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page and view hours 13 - 24.

4. To view the Totals for Packages and Runs, PRESS [F5].


Follow the same steps to view Hours 13 - 24.
5. To view the Totals for Items, PRESS [F6]. Follow the
same steps to view Hours 13 - 24.
6. When ready, PRESS [F1] to select Clear These Totals.

7. When the Clear is complete, Press Any Key to return to


the Clear All Hourly Totals Screen.
8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Clear Totals Menu.

Totals Menu 4 - 26
Quantum Scale System

(F8) Clear All Totals To Clear All Totals:

1. From the Clear Totals Menu, PRESS [F8] to select All


QUICK STEPS Totals.

From the Clear Totals Menu:


1. PRESS [F8]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. PRESS [ESC]
4. PRESS [ESC]

2. PRESS [F1] to select Clear These Totals. A message will


appear telling you that “All totals have now been
cleared.”

4 - 27 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

3. Press Any Key to return to the Clear Totals Menu.


4. PRESS [ESC] again to return to the Totals Menu.

(F3) Void Totals Void Totals allows you to subtract a portion of totals
(weight, value, packages or runs) for any Product, Operator,
Hour, or Totals Type.

To use Void Totals:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Totals


Menu.

Totals Menu 4 - 28
Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F3] to select Void Totals.

To Void Product Totals, continue with Steps 3 - 11 listed


below.

(F1) Void Product Totals 3. If not already done, PRESS [F5] to select the Totals Type
you want to Void.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F2]
2. PRESS [F3]
3. PRESS [F5]
4. PRESS [▲] or [▼]
5. PRESS [ESC]
6. TYPE the Product Number
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
8. TYPE Void Amounts and
PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
9. PRESS [F8]
10. TYPE PLU Number or
PRESS [ESC]

4 - 29 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [UP ARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to


move the cursor (highlight) through the Totals Type
List.
5. PRESS [ESC] when you have selected the Totals Type.
You will be returned to the Void Totals Screen.

6. TYPE the Product Number of the item on which you


want to perform a void.
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move you
to the Weight Void Block.

Totals Menu 4 - 30
Quantum Scale System

8. TYPE the Void Amounts for Weight, Price, Packages,


Runs or Items. PRESS [ENTER] to move you from field
to field.
9. Once you’ve entered the Void Amounts, PRESS [F8] to
execute the Void.
10. After you press Void, the Totals values are updated.
You can void another PLU or PRESS [ESC] to return to
the Totals Menu.

(F2) Void Operator Totals 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2].
2. From the Totals Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Void Totals.
3. PRESS [F2] to select Operator Totals.
QUICK STEPS 4. TYPE the Operator ID Number where you want to
perform the void.
From the Supervisor Menu: 5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move you
1. PRESS [F2] to the Weight Void Block.
2. PRESS [F3]
3. PRESS [F2]
4. TYPE the Operator ID
5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
6. TYPE Void Amounts and
PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
7. PRESS [F8]
8. TYPE Operator ID or
PRESS [ESC]

4 - 31 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

6. TYPE the Void Amounts for Weight, Price, Packages,


Runs, or Items. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW
(▼)] to move you from field to field.
7. Once you’ve entered the Void Amounts, PRESS [F8] to
execute the Void.
8. After you press Void, the Totals values are updated. You
can void another Operator’s Totals or PRESS [ESC] to
return to the Totals Menu.

(F3) Void Hourly Totals 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2].
2. From the Totals Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Void Totals.
3. PRESS [F3] to select Hourly Totals.
QUICK STEPS 4. TYPE the Hour (0-23) where you want to perform a
void.
From the Supervisor Menu: 5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move you
1. PRESS [F2] to the Weight Void Block.
2. PRESS [F3]
3. PRESS [F3]
4. TYPE Hour Value
5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
6. TYPE Void Amounts and
PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
7. PRESS [F8]
8. TYPE the Hour Number or
PRESS [ESC]

Totals Menu 4 - 32
Quantum Scale System

6. TYPE the Void Amounts for Weight, Price, Packages,


Runs, or Items. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW
(▼)] to move you from field to field.
7. Once you’ve entered the Void Amounts, PRESS [F8] to
execute the Void.
8. After you press Void, the Totals values are updated. You
can void another Hour’s Totals or PRESS [ESC] to return
to the Totals Menu.

4 - 33 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

(F4) Configure Totals From this function, you can complete the following:
Types ♦ Create up to seven (7) Total Types
♦ Edit Total Types
♦ Delete Total Types

The Total Types that you create can be selected from the
Start a Run Screen when weighing product(s).

To access Configure Totals Types:


QUICK STEPS
1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Totals
From the Supervisor Menu: Menu.
1. PRESS [F2]
2. PRESS [F4]

2. PRESS [F4] to select Configure Totals Types.

Totals Menu 4 - 34
Quantum Scale System

(F1) Create a Type To create a Totals Type:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Totals


Menu.
QUICK STEPS 2. From the Totals Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Configure
Totals Type.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F2]
2. PRESS [F4]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. TYPE Totals Type Name
5. PRESS [F4] (If Needed)
6. PRESS [F5] (If Needed)
7. PRESS [F6] (If Needed)
8. If Yes, TYPE Most
Significant UPC Digit
9. PRESS [F8] (If Needed)
10. PRESS [ESC]

3. From the Configure Totals Types Screen, PRESS [F1] to


select Create a Type. You should now be on the Edit
Totals Type Screen.

4 - 35 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

4. TYPE the new Totals Type Name.


5. PRESS [F4] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals
Type reports to Production Totals (Class # 999999).
6. PRESS [F5] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals
Type allows the Operator to change the first UPC digit
while on the Run Screen.
7. PRESS [F6] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals
Type should automatically change the leading UPC
digit.
8. If [F6] is set to YES, TYPE [Any Digit 0-9] in the Enter
Most Significant UPC Digit Field.

☛ Note
The leading UPC digit can be changed to specify some
internal use for the Bar Code.

9. PRESS [F8] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals


Type allows the Operator to back-date products. Back
dating is used for rewraps. If you select “Yes”, the
operator is prompted to enter the number of days to
backdate the product. The system calculates the shelf life
from the backdate.

10. When complete, PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and


return to the Configure Totals Types Screen.
11. Repeat this procedure until you have entered all your
required Totals Types. You can create a total of seven
(7) Totals Types.

Totals Menu 4 - 36
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Edit Totals Type To Edit This Totals Type:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Totals


Menu.
QUICK STEPS 2. From the Totals Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Configure
Totals Type.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F2]
2. PRESS [F4]
3. PRESS [▲] or [▼] to select
Totals Type
4. PRESS [F3]
5. TYPE new Totals Type
Name
6. PRESS [F4] (If Needed)
7. PRESS [F5] (If Needed)
8. PRESS [F6] (If Needed)
9. If Yes, TYPE Most
Significant UPC Digit
10. PRESS [F8] (If Needed)
11. PRESS [ESC]

3. From the Configure Totals Types Screen, PRESS the [UP


ARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] Key to select the
appropriate Totals Type.
4. PRESS [F3] to select Edit This Type. You should now be
on the Edit Totals Type Screen.

4 - 37 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

5. If required, TYPE the New Totals Type Name.


6. PRESS [F4] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals
Type reports to Production Totals (Class # 999999).
7. PRESS [F5] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals
Type allows the Operator to change the first UPC digit
while on the Run Screen.
8. PRESS [F6] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals
Type should automatically change the leading UPC
digit.
9. If [F6] is set to YES, TYPE [Any Digit 0-9] in the Enter
Most Significant UPC Digit Field.

☛ Note
The leading UPC digit can be changed to specify some
internal use for the Bar Code.

10. PRESS [F8] to toggle YES/NO on whether this Totals


Type allows the Operator to back-date products. Back
dating is used for rewraps. If you select “Yes”, the
operator is prompted to enter the number of days to
backdate the product. The system calculates the shelf life
from the backdate.

11. When complete, PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and


return to the Configure Totals Types Screen.

☛ Note
Production Totals cannot be deleted and its name
“Production” cannot be changed. However, other
properties of configuring “Production” Totals can be edited.

Totals Menu 4 - 38
Quantum Scale System

(F5) Delete Totals Type To Delete a Totals Type:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Totals


Menu.
QUICK STEPS 2. From the Totals Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Configure
Totals Type.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F2]
2. PRESS [F4]
3. PRESS [▲] or [▼] to select
Totals Type
4. PRESS [F5]
5. Confirm Selection
6. PRESS [F1]

3. From the Configure Totals Types Screen, PRESS the [UP


ARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] Key to select the
appropriate Totals Type.
4. PRESS [F5] to select Delete This Type. A message
appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete
this Totals Type.

4 - 39 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

5. To execute the delete, PRESS [F1].

6. Once the delete is complete, you will be returned to the


Configure Totals Types Screen.

(F5) Collect Totals via


MiniNet II

☛ Note
In order to Collect Totals via MiniNet II, the Network
function must be configured for MiniNet II. This function is
available under the Scale Setup - Communications Menu.

Totals Menu 4 - 40
Quantum Scale System

To access Collect Totals via MiniNet:


QUICK STEPS
1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Totals
From the Supervisor Menu: Menu.
1. PRESS [F2] 2. PRESS [F5] to select Collect Totals via MiniNet.
2. PRESS [F5]

3. When you press [F5], the scale searches for each Scale ID
(0 to 15) in succession. It continues until all totals are
collected from the scales connected through MiniNet II.

4. If you need to stop the transfer, PRESS [F1] to select Stop


Transfer.

4 - 41 Totals Menu
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Five: Print Reports Menu

♦ Overview
♦ Print Reports Menu
• Print Product Totals Menu
• Print All Operator Totals
• Print Hourly Totals
• Print All Totals Reports
• Print a Cutting Test Report
♦ Print Products Menu
• Print Product List Menu
• Print Product Review Menu
• Print Time Stamp Changes
♦ Print Flashkeys
♦ Print Operator ID List
♦ Print Label Related Items Menu
• Print Reusable Text Menu
⇒ Print Special Messages Menu
⇒ Print Expanded Text Menu
⇒ Print Marquee Messages Menu
• Print Label Types
• Print Graphics
♦ Print Configuration
♦ Print Miscellaneous Menu

5-1 Print Reports


Quantum Scale System

Print Reports Menu Flowchart

PRINT
REPORTS
MENU

PRESS [F3]
Print Reports
Menu

Products Operator ID Label Related Miscellaneous


Totals Menu Menu Flashkeys List Items Menu Configuration Menu
(F1) (F3) (F6)
(F2) (F4) (F5) (F8)

Product Reusable Operator


Totals Menu Product List Text Menu Changes
(F1) Menu (F1) (F1)
(F1)

All Operator Special Expanded Marquee


Totals Messages Text Messages
(F2) Product
Review Menu Menu Menu
(F1) (F2) (F3)
Menu
Hourly Totals (F2)
Menu
(F3) Label Types
Time Stamp (F2)
Changes
All Totals Menu
Reports (F3)
(F4) Graphics
(F3)

Cutting Test
(F5)

Print Reports 5-2


Quantum Scale System

Print Reports Menu From this function, you can print:


Supervisor Menu ♦ Totals (Product, Operator, Hourly and All Totals)
“F” Key = F3 ♦ Product Information (Product List, Product Review and
Time Stamp Changes)
♦ Flashkeys
♦ Operator ID List
♦ Label Related Items (Special Messages, Expanded Text,
and/or Marquee Messages, Label Types & Graphics)
♦ System Configuration
♦ Miscellaneous Reports (Operator Changes)

The table below details each Menu function.

Report Description
Totals 1. Allows you to print Product Totals by
PLU for a range of items or all items.
2. Allows you to print Hourly Totals for all
hours or range of hours.
3. Allows you to print All Operator Totals.
4. Allows you to print All Totals in the
system.
5. Allows you to print a Cutting Test Report.

Product Information 1. Product List: Allows you to print each


product’s information on a label including
name and number. This can be used to
make a Look Up Library for reference.
2. Product Review: Allows you to print each
product’s information including UPC Bar
Code. These can be used as a Scan Test.
The UPC Code will include a $1.00 price.
3. Time Stamp Changes: If there are
pending Time Stamp Changes, it allows
you to print (for each PLU changed) the
date and time the change is scheduled to
take place.

Flashkeys Allows you to print out what each Flashkey


Screen looks like so you can check to see that
all appropriate entries have been made.

Operator ID List Allows you to print a list of Operator names


and ID numbers.

Label Related Items Allows you to print Reusable Text such as


Special Messages, Expanded Text, and
Marquee Messages with the PLU’s that use
each. It also allows you to print Label Types
and Graphics.

Configuration Allows you to print the system configuration.


This report will only print on Continuous
Label Stock or Listing Paper.

Miscellaneous Reports Allows you to print Operator Changes on a


label; that is the product and operator
information for each field change that occurs
during a transaction.

5-3 Print Reports


Quantum Scale System

QUICK STEPS To access the Print Reports Menu:

From the Start a Run Menu: 1. From the Start a Run Menu, PRESS [SUPER MENU
1. PRESS [SUPER MENU ON/OFF].
ON/OFF] 2. TYPE your Secret ID Number (if required) and PRESS
2. TYPE Secret ID Number [ENTER].
and PRESS [ENTER] (If 3. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3]. You should now be
required) on the Print Reports Menu.
3. PRESS [F3]

☛ Note
Each menu lists the number of records that are available to
be printed. If a menu has 0 records to print, the
accompanying softkey will be disabled.

Print Reports 5-4


Quantum Scale System

(F1) Print Reports To access the Print Reports Menu:


Menu 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select the Print
Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F1] to select the
Totals Menu. You should now be on the Print Totals
QUICK STEPS
Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F1]

From the Print Totals Menu, you can print:


♦ Product Totals
♦ Operator Totals
♦ Hourly Totals
♦ All Totals
♦ Cutting Test Report

5-5 Print Reports


Quantum Scale System

(F1) Print Product Totals 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select the Print
Menu Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F1] to select the
Totals Menu. You should now be on the Print Totals
Menu.
QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. PRESS [F1] or [F2]
5. If [F2], TYPE the beginning
Product Number
6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
7. TYPE the ending Product
Number
8. PRESS [F1]
9. PRESS [ESC]

3. From the Print Totals Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Product


Totals Menu. You should now be on the Print Product
Totals Menu.

Print Reports 5-6


Quantum Scale System

4. To print a report for all product totals, PRESS [F1] to


select Print All.
– OR—
5. To print a report for a specified range of items, PRESS
[F2] to choose Select a Range.

6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning product number.


7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the End Printing at Product Number field.
8. TYPE the Ending Product Number.
9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to
stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When the
report is finished printing, the scale returns you to the
Print Product Totals Menu.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Totals Menu.

5-7 Print Reports


Quantum Scale System

(F2) Print All Operator 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
Totals Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Totals
Menu.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. PRESS [F2]

3. From the Print Totals Menu, PRESS [F2] to select All


Operator Totals. You should now be on the Print
Operator Totals Screen and the report begins printing.
When the report is finished printing, the scale returns
you to the Print Totals Menu.

Print Reports 5-8


Quantum Scale System

(F3) Print Hourly Totals 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Totals
QUICK STEPS Menu.

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. PRESS [F3]
4. PRESS [F1] or [F2]
5. If [F2], TYPE the beginning
Hour Number
6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
7. TYPE the ending Hour
Number
8. PRESS [F1]
9. PRESS [ESC]

5-9 Print Reports


Quantum Scale System

3. From the Print Totals Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Hourly


Totals Menu. You should now be on the Print Hourly
Totals Menu.

4. To print a report for all hourly totals, PRESS [F1] to


select Print All.
– OR—
5. To print a report for a specified range of hours, PRESS
[F2] to choose Select a Range.

Print Reports 5 - 10
Quantum Scale System

6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning hour number.


7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the End Printing at Hour Number field.
8. TYPE the Ending Hour Number.
9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to
stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When the
report is finished printing, the scale returns you to the
Print Hourly Totals Menu.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Totals Menu.

(F4) Print All Totals Reports 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Totals
Menu.
QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. PRESS [F4]

5 - 11 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

3. From the Print Totals Menu, PRESS [F4] to select All


Totals Reports. You should now be on the Print All
Totals Reports Screen and the report begins printing.

4. If needed, PRESS [F1] to Stop Printing. When the report


is finished printing, the scale returns you to the Print
Totals Menu.

Print Reports 5 - 12
Quantum Scale System

(F5) Print a Cutting Test To print a Cutting Test Report:


Report
1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Totals
QUICK STEPS Menu.

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. PRESS [F5]
4. PRESS [▼]
5. PRESS [F3]
6. TYPE Current Gross
Weight
7. PRESS [ENTER]
8. PRESS [F3]
9. Verify Amounts and
PRESS [F1]
10. PRESS [ESC]
11. PRESS [ESC]

3. From the Print Totals Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Cutting


Test.

5 - 13 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move the cursor to the


Totals Type where the PLU’s for the Cutting Test were
subtotaled.
5. TYPE the Current Gross Weight. (See Note).

☛ Note
Total Gross Weight can be accumulative. Every time you
enter a Current Gross Weight, it gets added to the Total
Gross Weight. In some cases, you may not want to clear the
Total Gross Weight. If needed, PRESS [F3] to select Clear
Total Gross Weight.

Print Reports 5 - 14
Quantum Scale System

6. PRESS [ENTER] to add the Current Gross Weight to the


Total Gross Weight and move to the Cutting Test Totals
Label Screen.
7. PRESS [F3] to view the next label. Each time you press
F3, the display shows the Percentage of Gross Weight,
Net Weight, Value (Price), and the Number of Packages
for each PLU, SubClass and Class that was processed.

8. After you verify the amounts on the display, you may


want to print the Cutting Test Report. PRESS [F1] to
Begin Printing. If needed, PRESS [F1] to Stop Printing.

5 - 15 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
The labels print with Percentages for each PLU, SubClass
and Class, as well as the Totals for the selected Totals Type.
While the labels are printing you will be on the Printing
Cutting Test Screen.

Print Reports 5 - 16
Quantum Scale System

9. When printing is complete, the scale returns you to the


Cutting Test Screen. Notice that the Current Gross
Weight was added to the Total Gross Weight.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Totals Menu.

5 - 17 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

(F2) Print Products As mentioned previously, the Print Products Menu allows
Menu you to print on a label:
♦ A list of PLU items including name and number
♦ Each PLU’s product information including:
* Product Description
* Reporting Class
* Fixed Weight, Count or Tare Weight
* Price and Product Number
♦ Each PLU that has a time stamp change attached to it

QUICK STEPS To access the Print Products Menu:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
1. PRESS [F3] Reports Menu.
2. PRESS [F2] 2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F2] to select
Products Menu. You should now be on the Print
Products Menu.

☛ Note
The Time Stamp Changes Menu appears if you have
configured your scale for IntraNet. The Softkey will be
disabled (grayed) if no Time Stamp Changes are currently
logged.

Print Reports 5 - 18
Quantum Scale System

The difference between Print Product List and Print Product


Review is that Print Product List prints the UPC Number
while Print Product Review prints the actual Bar Code.
Other information is the same; however, it may be
positioned differently on the label.

(F1) Print Product List To access the Print Product List Menu:
Menu
1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Print
QUICK STEPS Products Menu. You should now be on the Print
Products Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 3. PRESS [F1] to select Product List Menu.
1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F2]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. PRESS [F1] or [F2]
5. If [F2], TYPE the beginning
Product Number
6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
7. TYPE the ending Product
Number
8. PRESS [F1]
9. PRESS [ESC]

4. To print a report for all Product Numbers, PRESS [F1] to


select Print All. -- OR--
5. To print a report for a specified range of items, PRESS
[F2] to choose Select a Range.

5 - 19 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning product number.


7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the End Printing at Product Number field.
8. TYPE the Ending Product Number.
9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to
stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When the
report is finished printing, the scale returns you to the
Print Product List Menu.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Products Menu.

Product List Report

Print Reports 5 - 20
Quantum Scale System

(F2) Print Product Review To access the Print Product Review Menu:
Menu
1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Print
QUICK STEPS Products Menu. You should now be on the Print Products
Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 3. PRESS [F2] to select Product Review Menu.
1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F2]
3. PRESS [F2]
4. PRESS [F1] or [F2]
5. If [F2], TYPE the beginning
Product Number
6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
7. TYPE the ending Product
Number
8. PRESS [F1]
9. PRESS [ESC]

4. To print a report for all Product Numbers, PRESS [F1] to


select Print All.
-- OR--
5. To print a report for a specified range of Product
Numbers, PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.

5 - 21 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning product number.


7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the End Printing at Product Number field.
8. TYPE the Ending Product Number.
9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to
stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When the
report is finished printing, the scale returns you to the
Print Product Review Menu.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Products Menu.

Product Review Report

Print Reports 5 - 22
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Print Time Stamp To access the Time Stamp Changes Menu:
Changes
1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Print
QUICK STEPS Products Menu. You should now be on the Print
Products Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 3. PRESS [F3] to select Time Stamp Changes Menu.
1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F2]
3. PRESS [F3]
4. PRESS [F1] or [F2]
5. If [F2], TYPE the beginning
Product Number
6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
7. TYPE the ending Product
Number
8. PRESS [F1]
9. PRESS [ESC]

4. To print a report for all Product Numbers, PRESS [F1] to


select Print All.
-- OR--
5. To print a report for a specified range of items, PRESS
[F2] to choose Select a Range.

5 - 23 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning product number.


7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the End Printing at Product Number field.
8. TYPE the Ending Product Number.
9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to
stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When the
report is finished printing, the scale returns you to the
Print Time Stamp Changes Menu.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Products Menu.

Time Stamp Changes Report

Print Reports 5 - 24
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Print Flashkeys To access and print a Flashkey group:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print


Reports Menu.
QUICK STEPS 2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F3] to select
Flashkeys. You should now be on the Print Flashkeys
From the Supervisor Menu: Screen and the report begins printing. When the report
1. PRESS [F3] is finished printing, the scale returns you to the Print
2. PRESS [F3] Reports Menu.

5 - 25 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

Flashkey Report

(F4) Print Operator ID To access and print the Print Operator ID List:
List
1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F4] to select
Operator ID List. You should now be on the Print
QUICK STEPS Operator ID List Screen and the report begins printing.
When the report is finished printing, the scale returns
From the Supervisor Menu:
you to the Print Reports Menu.
1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F4]

Print Reports 5 - 26
Quantum Scale System

Operator ID List

5 - 27 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

(F5) Print Label From the Print Label Related Items Menu, you can select from
Related Items Menu the following options:
♦ Reusable Text Menu (To print Special Messages,
Expanded Text or Marquee Messages)
♦ Label Types
♦ Graphics

To access the Print Label Related Items Menu:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print


QUICK STEPS Reports Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F5]

2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Print


Label Related Items Menu. You should now be on the
Print Label Related Items Menu.

Print Reports 5 - 28
Quantum Scale System

(F1) Print Reusable Text From this selection you may print the following reports for
Menu all product numbers or a specified range of product
numbers:
♦ Special Message Reports
♦ Expanded Text Reports
♦ Marquee Message Reports

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print


(F1) Print Special Messages Reports Menu.
Menu 2. PRESS [F5] to select Label Related Items Menu.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F5]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. PRESS [F1]
5. PRESS [F1] or [F2]
6. If [F2], TYPE the beginning
Special Message Number
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
8. TYPE the ending Special
Message Number
9. PRESS [F1]
10. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F1] to select Reusable Text Menu.

5 - 29 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

4. From the Print Reusable Text Menu, PRESS [F1] to select


Special Messages Menu.

5. To print a report for all Special Messages, PRESS [F1] to


select Print All.
-- OR--
6. To print a report for a specified range of Special
Messages, PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.

Print Reports 5 - 30
Quantum Scale System

7. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning Special Message


Number.
8. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the End Printing at Special Message Number field.
9. TYPE the Ending Special Message Number.
10. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to
stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When the
report is finished printing, the scale returns you to the
Print Special Messages Menu.

11. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Reusable Text Menu.

Special Messages Report

5 - 31 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

(F2) Print Expanded Text 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
Menu Reports Menu.
2. PRESS [F5] to select Label Related Items Menu.
QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F5]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. PRESS [F2]
5. PRESS [F1] or [F2]
6. If [F2], TYPE the beginning
Expanded Text Number
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
8. TYPE the ending Expanded
Text Number
9. PRESS [F1]
10. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F1] to select Reusable Text Menu.

Print Reports 5 - 32
Quantum Scale System

4. From the Print Reusable Text Menu, PRESS [F2] to select


Expanded Text Menu.

5. To print a report for all Expanded Text, PRESS [F1] to


select Print All.
-- OR--
6. To print a report for a specified range of Expanded Text,
PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.

5 - 33 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

7. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning Expanded Text


Number.
8. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the End Printing at Expanded Text Number field.
9. TYPE the Ending Expanded Text Number.
10. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to
stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When the
report is finished printing, the scale returns you to the
Print Expanded Text Menu.

11. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Reusable Text Menu.

Expanded Text Report

Print Reports 5 - 34
Quantum Scale System

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print


(F3) Print Marquee Messages Reports Menu.
Menu 2. PRESS [F5] to select Label Related Items Menu.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F5]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. PRESS [F3]
5. PRESS [F1] or [F2]
6. If [F2], TYPE the beginning
Marquee Message Number
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
8. TYPE the ending Marquee
Message Number
9. PRESS [F1]
10. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F1] to select Reusable Text Menu.

5 - 35 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

4. From the Print Reusable Text Menu, PRESS [F3] to select


Marquee Messages Menu.

5. To print a report for all Marquee Messages, PRESS [F1]


to select Print All.
-- OR--
6. To print a report for a specified range of Marquee
Messages, PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.

Print Reports 5 - 36
Quantum Scale System

7. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning Marquee


Message Number.
8. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the End Printing at Marquee Message Number field.
9. TYPE the Ending Marquee Message Number.
10. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to
stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When the
report is finished printing, the scale returns you to the
Print Marquee Messages Menu.

11. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Reusable Text Menu.

Marquee Messages Report

5 - 37 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

(F2) Print Label Types From this selection you may print the label template for all
label types or a selected range of label types.

QUICK STEPS
To access and print Label Types:
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F3] 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
2. PRESS [F5] Reports Menu.
3. PRESS [F2] 2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Label
4. PRESS [F1] or [F2] Related Items Menu.
5. If [F2], TYPE the beginning
Label Type Number
6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
7. TYPE the ending Label Type
Number
8. PRESS [F1]
9. PRESS [ESC]

3. From the Label Related Items Menu, PRESS [F2] to select


Label Types.

Print Reports 5 - 38
Quantum Scale System

4. To print a report for all Label Types, PRESS [F1] to select


Print All.
-- OR--
5. To print a report for a specified range of Label Types,
PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.

6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning Label Type


Number.
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the End Printing at Label Type field.
8. TYPE the Ending Label Type Number.
9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to
stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When the
report is finished printing, the scale returns you to the
Print Label Types Menu.

5 - 39 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Label Related Items Menu.

Labels Type Report

☛ Note
Only Label Types sized to fit on the label stock currently
loaded will print.

(F3) Print Graphics From this selection you may print all Graphics or a selected
range of Graphics.

QUICK STEPS To access and print Graphics:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
1. PRESS [F3] Reports Menu.
2. PRESS [F5] 2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Label
3. PRESS [F3] Related Items Menu.
4. PRESS [F1] or [F2]
5. If [F2], TYPE the beginning
Graphics Number
6. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
7. TYPE the ending Graphics
Number
8. PRESS [F1]
9. PRESS [ESC]

Print Reports 5 - 40
Quantum Scale System

3. From the Label Related Items Menu, PRESS [F3] to select


Graphics.

4. To print a report for all Graphics, PRESS [F1] to select


Print All.
-- OR--
5. To print a report for a specified range of Graphics,
PRESS [F2] to choose Select a Range.

5 - 41 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

6. To select a Range, TYPE the beginning Graphic Number.


7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the End Printing at Graphic Number field.
8. TYPE the Ending Graphic Number.
9. PRESS [F1] to begin printing the report. If you need to
stop printing the report, PRESS [F1] again. When the
report is finished printing, the scale returns you to the
Print Graphics Menu.

10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Label Related Items Menu.

Graphics Report

Print Reports 5 - 42
Quantum Scale System

(F6) Print To access and print the System Configuration:


Configuration 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print
Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F6] to select
Configuration. You should now be on the Print
Configuration Screen. When you press F6, the report
QUICK STEPS
begins printing. When the report is finished printing,
the scale returns you to the Print Reports Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F6]

5 - 43 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

Configuration Report

Print Reports 5 - 44
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
The Configuration Report will print only on Continuous
Label Stock or Listing Paper. If any other label stock is
loaded, you will get the following message.

(F8) Print To access and print from the Print Miscellaneous Menu (i.e.,
Miscellaneous Menu Operator Changes):

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Print


Reports Menu.
2. From the Print Reports Menu, PRESS [F8] to select
QUICK STEPS Miscellaneous Menu. You should now be on the Print
Miscellaneous Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F3]
2. PRESS [F8]
3. PRESS [F1]

5 - 45 Print Reports
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F1] to select Operator Changes. When you press


F1, the Operator Changes report begins printing. You
are on the Print Operator Changes Screen. If needed,
PRESS [F1] to Stop Printing. When the report is finished
printing, the scale returns you to the Print Miscellaneous
Menu.

4. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Print Reports Menu.

Operator Changes Report

Print Reports 5 - 46
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Six: Backup/Restore

♦ Overview
♦ Backup to Diskette
• Unmark Changed Items
♦ Backup Changes to Diskette
♦ Restore from Diskette
• Bad Record Scan
♦ Add Changes from Diskette
♦ Backup or Restore with Intranet
• Send to Scales via Intranet
• Send Changes via Intranet

6-1 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

Backup/Restore Flowchart

BACKUP/RESTORE
MENU

PRESS [F4]
Backup/Restore
Menu

Backup Restore Add Changes


Backup to
Changes from from Diskette/ Send to Scales Send Changes Select Data Bad Record
Diskette/
to Diskette/ Diskette/ Cassette via MiniNet via MiniNet to Transfer Scan
Cassette
Cassette Cassette (F4) (F5) (F6) (F7) (F8)
(F1)
(F2) (F3)

PLU Data
(F2)

Label Data
(F3)

Macros
(F4)

Operator Data
(F5)

Store Name/
Number
(F6)

Scale
Configuration
(F7)

Backup Data
to Disk in
Ultima
2000 or SP
Format
(F8)

Backup/Restore 6-2
Quantum Scale System

Backup or Restore The Backup/Restore function allows you to Backup or


Supervisor Menu Restore data to/from a cassette or disk, or via ScaleMaster,
“F” Key = F4 and/or MiniNet II.

Based on the Data Type(s) selected, you perform either the


Backup or Restore function. Data Types include:

Data Type Information Transferred

PLU Data PLU’s, Classes, Special Messages,


Expanded Text, NutriFacts Data, and
Marquee Messages, Marquee Times,
Total Type Names

Label Data Label Types, Fonts, Graphics, and Label


Text Names

Flashkeys/Macros Flashkeys and Macros

Operator Data Operator ID’s

Store Name/Number Store Name and Number, Self Service


Prompt

Scale Configuration Configuration, Department IP Addresses

In addition, you can create changes on another Quantum


Scale and add them to your item file without deleting your
existing database. You can then transfer the changes to
other Quantum Scales in a ScaleMaster, MiniNet II, or
IntraNet configuration. Once the changes have been
transferred, you can unmark the changed items to reset the
system or retain the changes for future transmission. The
Unmark Changed Items option is only available after you
execute the Backup function. A complete explanation of this
function is found later in this chapter.

Within this function you can also perform a Bad Record


Scan. Bad Record Scan searches the item file database for
Bad records, ensuring the item file is stable. Any item file
that needs to be checked will be identified and displayed for
action by the operator. Bad Record Scan is only available
after you execute the Restore function.

6-3 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
The Quantum Scale System is equipped with an IntraNet
networking system. When you make a change to one scale
in a department, it will automatically update all the other
scales attached within that department. A detailed
explanation of the differences between the IntraNet,
MiniNet II and ScaleMaster networking options is found in
the Scale Setup section.

☛ Note
The functions available for use on the Backup/Restore
Screen are determined from your selections in the Scale
Setup - Communications Menu.

Backup/Restore 6-4
Quantum Scale System

The following table gives you an overview of the Backup


and Restore functions.

Function Description

Backup to Diskette Allows you to Backup your selected data


to a diskette via a disk player/recorder.

Backup Changes to Allows you to Backup to a diskette any


Diskette selected data record marked as a Changed
record in the database.

Restore from Diskette Allows you to replace all the specified


data types with new information from the
diskette.

Add Changes from Allows you to add for every data type
Diskette selected any record marked as a Changed
record on the diskette.

Send to Scales via Allows you to send (for every data type
IntraNet selected) all data to the scales on the
IntraNet Network.

Send Changes via Allows you to send (for every data type
IntraNet selected) any record marked as changed
to the scales on the IntraNet network.

Unmark Changed Allows you to mark any changed record


Items as unchanged after data has been sent to
other scales or backed-up on a diskette.

Bad Record Scan Allows you to search the database and


check for records that were not loaded
correctly after the data has been restored.

6-5 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
The following procedures refer to the Hobart External Disk
Drive. If you are using the Hobart Disk Player/Recorder,
consult your DPR manual for backup or restore procedures.
You must connect the External Disk Drive to the system
using the Module Network Port. Be sure the Start a Run
Screen displays when you connect the devices.

Backup to Diskette For every data type selected, this function enables you to
Backup your data to a disk using a Hobart External Disk
Drive. It functions in much the same way as when saving a
computer file to a floppy disk.

☛ Note
In order to Backup to Diskette, the Cassette/Disk function
must be configured for Disk. This function is available
under the Scale Setup - Communications Menu.

☛ Note
The operator must have the correct Access Level to backup
the database.

QUICK STEPS To access Backup to Diskette:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Backup
From the Supervisor Menu: or Restore Menu.
1. PRESS [F4]
2. PRESS [F7]
3. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
4. PRESS [ESC]
5. PRESS [F1]
6. Insert the Disk and PRESS
[ENTER]
7. PRESS [F1] - Optional
8. PRESS [ESC]

Backup/Restore 6-6
Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F7] to choose Select Data to Transfer.

3. You should now be on the Select Data to Transfer Screen.


PRESS the appropriate “F” Key to toggle YES/NO on
the types of data to be transferred.

☛ Note
When writing to a diskette, you need to select the data
format of SP80/1500 or Ultima 2000.

6-7 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the


Backup or Restore Menu.
5. PRESS [F1] to select Backup to Diskette.

6. You are now on the Backup to Diskette Screen. Insert the


floppy disk and PRESS [ENTER]. The display will notify
you when all the data has been transferred.

☛ Note
If the External Disk Drive detects an un-formatted disk, a
prompt displays. Select the type of disk you are using.

Backup/Restore 6-8
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
As you load a disk the system counts down memory usage,
“memory free”displays. A Hobart Service Representative
should be contacted for anything below 100K.

7. (OPTIONAL) You will then have the option to Unmark


Changed Items. If you do not want to Unmark Changed
Items, go immediately to Step 8. To continue with
Unmark Changed Items, follow the steps in the Unmark
Changed Items section.

✎ Tip
Important Read This…. Before you select Unmark Changed Items, make sure you
have completed all functions that only require a backup of
changes. This can save you valuable production time in the
long run.
For example, let’s say you are running a complete backup of
your database so that it can be sent to another store location.
You have completed the Backup to Diskette function and
now you have the option to Unmark Changed Items. If you
select F1, you can no longer only backup your department
scales with Backup Changes. You now have to read the
entire database (for the data type selected) into the
department scales. This could take a long time depending
on the size of the data files selected. Select Unmark
Changed Items only when you are completely through with
the Backup functions.

8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Backup or Restore Menu.

6-9 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

Unmark Changed Items The Quantum automatically marks a record whenever you
make a change to it. You can then send these changed
records to other scales via IntraNet or MiniNet II. Unmark
QUICK STEPS Changed Items allows you to Unmark Changed Items after
the changes have been sent to the other scales or backed-up
These steps are OPTIONAL: on a disk/cassette. Unmark Changed Items will find any
1. PRESS [F1] record marked as changed and restore them to an unmarked
2. PRESS [ESC] condition.

To Unmark Changed Items after a Backup to Cassette/Disk:

1. PRESS [F1] to select Unmark Changed Items. When the


scan is complete, the screen will read “Changed item
scan complete.”

2. When the Unmark is complete, PRESS [ESC] to return to


the Backup or Restore Menu.

☛ Note
Unmark Changed Items is only available after the Backup
function is successfully completed.

Backup/Restore 6 - 10
Quantum Scale System

Backup Changes to For every data type selected, this function is used to Backup
Diskette any record marked as a changed record in the database to a
diskette. You will do this via a Diskette and External Disk
Drive. This saves time during the Backup procedures
because it only backs up records that have been changed,
not the entire database.

You may also use this function when you want to Add a
Custom Label. You should choose only Label Data to be
transferred when you want to add a custom label.

☛ Note
In order to Backup Changes to Diskette, the Cassette/Disk
function must be configured for Disk. This function is
available under the Scale Setup - Communications Menu.

To access Backup Changes to Diskette:


QUICK STEPS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Backup
or Restore Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F4]
2. PRESS [F7]
3. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
4. PRESS [ESC]
5. PRESS [F2]
6. Insert the Disk and PRESS
[ENTER].
7. PRESS [F1] - Optional
8. PRESS [ESC]

6 - 11 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F7] to choose Select Data to Transfer.

3. You should now be on the Select Data to Transfer Screen.


PRESS the appropriate “F” Key to toggle YES/NO on
the types of data to be transferred.

☛ Note
When writing to a diskette, you need to select the data
format of SP80/1500 or Ultima 2000.

Backup/Restore 6 - 12
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the


Backup or Restore Menu.
5. PRESS [F2] to select Backup Changes to Diskette.

6. You are now on the Backup Changes to Diskette Screen.


Insert the Disk and PRESS [ENTER]. The display will
notify you when all the data has been transferred.

6 - 13 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

7. (OPTIONAL) When the data transfer is complete, you


may want to Unmark Changed Items. To Unmark
Changed Items, PRESS [F1]. (For a complete description
of this function, refer to the Unmark Changed Items
section.)

8. If you choose not to Unmark Changed Items or when


Unmark Changed Items is complete, PRESS [ESC] to
return to the Backup or Restore Menu.

Backup/Restore 6 - 14
Quantum Scale System

Restore from Diskette For every data type selected, the Restore from Diskette
function allows you to restore your data to a disk using a
Hobart External Disk Drive.

☛ Note
In order to Restore from Diskette, the Cassette/Disk
function must be configured for Disk. This function is
available under the Scale Setup - Communications Menu.

Look At This
When you select Restore from Diskette, the function will
delete the database in your scale for the data type(s)
selected. It replaces all the specified data type(s) with new
information from the disk. Make sure you have carefully
selected the correct data type(s).

QUICK STEPS To access Restore from Diskette:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Backup
1. PRESS [F4] or Restore Menu.
2. PRESS [F7]
3. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
4. PRESS [ESC]
5. PRESS [F3]
6. Insert the Disk and PRESS
[ENTER]
7. PRESS [F1] - Optional
8. PRESS [ESC]

6 - 15 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F7] to choose Select Data to Transfer.

3. You should now be on the Select Data to Transfer Screen.


PRESS the appropriate “F” Key to toggle YES/NO on
the types of data to be transferred.

Backup/Restore 6 - 16
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the


Backup or Restore Menu.
5. PRESS [F3] to select Restore from Diskette.

6. You are now on the Restore from Diskette Screen. Insert


the Disk and PRESS [ENTER]. The display will notify
you when all the data has been transferred.

7. When the data transfer is complete, you may want to do


a Bad Record Scan. If you do not want to perform a Bad
Record Scan, go immediately to Step 8. To perform a Bad
Record Scan, follow the steps in the Bad Record Scan
section.

8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Backup or Restore Menu.

6 - 17 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

Bad Record Scan The Bad Record Scan option is available after you Add or
Restore data, or anytime you want to check the database
from the Backup or Restore Menu. This function searches
QUICK STEPS the time file and checks for records that were not loaded
correctly. If a record is not linked to anything, it is
From the Backup or Restore automatically deleted.
Menu:
1. PRESS [F1] To run a Bad Record Scan from the Backup or Restore Menu:
2. PRESS [ESC]
1. PRESS [F1] to select Bad Record Scan. The scale will then
begin running the scan. It could take several seconds or
longer, depending on the amount of data to be checked.
There will be a message in the black box at the bottom of
the screen explaining what problems the scan found, if
any.

2. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Backup or Restore Menu.

Backup/Restore 6 - 18
Quantum Scale System

Add Changes from For every data type selected, the Add Changes from
Diskette Diskette function allows you to add any record marked as a
changed record on the diskette to your scale’s database.
You will do this via a diskette and the External Disk Drive.

☛ Note
In order to Add Changes from Diskette, the Cassette/Disk
function must be configured for disk. This function is
available under the Scale Setup - Communications Menu.

Look At This
When you select Add Changes from Diskette, you will only
make changes to your database where the data item is
flagged as a changed record. It will not delete any
information currently in the database. Make sure you have
carefully selected the correct data type(s).

QUICK STEPS To access Add Changes from Diskette:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F4] to select the
1. PRESS [F4] Backup or Restore Menu.
2. PRESS [F7]
3. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
4. PRESS [ESC]
5. PRESS [F4]
6. Insert the disk and PRESS
[ENTER]
7. PRESS [F1] - Optional
8. PRESS [ESC]

6 - 19 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F7] to choose Select Data to Transfer.

3. You should now be on the Select Data to Transfer Screen.


PRESS the appropriate “F” Key to toggle YES/NO on
the types of data to be transferred.

Backup/Restore 6 - 20
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the


Backup or Restore Menu.
5. PRESS [F4] to select Add Changes from Diskette.

6. You are now on the Add Changes from Diskette Screen.


Insert the Disk and PRESS [ENTER]. The display will
notify you when all the data has been transferred.

6 - 21 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

7. (OPTIONAL) When the data transfer is complete, you


may want to perform a Bad Record Scan. To perform a
Bad Record Scan, PRESS [F1]. (For a complete
description of this function, refer to the Bad Record Scan
section.)

8. If you choose not to perform a Bad Record Scan or when


the scan is complete, PRESS [ESC] to return to the
Backup or Restore Menu.

Backup/Restore 6 - 22
Quantum Scale System

Backup or Restore The Backup or Restore function can also be utilized with the
with Intranet IntraNet Network. Within the IntraNet configuration you
can perform two (2) tasks. You can:
♦ Send data to the scales on the Network.
♦ Send only changed records to the scales on the Network.

☛ Note
If you have configured the scale for MiniNet, the softkeys
will show Send to Scales via MiniNet or Send Changes via
MiniNet. The steps to complete the data transfer are the
same for MiniNet as they are Intranet.

☛ Note
In order to use Backup or Restore with Intranet, the Scale
Setup -- Network Setup function must be set to Intranet.

Send to Scales via Intranet The Send to Scales via Intranet option allows you to send
data to the scales on the Network.

To access Send to Scales via Intranet:


QUICK STEPS
1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Backup
From the Supervisor Menu: or Restore Menu.
1. PRESS [F4]
2. PRESS [F7]
3. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
4. PRESS [ESC]
5. PRESS [F5]
6. PRESS [F1] - Optional
7. PRESS [ESC]

6 - 23 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F7] to choose Select Data to Transfer.

3. You should now be on the Select Data to Transfer Screen.


PRESS the appropriate “F” Key to toggle YES/NO on
the types of data to be transferred.

Backup/Restore 6 - 24
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the


Backup or Restore Menu.
5. PRESS [F5] to select Send to Scale via Intranet. Data is
immediately sent to each scale.

6. (OPTIONAL) When the data transfer is complete, you


may want to Unmark Changed Items. To Unmark
Changed Items, PRESS [F1]. (For a complete description
of this function, refer to the Unmarked Changed Items
section.)
7. If you choose not to Unmark Changed Items or when
Unmark Changed Items is complete, PRESS [ESC] to
return to the Backup or Restore Menu.

Send Changes via Intranet The Send Changes via Intranet option allows you to send
changes to other scales if Intranet is installed.
To access Send Changes via Intranet:

QUICK STEPS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Backup
or Restore Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F4]
2. PRESS [F7]
3. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
4. PRESS [ESC]
5. PRESS [F6]
6. PRESS [F1] – Optional
7. PRESS [ESC]

6 - 25 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F7] to choose Select Data to Transfer.

3. You should now be on the Select Data to Transfer Screen.


PRESS the appropriate “F” Key to toggle YES/NO on
the types of data to be transferred.

Backup/Restore 6 - 26
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the


Backup or Restore Menu.
5. PRESS [F6] to select Send Changes via Intranet. You are
now on the Update Changes via Intranet Screen.

6. (OPTIONAL) When the data transfer is complete, you


may want to Unmark Changed Items. To Unmark
Changed Items, PRESS [F1]. (For a complete description
of this function, refer to the Unmarked Changed Item
section.)
7. If you choose not to Unmark Changed Items or when
Unmark Changed Items is complete, PRESS [ESC] to
return to the Backup or Restore Menu.

6 - 27 Backup/Restore
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Seven: Scale Setup Menu


♦ Overview
♦ Creating Operator ID’s
• Operator Log-On Required
♦ Flashkeys
• Positioning the Flashkey
• Changing Flashkey Height/Width
• Creating Flashkeys
• Creating a Product-Group Flashkey
• View Flashkey Group
• Edit Home Flashkey Group
• Delete Flashkey
• Go to a Flashkey Group
• Delete a Flashkey Group
• Clear a Flashkey Group
• Insert a Flashkey Group
• Move a Flashkey Group
• Copy a Flashkey Group
♦ Working with Labels
• Label Stock Styles
♦ Using the Labels Menu
• Select Special Fields to Print on a Label
• Label Text Names
• Reviewing Available Fields
• Label Information
• Label Types
• Selecting Label Types (Formats)
• Standard Labels by Family
• Standard Labels by Size
• Narrow Labels
• Custom Labels
• Graphics
• Itemized Labels
♦ Scale Operation
• Set What Operator Can Modify
• Date/Time
• Setup Normal Scale Operation
♦ Scale ID & Store Information
♦ Communications
• Cassette/Disk
• Network
♦ Marquee Setup
• Marquee Modes
• Creating a Permanent or Daily Message
• Timed Marquee Messages
7-1 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Scale Setup Flowchart


SCALE SET-UP
MENU

PRESS [F5]
Scale Set-up
Menu

Scale Scale ID & Communications Marquee


Operator IDs Flashkeys Label Menu Operation Store Set-up
(F2) Menu
(F1) (F3) Menu Information (F6) Menu
(F4) (F5) (F7)

Expand
Change Flashkey Select Set What Cassette/ Marquee
Another Width Special Operator Disk Modes
Operator (F1) Fields to Can Modify (F1) (F1)
(F1) Print on (F1)
Label
(F1)
Expand
Flashkey Timed
Delete This Height Network Marquee
(F2) Date/Time
Operator (F2) (F2) Messages
(F3) Label Text (F2)
Names
Reduce (F2)
Flashkey
Width Set-up Normal
Edit Operator (F3) Scale
Name Operation
(F5) (F3)
Label
Information
Reduce (F3)
Flashkey
Height
Operator (F4)
Logon
Required
(F8) Label Types
Edit (F4)
Flashkey
(F5)

View Graphics
Flashkey (F5)
Group
(F6)

Go To Itemized
Flashkey Labels
Group (F6)
(F7)

More
Flashkey
Functions
(F8)

Delete
Flashkey
(F1)

Edit Home
Flashkey
Group
(F2)

Delete
Flashkey
Group
(F3)

Clear
Flashkey
Group
(F4)

Insert
Flashkey
Group
(F5)

Move
Flashkey
Group
(F6)

Copy
Flashkey
Group
(F7)

Scale Setup 7-2


Quantum Scale System

Scale Setup Menu From this menu, you can create or edit required scale
Supervisor Menu system information such as:
“F” Key = F5 ♦ Operator ID’s (F1)
♦ Flashkeys (F2)
♦ Label information (F3)
♦ Scale operation items (F4)
♦ Scale ID & Store Information (F5)
♦ Communications (F6)
♦ Marquee Setup (F7)

(F1) Creating Operator From this function, you will assign the name, ID number
ID’s and access level of each operator. You will also establish
whether you will require the operator to log-on every time
he/she uses the scale. Refer to the Appendix for a list of
Functions and their related access levels.

QUICK STEPS To Setup Operator ID’s:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
From the Supervisor Menu: Setup Menu.
1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. TYPE Operator ID Number
4. PRESS [ENTER]
5. PRESS [F1]
6. TYPE Access Level Value
7. PRESS [ENTER]
8. PRESS [F5]
9. TYPE Operator Name
10. PRESS [ESC]
11. PRESS [F1] or [ESC]
12. PRESS [F8] - If Needed

2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F1] to select


Operator ID’s.

7-3 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

3. The cursor should be located at the ID Number field.


TYPE the Operator ID Number.

4. PRESS [ENTER] on the Control Panel. If you are


entering the Operator ID for the first time, you will get
a message window alerting you to the fact that the
Operator ID number doesn’t exist.

5. PRESS [F1] to accept the New Operator.

6. TYPE the Access Level for this operator.


7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the Name field.

Scale Setup 7-4


Quantum Scale System

8. Select [F5] to select Edit Operator Name.

9. TYPE the Name of the operator in the Name field.


10. PRESS [ESC] to accept the Operator’s Name.

11. Repeat Steps 3 - 10 as required until all Operator ID’s


have been entered.
12. If you are finished entering Operator ID’s, PRESS [ESC]
to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

Operator Log-on Required After you have finished entering all of the Operator ID’s,
you can designate whether Operator’s must enter their
Operator ID before they enter the Start a Run or Supervisor
QUICK STEPS Mode.

From the Operator ID’s Screen: 1. PRESS [F8] to toggle Operator Logon Required to YES or
1. PRESS [F8] NO.
2. PRESS [ESC] 2. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

7-5 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

(F2) Flashkeys Flashkeys are designed to provide a descriptive on-screen


look up of PLU’s, Operator ID’s and/or Macros without
having to know the number of the desired item. They
display in a pre-determined format designed by you, and
can have up to 16 flashkeys on each screen. The maximum
number of flashkeys that can be created is 99,999.

Each screen display of flashkeys is considered a Group and


only one Group is shown on the display screen. Parts of
adjacent Groups cannot be displayed on the screen. You can
assign a group to a flashkey, so that when you select the
flashkey a different flashkey group displays. This is helpful
in large files, where you may have several types of product.
For example, in the deli, you could assign a different
flashkey to each cheese flashkey group, such as imported,
colby, swiss, soft, etc.

Flashkey sizes can vary within a Group based on the


position of the upper left hand corner of the flashkey and
the available space around the flashkey. The initial size of
the flashkey is one unit; however, it can possibly be
expanded up to 4 units wide by 4 units high (a full screen).

The dotted lines in the grid indicate available flashkey


positions in the group. When the flashkey cursor is on a
position that is available, the cursor will appear as a single
unit, bordered with a bold, solid line. When the flashkey
cursor is on a position that is occupied by an existing
flashkey, the cursor will take on the size and appearance of
the flashkey (x units wide by y units high). An existing
flashkey is indicated by a grayed rectangle with a solid line
border.

Scale Setup 7-6


Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
Be aware that when you access the Setup Flashkey screen
for the first time the default options display. When you
PRESS [F8] More flashkey functions, the Additional Options
display. Remember to verify which option you are selecting
when you PRESS the F-keys.

Default Options

Additional Options

7-7 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

Positioning the Flashkey The general format for creating flashkeys is to position the
flashkey cursor in the proper grid location where the upper
left hand corner of the flashkey is to be located. This is the
origin of the flashkey. From the origin, the flashkey can be
expanded, space permitting.

☛ Note
Once you have created a flashkey, it cannot be moved. You
will have to delete it, move the cursor to the new location,
and re-type the flashkey information.

Changing Flashkey Softkeys F1 through F4 allow you to make a Flashkey larger


Height/Width (or smaller). Notice that the Softkey is disabled when a
particular function is not possible and enabled when it is
(F1- F4) possible. Flashkeys can only be expanded to the right of
and below the origin.

To expand the Width of a Flashkey:


QUICK STEPS
1. PRESS [F1] (and continue pressing until desired size is
From the Setup Flashkeys reached) to increase the flashkey width one unit at a
Screen: time.
1. PRESS [F1]

QUICK STEPS
To reduce the Width of a Flashkey:
From the Setup Flashkeys
Screen: 1. PRESS [F3] (and continue pressing until desired size is
1. PRESS [F3] reached) to decrease the flashkey width one unit at a
time.

Scale Setup 7-8


Quantum Scale System

QUICK STEPS To expand the Height of a Flashkey:

From the Setup Flashkeys 1. PRESS [F2] (and continue pressing until desired size is
Screen: reached) to increase the flashkey height one unit at a
1. PRESS [F2] time.

QUICK STEPS To reduce the Height of a Flashkey:

From the Setup Flashkeys 1. PRESS [F4] (and continue pressing until desired size is
Screen: reached) to decrease the flashkey height one unit at a
1. PRESS [F4] time.

☛ Note
The Reduce Flashkey Height and Width Softkey only
become enabled once the flashkey height or width is greater
than one unit.

With the flashkey positioned and sized correctly, you are


now ready to create flashkey information. As already
mentioned, a flashkey may be created for entering a PLU
Number, Operator ID or Macro.

By default, if a valid PLU, Operator ID or Macro number


exists, the description associated with the record will
become the text for the flashkey. The flashkey text may then
be created/edited in the same manner as Special Messages,
Expanded Text, etc. The space available for editing the text
will depend on the size of the flashkey. The flashkey text
actually appears on the flashkey for selection by the
Operator.

7-9 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

✎ Tip
In order to assist your Operators in quickly serving the
customer, design your Flashkey Screens to match the
product layout in your case.

Creating Flashkeys 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.

QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F2]
3. PRESS Arrow Keys as
appropriate
4. PRESS [F5]
5. PRESS Arrow Keys as
appropriate
6. TYPE the Product Number,
Operator Number or
Macro Number
7. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]
8. PRESS [F5]
9. TYPE the Flashkey 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select
Description Flashkeys.
10. PRESS [ESC]
11. PRESS [ESC]
12. PRESS Arrow Keys as
appropriate
13. Repeat Steps 3-11 as
needed
14. PRESS ESC

Scale Setup 7 - 10
Quantum Scale System

3. You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys Screen.


PRESS the appropriate Arrow Key(s) to move to the
space where you want to edit or add a Flashkey.
4. PRESS [F5] to select Edit Flashkey.

5. Now select whether you want the Flashkey to be a PLU,


Operator ID, Macro Number or Group Number. PRESS
the appropriate “F” key.

6. TYPE the Product Number, Operator ID, Macro Number


or Group Number in the appropriate field.
7. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the Flashkey Description field.

7 - 11 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

8. If the record exists, the Description for the record


appears as the default text for the flashkey. The
Description will be formatted to fit the size of the
flashkey. PRESS [F5] to select Edit Flashkey Description
(if necessary).

☛ Note
If the Number you entered does not exist, the following
message displays.

Scale Setup 7 - 12
Quantum Scale System

9. TYPE the Flashkey Description using the Text Editor or


Edit the current Flashkey Description.

10. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes.


11. PRESS [ESC] to exit the Edit Flashkey Screen. The
Flashkey Block should now be grayed, letting you know
that the block has a Flashkey assigned to it.

7 - 13 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

12. To add or edit the next Flashkey, PRESS the appropriate


Arrow Key to move to that Block.
13. Repeat Steps 3-11 as needed until all are added/edited.
14. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

☛ Note
You can have numerous Flashkey Screens designed for each
scale. To move between Flashkey Groups, PRESS the
[PREV] and [NEXT] Keys. You can also use the Left and
Right Arrow Keys to move from one Flashkey Group to the
other. Pressing the Left and Right Arrow Keys moves you
one space left or right until you get to the beginning or end
of the Flashkey row. When the cursor gets to the end of the
row, pressing the Right Arrow Key moves you to the
Previous or Next Flashkey Group. Keep in mind that you
can only view one Flashkey Group at a time.

☛ Note
The following functions are related functions to creating
Flashkeys. This section will detail how the rest of the “F”
Keys work while in the Flashkey function.

✎ Tip
To print a Flashkey group, simply move the cursor to the
group you want to print and PRESS the [PRINT] key.

Scale Setup 7 - 14
Quantum Scale System

Creating a Product-Group Set up a Product-Group flashkey by assigning a group of


Flashkey flashkeys to an individual flashkey. When the operator
selects the product-group flashkey the flashkey group
assigned to it displays. This is helpful in large files, where
you may have several products and/or groups of products.
The following shows a sample for a deli.

PAGE 1 - Main Deli

PAGE 35 - Cheese

PAGE 36 - Imported Soft Cheeses

You can easily move from Page 1 - Main Deli to Page 35 -


Cheeses. We, also, assigned a product-group flashkey to
each cheese group, such as imported and domestic. You can
easily move from Page 35 - Cheeses to Page 36 - Imported
Soft Cheeses. When you complete the transaction, PRESS
[ESC] to return to Home Flaskey position.

7 - 15 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

(F6) View Flashkey Group This function allows you to take a look at the Flashkey
Screen layout without having to leave the Supervisor Mode.
Typically, you would use this as you are creating or editing
QUICK STEPS a Flashkey group.

From the Setup Flashkeys To View a Flashkey Group:


Screen:
1. PRESS [F6] 1. From the Setup Flashkeys Screen, PRESS [F6] to select
2. View the Flashkey Group View Flashkey Group.
3. PRESS [ESC] 2. View the Flashkey Group.
4. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Setup Flashkeys Screen.


4. PRESS [ESC] again to return to the Supervisor Menu.

☛ Note
To move between Flashkey Groups in the View mode,
PRESS the [PREV] and [NEXT] Keys. When you PRESS
[ESC] to return to the Flashkey editor mode, the Flashkey
group you were viewing will display. For example, if you
view group 5, then PRESS [NEXT] to view 6, then PRESS
[NEXT] to view 7 and then press [ESC] to return to the
Flashkey editor, group 7 will display in the Flashkey editor.

Scale Setup 7 - 16
Quantum Scale System

(F7) Edit Home Flashkey For each scale in a department, you can designate a different
Group Home Flashkey Group. A Home Flashkey Group is the first
screen of flashkeys that the scale displays when you enter
the Operate mode. For example, you might want each scale
in a deli to have a Home Flashkey Group that reflects the
part of the deli case in which the scale is located. This saves
your operator’s time in finding the right flashkey.

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale


Setup Menu.

2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Flashkeys.


QUICK STEPS You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys Screen.

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F2]
3. PRESS [F2]
4. TYPE Home Flashkey
Group Number
5. PRESS [ENTER]
6. PRESS [ESC]

☛ Note
Be aware of which function you are selecting when you
PRESS the F-key. You may need to toggle [F8] More Flashkey
Functions to access the correct function.

3. PRESS [F2] to select Edit Home Flashkey Group.

7 - 17 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

4. TYPE the number of the Flashkey Group you want to


assign as the Home Flashkey Group for this scale.
5. PRESS [ENTER] to save the changes.
6. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

☛ Note
When you Restore your Scale Configuration (via Cassette,
Disk or MiniNet II), the Home Flashkey Group for each
scale may be changed.

(F8) Delete Flashkey If you no longer carry a certain item in your operation, you
may need to delete a Flashkey. To delete a Flashkey:

QUICK STEPS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select
1. PRESS [F5] Flashkeys.
2. PRESS [F2] 3. You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys Screen. Use
3. PRESS [PREV] or [NEXT] the [PREV] or [NEXT] to move to the Flashkey Group
as apprpriate you need.
4. PRESS the Arrow Keys as 4. Use the ARROW KEYS to move the cursor to the
appropriate Flashkey you want to delete.
5. PRESS [F1]

☛ Note
Be aware of which function you are selecting when you
PRESS the F-key. You may need to toggle [F8] More Flashkey
Functions to access the correct function.

Scale Setup 7 - 18
Quantum Scale System

5. PRESS [F1] to delete the Flashkey. The Flashkey box that


was erased should now be empty (free of any gray-
shading).

6. Repeat Steps 3-5 (as needed).


7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

(F7) Go to Flashkey Group Use Go to flashkey group to access a specific set of


flashkeys. This option enables you to go directly to a
specific group without “stepping through” other groups.
QUICK STEPS
To go to a specific flashkey group:
From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
1. PRESS [F5] Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F2] 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select
3. PRESS [F7] Flashkeys.
4. Enter information in the 3. PRESS [F7] to select Go to Flashkey Group.
prompt

7 - 19 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

The Go to flashkey group dialog box displays.

4. Enter the number of the flashkey group that you want to


go to.

(F3) Delete a Flashkey If you no longer carry a group of items in your operation,
Group you may need to delete a Flashkey Group.

To delete a flashkey group:


QUICK STEPS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select
1. PRESS [F5] Flashkeys. You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys
2. PRESS [F2] Screen.
3. PRESS [F3]
4. Enter information in the
prompt
5. PRESS [F8]

☛ Note
Be aware of which function you are selecting when you
PRESS the F-key. You may need to toggle [F8] More Flashkey
Functions to access the correct function.

Scale Setup 7 - 20
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F3] to select Delete Flashkey Group. The Delete a


Flashkey Group screen displays.

4. At the Flashkey Group to Delete prompt, enter the


number of the group you want to delete. The group
number that you were displaying defaults as the group
to delete, however you can delete any flashkey group.
5. PRESS [F8] to delete the group.

Look At This
When you delete a group, all following group numbers
change. For example, if you delete group 2 the Flashkey
setup that was in group 3 becomes group 2 and so on.
GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP The original
1 2 3 4 5 6
setup.

GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP After deleting the


1 2 3 4 5 6
Group.

7 - 21 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

(F4) Clear a Flashkey Clear a flashkey group to delete all flashkeys in the group.
Group The groups that follow will not change, but the group
selected will be blank (no flashkeys will exist).

QUICK STEPS To clear a flashkey group:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
From the Supervisor Menu: Setup Menu.
1. PRESS [F5] 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select
2. PRESS [F2] Flashkeys. You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys
3. PRESS [F4] Screen.
4. Enter information in
prompts
5. PRESS [F8]

☛ Note
Be aware of which function you are selecting when you
PRESS the F-key. You may need to toggle [F8] More Flashkey
Functions to access the correct function.

3. PRESS [F4] to select Clear Flashkey Group. The Clear a


Flashkey Group screen displays.

Scale Setup 7 - 22
Quantum Scale System

4. At the Flashkey Group to Clear prompt, enter the number


of the group you want to clear. The group number that
you were displaying defaults as the group to clear,
however you can clear any flashkey group.
5. PRESS [F8] to clear the group.

Look At This
When you clear a group, none of the other Flashkey groups
change.
GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP The original
1 2 3 4 5 6
setup.

GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP After clearing


1 2 3 4 5 6
Group 3.

(F5) Insert a Flashkey Group Insert a flashkey group before any group in the system.

To insert a flashkey group:


QUICK STEPS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Flashkeys.
1. PRESS [F5] You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys Screen.
2. PRESS [F2] 3. PRESS [F5] to select Insert Flashkey Group.
3. PRESS [F5]
4. Enter information in
prompt
5. PRESS [F8]

☛ Note
Be aware of which function you are selecting when you
PRESS the F-key. You may need to toggle [F8] More Flashkey
Functions to access the correct function.

7 - 23 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

The Insert a Flashkey Group screen displays.

4. At the Insert a flashkey group before flashkey group prompt,


enter the number of the group before which you want to
insert another group. The group number that you were
displaying defaults as the group to insert before, however
you can insert a flashkey group anywhere in the sequence.
5. PRESS [F8] to insert the group.

Look At This
When you insert a group, all following group numbers
change. For example, if you insert a group before group 3,
all flashkey group numbers that follow increase by one, (i.e.
3 becomes 4, 4 becomes 5 and so on).
GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP The original
1 2 3 4 5 6
setup.

GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP After inserting


1 2 3 4 5 6
the Group.

Scale Setup 7 - 24
Quantum Scale System

(F6) Move a Flashkey Group In order to set up your flashkey groups in a logical sequence
or to be more representative of your operation, you may
want to move a flashkey group to another location.
QUICK STEPS
To move a flashkey group:
From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
1. PRESS [F5] Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F2] 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select
3. PRESS [F6] Flashkeys. You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys
4. Enter information in Screen.
prompts
5. PRESS [F8]

☛ Note
Be aware of which function you are selecting when you
PRESS the F-key. You may need to toggle [F8] More Flashkey
Functions to access the correct function.

3. PRESS [F6] to select Move Flashkey Group.

7 - 25 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

The Move a Flashkey Group screen displays.

The group number that you were displaying defaults as


the group to move, however you can move any flashkey
group to or from anywhere in the sequence.

4. At the Move Flashkey Group prompt, enter the number of


the flashkey group you want to move.
5. At the To Flashkey Group prompt, enter the number for
the area in which you want the group moved.
6. PRESS [F8] to move the group.

Look At This
When you move a group all groups between the two group
numbers change. For example, if you move group 3 to
group 1, the original group 1 becomes group 2 and what
was group 2 becomes group 3.
GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP The original
1 2 3 4 5 6
setup.

GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP After moving


1 2 3 4 5 6
Group 3 to
Group 1.

Scale Setup 7 - 26
Quantum Scale System

(F7) Copy a Flashkey Group Once you have set up a Flashkey Group, you may want to
copy it to another area and reuse the information you have
already created. For example, if you have changed the sizes
QUICK STEPS of the flashkeys to resemble your operation, you can copy
the same size and format from one flashkey group to
From the Supervisor Menu: another.
1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F2] To copy a flashkey group:
3. PRESS [F7] 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
4. Enter information in Setup Menu.
prompts 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F2] to select
5. PRESS [F8] Flashkeys. You should now be on the Setup Flashkeys
Screen.

☛ Note
Be aware of which function you are selecting when you
PRESS the F-key. You may need to toggle [F8] More Flashkey
Functions to access the correct function.

7 - 27 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F7] to select Copy Flashkey Group. The Copy a


Flashkey Group screen displays.

The group number that you were displaying defaults as


the group number to copy; however, you can copy any
flashkey group to or from anywhere in the sequence.

4. At the Copy Flashkey Group prompt, enter the number of


the flashkey group that you want to copy.
5. At the To Flashkey Group prompt, enter the number of
the location to which you want to copy the Flashkey
group.
6. PRESS [F8] to copy the group.

☛ Note
If you attempt to copy a flashkey group over an existing
flashkey group a caution displays.

PRESS [F1] to clear the group before copying.


--OR--
PRESS [F3] to insert an empty group before the existing
group and then copy the flashkey setup to the empty group.

Scale Setup 7 - 28
Quantum Scale System

The following illustrates a scenario where the user selects to


clear the existing group before copying (copy Flashkey
group number 4 to group number 2).
GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP
1 2 3 4 5 6 The original
setup.

GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP


1 2 3 4 5 6 After copying
group 4 to
group 2. Notice
that the groups
in between do
not change.

The following illustrates a scenario where the user selects to


insert a group, before the existing group, and before
copying (copy Flashkey group number 4 to group
number 2).
GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP
1 2 3 4 5 6 The original
setup.

GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP


1 2 3 4 5 6 After copying
group 4 to
group 2. Notice
that the groups
following the
group copied to
increase by 1.

7 - 29 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

The Quantum gives you the flexibility to decide what labels


Working with Labels you will use, if they will be continuous or die cut, and what
will print on each label.

The following is important information to know about


labels and label printing before you get started.
♦ The thermal printhead requires no ink or ribbon.
♦ Thermal labels used for transactions may be preprinted
or blank.
♦ Preprinted labels may be printed with a customer logo,
store name, store address and/or other merchandising
information (in black and white or color).

Labels are available in the following sizes. Some label


lengths may require a custom label type.

Label Widths
Label Lengths Standard Standard — Narrow Narrow —
2.25” (57 mm) Continuous & 1.5”(38 mm) Continuous
Linerless 1.5”(38 mm)
2.25” (57 mm)
1.0” (25 mm) _ _
1.5” (38 mm) _ _
1.75” (44 mm) _ _
2.0” (51 mm) _ _
2.375” (60 mm) _ _
2.5” (63 mm) _ _
3.0” (76 mm) _ _ _ _
3.5” (89 mm) _ _ _ _
4.5” (114 mm) _ _
5.0” (127 mm) _ _
5.5” (140 mm) _ _
6.0” (152 mm) _ _
8.0” (203 mm) _ _
The following sections explain:
♦ Label Stock Styles
♦ Labels Menu
♦ Label Types (Formats)
♦ Graphics

Scale Setup 7 - 30
Quantum Scale System

Label Stock Styles Label stock comes in a variety of sizes as will be described
later in this section. Each type of stock has its own function
and purpose.

Die Cut Labels Die Cut Labels are cut so that each label is spaced for
accuracy. Because these are all the same size they can be
pre-printed to create a more attractive label.

Continuous Label Stock Continuous Label Stock is often used in operations where
numerous PLU’s are processed and they require different
label lengths for printing. By printing on Continuous Label
Stock, a PLU with a lot of Expanded Text can be printed, as
well as a PLU with only Special Message information. It
saves labor, in that you don’t have to change the label roll
every time you need to change PLU’s.

Continuous label stock is also used in itemized receipt


format. An itemized receipt is a label with multiple PLUs
and one grand total price and barcode.

Linerless Label Stock Linerless Label Stock is the same as Continuous Label Stock,
but does not have a liner.

✎ Tip
Hobart supplied labels are recommended. They are your
best buy, because:
• Best Quality in the business.
* Less than 1/10th of 1% defect rate.
* Accurate labels on every roll.
• Single source reliability for all scales.
• Highly resistant to heat and moisture.
• Excellent preprint quality.

7 - 31 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Using the Labels The Labels Menu selection allows you to select and change
Menu various label default categories, such as:
♦ Special Fields to Print on Label
♦ Label Text Names
♦ Label Information
♦ Label Types
♦ Graphics
♦ Itemized Labels

QUICK STEPS To select the Labels Menu option:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
1. PRESS [F5] Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F3]

2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Labels


Menu.

Scale Setup 7 - 32
Quantum Scale System

(F1) Select Special Fields to To change/edit the Special Fields to Print on a Label
Print on a Label selections:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale


Setup Menu.
QUICK STEPS 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Labels
Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 3. PRESS [F1] on the Labels Menu.
1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F3]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
5. PRESS [F1]
6. PRESS [ESC]
7. PRESS [ESC]

4. You should now be on the Select Special Fields to Print on


a Label Screen. PRESS the appropriate “F” key to toggle
YES/NO on the fields that you want to print on the label.
A YES answer will print the special field if the label type
permits it.

☛ Note
Indented options are available ONLY if the lead option
above it is set to YES. For example, Julian Sell By is only
available if the Sell By Date is set to Yes.

7 - 33 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

5. PRESS [F1] to select Next Page. Continue to toggle the


fields as desired. Remember, you can also PRESS [PREV]
or [NEXT] to go to the next or previous page of options.

☛ Note
If you PRESS [F5] to select Yes for Weight On By Count, the
weight on a by count PLU will print on a custom label when
the by count value is one.

6. PRESS [ESC] to save your changes and return to the


Labels Menu.
7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

(F2) Label Text Names The Label Text Names option allows you to edit the Field
Header Names that print on labels -- if the Label Type and
Setup permit. These include:

♦ Field 1: Packed On
♦ Field 2: Best Before
♦ Field 3: Sell By
♦ Field 4: Net Wt/Ct
♦ Field 5: Unit Price
♦ Field 6: Total Price
♦ Fields 7-20: Used on Custom Labels (i.e. Tare, Operator
Name, Operator ID, Born On, Packed At, Use By, etc.)

For all available fields, refer to the section Reviewing Available


Fields. This will give you a complete explanation of the fields
that can print on a label.

Scale Setup 7 - 34
Quantum Scale System

QUICK STEPS To edit Label Text Names:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
1. PRESS [F5] Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F3] 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Labels
3. PRESS [F2] Menu.
4. PRESS “F” Keys as 3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F2] to select Label Text
appropriate Names.
5. TYPE your Changes
6. PRESS [ENTER],
[▲] or [▼]
7. PRESS [ESC]
8. PRESS [ESC]

4. You should now be on the Change Text for Labels Fields


Screen. Use the ARROW KEYS to move the box cursor to
the field you want to change (UP moves to the previous
field, DOWN moves to the next field, LEFT and RIGHT
move within the current field).
5. TYPE your change(s) in the designated field.

6. PRESS [ENTER] or the UP or DOWN ARROW Keys to


move to the next field.
7. Once all your changes have been made, PRESS [ESC] to
save your changes and return to the Labels Menu.
8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

7 - 35 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Reviewing Available Fields The following table lists all fields which are available on
Primary and Secondary labels. Although each label type is
formatted for specific fields, any field can be selected on
Custom Labels. Refer to Selecting Label Types for details on
which fields print on which labels.

• Barcodes, UPC & EAN13


• Best Before
• Freeze By
• Coupon Expiration Date
• Use By
• Sell By
• Sell Thru
• Packed On
• By Count
• Date
• Description
• Expanded Text
— Ingredients
— Recipes
— Cooking Instructions
— Health Tips
• Net Weight Statement
• Fixed Weight Net Weight Statement
— 3/16” Numbers & Letters
— 1/4” Numbers & Letters
• Nutrition Facts
• Operator Name
• Operator Number
• Special Message
— Product Number (PLU)
— Merchandising Message
— Coupon
• Store ID Number
• Store Logo
• Store Name
— Store Address
— Web Site Address
• Tare
• Time
• Total Price
• Total Type
• Unit Price
• UPC Number/EAN13 Number
• Graphic Art
— User Definable
— Embedded
• Safe Handling Graphic
— User Definable
— Embedded
• Weight

Scale Setup 7 - 36
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Label Information The Label Information option allows you to do the
following:
• Set the default label types for both the primary and
secondary labels. These default settings appear when
you create a new product.
• Enable or Disable Auto Wrap expanded text.

Look At This
Be aware that your POS system must accept and understand
EAN13 barcodes.

Changing the Default Label To change the default label types:


Types 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Labels
QUICK STEPS
Menu.
3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Label
From the Supervisor Menu:
Information. The Label Information screen displays.
1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F3]
3. PRESS [F3]
4. TYPE new Default Primary
Label Type Number (If
needed)
5. TYPE new Default
Secondary Label Type
Number (If needed)
6. PRESS [ESC]
7. PRESS [ESC]

7 - 37 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

4. The Default Primary Label Type number displays on the


first line -103 is the default. You can change this to any
available label type. Refer to Label Types for detailed
examples of all label types.

5. The Default Secondary Label Type number shown on the


next line - 0 is the default. You can change this to any
available label type. Refer to Selecting Label Types
(Formats) for detailed examples of all label types.

☛ Note
To speed production and add to your merchandising
capabilities, you have the ability to print a secondary label
even if you do not have a Secondary Printer attached to the
scale system. Basically, you can print a secondary label (for
Nutrifacts, Graphics, Safe Handling Instructions, etc.) as
long as the label information will print on the label type
currently loaded into the scale system. If the label size is the
wrong one, you will get an error message.

6. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the Labels


Menu.
7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

Scale Setup 7 - 38
Quantum Scale System

Using Word Wrap Use Word Wrap to enable expanded text to automatically
adjust to fit the width of the field on the label. This feature
does not effect lines that have a carriage return.

To use Word Wrap:


QUICK STEPS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 2. PRESS [F3] to select Labels menu.
1. PRESS [F5] 3. PRESS [F3] to select Label Information. The Label
2. PRESS [F3] Information screen displays.
3. PRESS [F3] 4. TOGGLE [F8] to set Auto Wrap Expanded Text ON or
4. PRESS [F8] OFF.
5. PRESS [ESC]

5. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Labels Menu.

7 - 39 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

(F4) Label Types Label Types enable you to view available labels contained
within your scale system. Detailed examples of each are
available in Selecting Label Types (Formats).

QUICK STEPS To select the Label Types option:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
1. PRESS [F5] Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F3] 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Labels
3. PRESS [F4] Menu.
4. PRESS [▼] or [NEXT], [▲] 3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Label Types.
or [PREV] or TYPE the
Label Type Number
5. PRESS [ESC]
6. PRESS [ESC]

4. You should now be on the Label Types Screen. To move


forward through the available Label Types, PRESS
[DOWN ARROW (▼)] or [NEXT]; PRESS [UP ARROW
(▲) or [PREV] to move back -- OR -- you can TYPE the
Label Number in the Label Type field.

Scale Setup 7 - 40
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
The label fields are compressed to fit into the display on the
Label Types screen.

5. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Labels Menu.


6. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

✎ Tip
The Label Type Screen displays the Label Type Number and
the label stock size required to print the label shown. If the
current label stock is the correct size, you can print the label
shown by pressing [PRINT].
To review all label types in ROM, PRESS [HELP].

Selecting Label Types As discussed previously, Label Types are the actual format
(Formats) of the label, or how it is set up to print. Refer to the detailed
examples for a better understanding of what the final label
can look like. You may want to take some time to review
each example and think about which options you want and
which label size and format you should use. Although, these
are accurate examples, the size and dimensions of the label
or field may not be exact.

☛ Note
If you do not find the label type you want, you can contact
Hobart to order a custom label type. Hobart has designed a
custom self-contracting label type for continuous label stock.
For details and examples, refer to Custom Labels.

7 - 41 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
Each label type is set up with default fonts. Changing the
font may add/delete characters per line of text. To aid in
merchandising, the Quantum offers a wide variety of fonts
in the system ROM:

Included in the above list are two custom fonts, Hobart 68


and Quantum 52. These fonts work in conjunction with
specific custom labels. Contact your local Hobart office for
more details.

Scale Setup 7 - 42
Quantum Scale System

Standard Labels by Family Label families were designed to work with the default label
type settings. For example, you may have label type 26
selected (designed for 6.0” labels), but the label stock in the
scale is 3.0”. The scale automatically searches the database
and ROM for the first 3.0” label in the label type 26 family.
In this example, the scale prints label type 23. This feature
allows the use of nonstandard label lengths.

Although, the following are accurate examples, the size and


dimensions of the label or field may not be exact.

☛ Note
Label Types 113 and 123 are identical label formats for the
Quantum and the Ultima. They include an embedded Safe
Handling graphic which frees the graphic field for the same
label or a second label.

✎ Tip
Be aware that each label format is limited by the size.
Different label sizes in the same family may print
significantly different information and format.

Family 1

Label Type 11

Label Type 12

7 - 43 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Family 1

Label Type 13

Label Type 14

Scale Setup 7 - 44
Quantum Scale System

Family 1

Label Type 15

Label Type 16

7 - 45 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Family 2

Label Type 21

Label Type 22

Label Type 23

Label Type 24

Scale Setup 7 - 46
Quantum Scale System

Family 2

Label Type 25

Label Type 26

7 - 47 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Family 3
(Dual Declaration -
Fixed Net Weight)

Label Type 31

Label Type 32

Label Type 33

Label Type 34

Scale Setup 7 - 48
Quantum Scale System

Family 3
(Dual Declaration -
Fixed Net Weight)

Label Type 35

Label Type 36

7 - 49 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Family 3
(Dual Declaration -
Fixed Net Weight
Fluid Ounces)

Label Type 31

Label Type 32

Label Type 33

Label Type 34

Scale Setup 7 - 50
Quantum Scale System

Family 3
(Dual Declaration -
Fixed Net Weight
Fluid Ounces)

Label Type 35

Label Type 36

7 - 51 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Family 5

Label Type 51

Label Type 52

Label Type 53

Label Type 54

Scale Setup 7 - 52
Quantum Scale System

Family 5

Label Type 55

Label Type 56

7 - 53 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Family 6

Label Type 63

Label Type 64

Scale Setup 7 - 54
Quantum Scale System

Family 6

Label Type 65

Label Type 66

7 - 55 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Family 10

Label Type 101

Label Type 102

Label Type 103

Label Type 104

Scale Setup 7 - 56
Quantum Scale System

Family 10

Label Type 105

Label Type 106

7 - 57 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Family 11

Label Type 111

Label Type 112

Label Type 113

Label Type 114

Scale Setup 7 - 58
Quantum Scale System

Family 11

Label Type 115

Label Type 116

7 - 59 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Family 12

Label Type 123

Label Type 125

Scale Setup 7 - 60
Quantum Scale System

Family 12

Label Type 126

7 - 61 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Family 13

Label Type 133

Label Type 134

Scale Setup 7 - 62
Quantum Scale System

Family 13

Label Type 135

Label Type 136

7 - 63 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Standard Labels by Size The following examples represent all standard width labels
according to length. Although, the following are accurate
examples, the size and dimensions of the label or field may
not be exact.

☛ Note
Label Types 113 and 123 are identical label formats for the
Quantum and the Ultima. They include an embedded Safe
Handling graphic which frees the graphic field for the same
label or a second label.

2.25” Width
1.75” Length

Label Type 11
Label Type 21

Label Type 31 Label Type 51

Label Type 101 Label Type 111

Scale Setup 7 - 64
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
2.375” Length

Label Type 12 Label Type 22

Label Type 32 Label Type 52

Label Type 112


Label Type 102

7 - 65 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
3.0” Length

Label Type 23
Label Type 13

Label Type 33 Label Type 53

Scale Setup 7 - 66
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
3.0” Length

Label Type 63 Label Type 103

Label Type 113 Label Type 123

7 - 67 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
3.0” Length

Label Type 133


Label Type 249

Label Type 179

Scale Setup 7 - 68
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
4.5” Length

Label Type 14 Label Type 24

Label Type 34 Label Type 54

7 - 69 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
4.5” Length

Label Type 104 Label Type 114

Label Type 64 Label Type 134

Scale Setup 7 - 70
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
4.5” Length

Label Type 199 Label Type 229

7 - 71 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
6.0” Length

Label Type 15 Label Type 25

Scale Setup 7 - 72
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
6.0” Length

Label Type 35 Label Type 55

7 - 73 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
6.0” Length

Label Type 65
Label Type 125

Scale Setup 7 - 74
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
6.0” Length

Label Type 135 Label Type 209

7 - 75 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
8.0” Length

Label Type 16 Label Type 26

Scale Setup 7 - 76
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
8.0” Length

Label Type 36 Label Type 56

7 - 77 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
8.0” Length

Label Type 66 Label Type 106

Scale Setup 7 - 78
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
8.0” Length

Label Type 116 Label Type 126

7 - 79 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

2.25” Width
8.0” Length

Label Type 136

Scale Setup 7 - 80
Quantum Scale System

Narrow Labels The following examples represent narrow width labels


according to length.

1.5” Width
1.0” Length

Label Type 200

1.5” Width
1.5” Length

Label Type 231 Label Type 241

1.5” Width
2.0” Length

Label Type 242 Label Type 222 Label Type 232

Label Type 202

7 - 81 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

1.5” Width
3.0” Length

Label Type 223 Label Type 243


Label Type 233

Label Type 189

Label Type 239

Scale Setup 7 - 82
Quantum Scale System

Custom Labels Along with the wide variety of standard label types, Hobart
offers custom labels. These labels are designed to fit your
specific merchandising needs.

One of the options available through custom label types, is


the self-contracting expanded text and/or user graphic
fields. When using continuous labels, the expanded text
field contracts according to the amount of expanded text in
the PLU file. This alleviates unnecessary white space. If you
are using a custom label type with the self-contracting user
graphic option and you do not assign a graphic, the graphic
field contracts. Refer to the following example.

7 - 83 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

(F5) Graphics The Graphics option allows you to view the available
Graphics that can be added to labels. The following graphics
are always available in ROM. (The following graphics are
not shown in actual size.)

Graphic 123
Graphic 121 Graphic 124

☛ Note
Hobart offers a variety of scale graphics through the
Retailer’s Scale Merchandising Companion (F-7901). This is
a multiple disk set that includes approximately 365 custom
graphics. For additional graphics, contact your local Hobart
Representative.

QUICK STEPS To select the Graphics option:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
From the Supervisor Menu: Setup Menu.
1. PRESS [F5] 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Labels
2. PRESS [F3] Menu.
3. PRESS [F5] 3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Graphics.
4. PRESS [▼] or [NEXT], [▲]
or [PREV] or TYPE the
Graphic Number
5. PRESS [ESC]
6. PRESS [ESC]

Scale Setup 7 - 84
Quantum Scale System

4. You should now be on the Graphics Screen. To move


through the available Graphics, PRESS [DOWN ARROW
(▼)] or [NEXT] to advance; PRESS [UP ARROW (▲)] or
[PREV] to move back one graphic at a time -- OR-- you
can TYPE the Graphic Number in the Graphic Number
field.

5. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Labels Menu.


6. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

✎ Tip
If you use standard width label stock, you can print the
graphic by pressing [PRINT].

☛ Note
By pressing [HELP], you can get a list of all the available
system graphics. They will be listed by number and name.

7 - 85 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

(F6) Itemized Labels Accumulate items mode enables you to print one label or a
series of labels for multiple PLUs. Item Total Labels and
Itemized Receipts print on any size die cut or continuous
labels.

When configured, you can print a label for each product


and/or an Item Total Label for all products. The Item Total
Label contains only the grand total and barcode. Refer to the
following examples.

Scale Setup 7 - 86
Quantum Scale System

When configured you can print an Itemized receipt for all


products entered. This receipt contains all products, a grand
total and a barcode. Refer to the following examples.

Itemized Receipt (2.25” X 3.0”)

Itemized Receipt
(1.5” X 5.0”)

Itemized Receipt
(Continuous X 2.25”)

☛ Note
The following table lists the available range for itemized
receipts on die cut labels.
Standard Size Range Narrow Size Range
2.375 1-2 3.0 1-4
3.0 1-4 3.5 1-5
4.5 1-6 5 1-9
6 1-8 Continuous 1 - 100
8 1 - 12
Continuous 1 - 100

7 - 87 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Selecting Item Tickets To select Item Tickets as the printing option:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale


QUICK STEPS Setup Menu.
2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Labels
From the Supervisor Menu:
Menu.
1. PRESS [F5]
3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F6] to select Itemized
2. PRESS [F3]
Labels.
3. PRESS [F6]
4. PRESS [F3] to select NO
5. PRESS [F4] - As needed
6. PRESS [F5] - As needed
TYPE UPC Number - As
needed
7. PRESS [ESC]
8. PRESS [ESC]

4. You should now be on the Itemized Labels Screen.


Toggle [F3] Print an Itemized Receipt to NO. The Print a
Total Label Only prompt displays.

Scale Setup 7 - 88
Quantum Scale System

5. Toggle [F4] Print a Total Label Only to either YES or NO.


a. If you select YES to Print the Item Total label Only
and not the preceding Item Tickets, enter the UPC or
EAN number to print on the total label.
--OR--
a. If you select NO to Print a Total Label Only Item
Tickets and the Item Total label will print. The Print
a Bar Code on Individual Labels prompt displays.

b. PRESS [F5] to select YES/NO.


c. If you select YES, ENTER the UPC or EAN Number
in the UPC/EAN Number to Print on the Total
Label.
6. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the Labels
Menu.
7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

7 - 89 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Selecting Itemized Receipts To select Itemized Receipts as the Accumulate Items


printing option:
QUICK STEPS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu:
2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F3] to select Labels
1. PRESS [F5]
Menu.
2. PRESS [F3]
3. On the Labels Menu, PRESS [F6] to select Itemized
3. PRESS [F6]
Labels.
4. PRESS [F3] to select YES
5. Enter the UPC/EAN
number
6. PRESS [ESC]
7. PRESS [ESC]

4. You should now be on the Itemized Labels Screen. PRESS


[F3] Print an Itemized Receipt to select YES.
5. Enter the UPC/EAN number to print on the label.

6. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the Labels


Menu.
7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

Scale Setup 7 - 90
Quantum Scale System

(F4) Scale Operation The Scale Operation option allows you to:
♦ Select the field(s) that the operator can override.
♦ Change the Date, Time or Date Format.
♦ Set the basic values controlling how the scale operates.

QUICK STEPS To select Scale Operation:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale Setup
1. PRESS [F5] Menu.
2. PRESS [F4]

2. On the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Scale


Operation. You should now be on the Scale Operation
Menu.

7 - 91 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

(F1) Set What the Operator From this screen, you can designate what field(s) the
Can Modify operator can temporarily override when they are weighing
and labeling packages in the Operator Mode Run Screen.

QUICK STEPS To select the Set What the Operator Can Modify option:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale Setup
1. PRESS [F5] Menu.
2. PRESS [F4] 2. On the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Scale
3. PRESS [F1] Operation.
4. PRESS “F” Keys as 3. You should now be on the Scale Operation Menu. PRESS
appropriate [F1] to select Set What the Operator Can Modify.
5. PRESS [F1] or [NEXT]
6. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
7. PRESS [ESC]
8. PRESS [ESC]

4. Use the “F” keys to toggle the YES/NO settings on the


following operational fields:
♦ Date/Time
♦ Price
♦ By Count
♦ Tare

Scale Setup 7 - 92
Quantum Scale System

5. PRESS [F1] or [NEXT] to move to the Next Page. You


can also PRESS [PREV] to move back a screen.
6. Use the “F” keys to toggle the YES/NO settings on the
following operational fields:
♦ Shelf Life
♦ Label Type
♦ Fixed Weight
♦ Product Life
♦ Portions

7. When finished, PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale


Operation Menu.
8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

☛ Note
If the Operator is working with Miscellaneous PLU’s, they
will be able to change all fields for that PLU, regardless of
how these settings are configured.

7 - 93 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

(F2) Date/Time From this screen, you can change the date and time; as well
as select the format that the date will print on the label.

To select Date/Time:
QUICK STEPS 1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale Setup
Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 2. On the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Scale
1. PRESS [F5] Operation. You should now be on the Scale Operation
2. PRESS [F4] Menu.
3. PRESS [F2] 3. PRESS [F2] to select Date/Time.
4. PRESS [F1]
5. TYPE new Date
6. PRESS [F2]
7. TYPE new Time
8. PRESS [F3] - As needed
9. PRESS [F5], [F6], [F7], or
[F8]
10. PRESS [ESC]
11. PRESS [ESC]

4. To Change the Date, PRESS [F1].


5. TYPE the new date.
6. To Change the Time, PRESS [F2].
7. TYPE the new time.
8. While changing the time, PRESS [F3] to change AM/PM
(if needed).
9. To select the date format, PRESS [F5-F8] to choose the
format you prefer for printing. The date must be entered
in the order of the selected date format.

10. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return you to the
Scale Operation Menu.
11. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

Scale Setup 7 - 94
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Setup Normal Scale The Setup Normal Scale Operation option allows you to
Operation specify the following details:
♦ Display Weight During Flashkey Screen (Yes/No)
♦ Collect Product Totals (Yes/No)
♦ Collect Hourly Totals (Yes/No)
♦ Collect Operator Totals (Yes/No)
♦ Sound a Beep on Stable Weight (Yes/No)
♦ Use ‘Product Life’ as ‘Frozen Shelf Life’
♦ Fixed Weight Units (Whole Ounces, 1/10th of a Ounce)
♦ By Count Calculation Method (1, 2, or 3)
♦ Auto Look-Up of Product (Yes/No)
♦ No. of Digits to Begin Auto Look-Up (2-6)
♦ Beeper Volume (F7 = Increase; F8 = Decrease)
♦ Select the Weigh Types to be displayed on the Start a
Run Screen

☛ Note
♦ Auto Look-Up allows you to set the number of digits
required for the system to automatically look-up
product information. Values can range from 2-6 digits.
♦ By Count (values of 1, 2 or 3) determines how the By
Count is calculated.
The By Count Calculation Method determines which of
three (3) formulas is used to calculate the Total Price for By
Count items when less than the By Count quantity is sold.
The following describes what selecting 1, 2 or 3 means.

Calculation Method Description

One (1) If the discount is greater than $.01, the


customer starts receiving the discount
(.01 per item) sooner than on the last
item purchased to complete the deal.

Example: Deal = 3/$1.00


Customer is charged .34 for the first
item, .33 for the second, and .33 for
the third.

7 - 95 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

Calculation Method Description


Two (2) The customer receives the discount
on the last item purchased to
“complete the deal.” The By Count
Price is divided by the By Count
Quantity and the answer is rounded
up to the next cent; the answer is
multiplied by the Quantity sold. If
the By Count quantity is sold, the
bargain differential is subtracted so as
not to exceed the By Count Price.

By Count Price x Quantity = Total


By Count Quantity Sold Price

Three (3) In this formula, the division is


performed last and the answer is
carried to three decimals; any fraction
is then rounded up to the next cent.

By Count x Quantity Sold = Total


Price By Count Quantity Price

The following table gives you a comparison for the


following example: By Count Quantity = 12, By Count Price
= $2.09.

Method 1 Method 2 Method 3


1 .18 .18 .18
2 .36 .36 .35*
3 .54 .54 .53
4 .72 .72 .70*
5 .90 .90 .88
6 1.07 * 1.08 1.05*
7 1.24 * 1.26 1.22*
8 1.41 * 1.44 1.40
9 1.58 * 1.62 1.57*
10 1.75 * 1.80 1.75
11 1.92 * 1.98 1.92*
12 2.09 * 2.09* 2.09*
* Denotes that the discount was applied.

☛ Note
Reminder: If you entered an Exception Price, it takes
precedence over the By Count Calculation Method you selected.
In the example, 3/$1.00, Exception Price = .50, the customer
pays .50 for the 1st item; .50 for second and .00 for third.

Scale Setup 7 - 96
Quantum Scale System

To select the Setup Normal Scale Operation option:


QUICK STEPS
1. On the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale Setup
From the Supervisor Menu: Menu.
1. PRESS [F5] 2. On the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F4] to select Scale
2. PRESS [F4] Operation. You should now be on the Scale Operation
3. PRESS [F3] Menu.
4. PRESS “F” Keys as 3. PRESS [F3] to select Setup Normal Scale Operation.
appropriate
5. PRESS (F8) as appropriate
6. PRESS [F1]
7. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
8. PRESS [F1]
9. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
10. PRESS [ESC]
11. PRESS [ESC]

4. You should now be on the Setup Normal Scale Operation


Menu. PRESS the “F” keys to answer YES/NO to select
the option, toggle numeric answers or adjust the setting.

7 - 97 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
If you toggle [F2] Display Weight During Flashkey Screen to
YES, the weight displays, as follows:

You can return to the flashkey screen by pressing [ENTER]


or pressing [ESC] to remove the weight box.

5. PRESS [F8] to toggle between Whole Ounces and One


Tenth of an Ounce. This affects how the Fixed Weight is
displayed in the Operate Mode.
6. PRESS [F1] or [NEXT] to move to the Next Page (Page 2
of 3), or PRESS [PREV] to move back one page.
7. PRESS the “F” keys to answer YES/NO to select the
option, toggle numeric answers or adjust the setting.

Scale Setup 7 - 98
Quantum Scale System

8. PRESS [F1] or [NEXT] to move to the Next Page (Page 3


of 3), or PRESS [PREV] to move back one page.
9. From this screen, PRESS the appropriate “F” Key to
toggle Display/Don’t Display to select which Weigh
Types will be listed on the Start a Run Screen. Only the
types selected as “Display” will appear in the list.

10. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the Scale
Operation Menu.
11. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

7 - 99 Scale Setup
Quantum Scale System

(F5) Scale ID & Store The Scale ID & Store Information option allows you to
Information assign the Store Number, Scale ID, Store Graphic and Store
Name to your Quantum Scale System.

To access this option:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
QUICK STEPS

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F5]
3. TYPE the Scale ID Number
4. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]
5. TYPE Store ID Number
6. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]
7. TYPE the Store Graphic
Number
8. PRESS [ENTER]or [▼]
9. PRESS [F5]
10. TYPE the Store Name
11. PRESS [ESC]
12. PRESS [ESC]
13. PRESS [ESC] 2. PRESS [F5] from the Scale Setup Menu to select Scale ID
& Store Information.

3. You should now be on the Scale ID & Store Information


Screen. TYPE the Scale ID Number in the appropriate
field.

☛ Note
Valid Scale ID numbers are as follows:
• If IntraNet is NOT turned on, Scale ID’s can be
numbered 0 - 99.
• If IntraNet is turned on, Scale ID’s should be 0 - 15. The
recommended Server Scale ID Number is 15.

Scale Setup 7 - 100


Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to


the next field.
5. TYPE the Store ID Number in the appropriate field.
6. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the next field.
7. TYPE the Store Graphic Number in the appropriate
field.
8. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the next field.
9. To enter the Store Name, PRESS [F5] to select Edit Store
Name.

10. TYPE the Store Name in the Store Name box.

11. PRESS [ESC] to save the Store Name changes.


12. When all changes have been made, PRESS [ESC] to
return to the Scale Setup Menu.
13. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

7 - 101 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

(F6) Communications From this screen, you can:


♦ Select the device to Backup and Restore scale
information
• Disk
• Cassette
♦ Select the network to which your scale is connected (if
any)
• None
• MiniNet II
• ScaleMaster
• IntraNet

QUICK STEPS To access the Communications Menu:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
1. PRESS [F5] Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F6]
3. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate

2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F6] to select the


Communications Menu option.

Scale Setup 7 - 102


Quantum Scale System

3. You should now be at the Communications Menu. PRESS


the appropriate “F” Key to choose Cassette/Disk or
Network.

(F1) Cassette/Disk To select the Cassette/Disk option:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
QUICK STEPS 2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F6] to select
Communications Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 3. You should now be at the Communications Menu. PRESS
1. PRESS [F5] [F1] to select Cassette/Disk. You may now accept the
2. PRESS [F6] default settings or change the settings.
3. PRESS [F1]
4. PRESS [F2]
5. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
6. PRESS [ESC]
7. PRESS [ESC]
8. PRESS [ESC]

Look At This
If you change any of the displayed values, communications
may be inhibited.

☛ Note
Changes to the Recorder Type will automatically change the
default settings for Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits and Stop Bits.

7 - 103 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [F2] to toggle between Cassette or Disk.


5. PRESS “F” Keys as appropriate to change the settings.
6. PRESS [ESC] when your choice of Cassette or Disk and
their settings are displayed.

Default Settings for Cassette

Default Settings for Disk

7. When the settings are correct, PRESS [ESC] again to


return to the Communications Menu.
8. PRESS [ESC] again to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

Scale Setup 7 - 104


Quantum Scale System

(F2) Network To accept or change the Network type:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale


QUICK STEPS Setup Menu.
2. From the Scale Setup Menu, PRESS [F6] to select
From the Supervisor Menu: Communications Menu.
1. PRESS [F5] 3. You should now be at the Communications Menu. PRESS
2. PRESS [F6] [F2] to select Network. You may now accept the default
3. PRESS [F2] settings or change the settings.
4. PRESS [F2]
5. PRESS “F” Keys as
appropriate
6. PRESS [ESC]
7. PRESS [ESC]
8. PRESS [ESC]

Look At This
If you change any of the displayed values, communications
may be inhibited.

☛ Note
Changes to the Network Type will automatically change the
default settings for Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits and Stop
Bits.

7 - 105 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [F2] to select the Network Type.


5. PRESS “F” Keys as appropriate to change the settings.
6. PRESS [ESC] when your choice of Network Type and
the settings are displayed.
Network Type = None

Network Type = MiniNet II

Network Type = ScaleMaster

Scale Setup 7 - 106


Quantum Scale System

Network Type = IntraNet

☛ Note
If you have installed the optional RS-485 board, the IntraNet
screen will look different. Pressing [F3] will allow you to
setup both the ScaleMaster and Client/Server sides.

7. When the settings are correct, PRESS [ESC] again to


return to the Communications Menu.
8. PRESS [ESC] again to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

(F7) Marquee Setup Marquee Setup is used to:


♦ Set the basic values controlling how the marquee
operates
QUICK STEPS ♦ Schedule times for displaying marquee messages when
the scale is idle
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F5] To access Marquee Setup:
2. PRESS [F7] 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select the Scale
Setup Menu.

7 - 107 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F7] to select Marquee Setup Menu.

(F1) Marquee Modes The Marquee Modes function is used to set up the display
for :
♦ Messages related to a product
♦ Description of a product
♦ Generic messages used during idle scale time
♦ Timed Messages

The following table provides you a definition of each


Marquee Mode item.

Mode Description
Permanent Message A Permanent Message is a marquee
message that does not change very often.
If other messages are also created, they
will display in sequence of priority.
♦ Example: Welcome to {Our Store}!
Daily Message A Daily Message alternates with the
Permanent Message. In sequence of
priority, it displays as long as there are
no Product Descriptions, Product
Marquee Messages to be displayed or
Timed Messages scheduled.
♦ Example: Happy New Year !!
Timed Marquee This option allows you to turn On or Off,
Messages the option to display Timed Marquee
Messages. Timed Marquee Messages
replace Daily Messages in the sequence
of priority.
♦ Example: “Pork Roast Special
$2.99/lb.” at 3:00 pm and “Corned
Beef $2.19/lb.” at 4:00 pm

Scale Setup 7 - 108


Quantum Scale System

Continued... Mode Description


Product Marquee If you have created Marquee Messages
Messages for your products, this option allows you
to designate whether you want the
Product Marquee Message to display
when the operator enters the PLU
number. In the sequence of priority,
Product Marquee Messages replaces
either Timed Messages or Daily
Messages. Product Description will
display before the PLU Marquee
Message, unless it is set to be displayed
Continuously.
♦ Example: Chicken Wings go great
with Potato Salad!
Display Product This option allows you can designate
Description whether you want to display the Product
Description and if so, how often you
want to display it. The Product
Description will display before the
Permanent Message, Product Marquee
Message or the Daily or Timed
Messages.
♦ Example: Chicken Wings

☛ Note
Prior to setting up your display options for the Permanent
and Daily Marquee Messages, you need to create the
messages in the Change Product function. In order to do
this, you will need to create a PLU that exists for the
Marquee Messages only. Make sure you use a PLU Number
that falls outside your normal range of PLU Numbers and
Classes.

7 - 109 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

Creating a Permanent or To create a Permanent or Daily Message:


Daily Message
1. PRESS [F1] to select Change Product.
2. TYPE the Product Number.
3. PRESS [F1] to select Add as New Product.
4. PRESS [F1], [F2] or [F3] to select the PLU Type. For this
function, the PLU Type really doesn’t matter.
5. PRESS [PREV] to go to Page 3.
6. PRESS [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to the Marquee
Messages field.
7. PRESS [F6] to select Change Text Field.
8. PRESS [F1] to select Create New.
9. TYPE the Marquee Message, using the Marquee Editor
as needed.
10. PRESS [ESC] to return to Page 1 of the Change Product
Screen.
11. Make a note of the PLU Number you entered for the
Marquee Message(s).

QUICK STEPS To access the Marquee Modes Screen:

From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select the Scale
1. PRESS [F5] Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F7]
3. PRESS [F1]
Options:
4. TYPE the Permanent
Message Number
5. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
6. TYPE the Daily Message
Number
7. PRESS [F3] - As needed
8. PRESS [F5] - As needed
9. PRESS [F6] - As needed
10. If “x no. of times”
displayed, TYPE Number
of Times Value.
11. PRESS [F8] / PRESS [F8]
12. PRESS [ESC]
13. PRESS [ESC]
14. PRESS [ESC]

Scale Setup 7 - 110


Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F7] to select Marquee Setup Menu.

3. From the Marquee Setup Menu, PRESS [F1] to select


Marquee Modes.

Options:
4. TYPE the Product Number that contains the Permanent
Message in the appropriate field.
5. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move the
cursor to the Daily Message field.
6. TYPE the Product Number that contains the Daily
Message.
7. PRESS [F3] to toggle between Display or Don’t Display
Timed Marquee Messages.

7 - 111 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

8. PRESS [F5] to toggle between Display or Don’t Display


Product Marquee Messages.

9. PRESS [F6] to toggle between Continuously, x Number


of Times or Never for Display Product Description
option.
10. If you select “x number of times”, TYPE the Value in the
Display the Description how many times (1-14) field.

11. To View the Selected Message, PRESS [F8]. The message


will display on the bottom of the Marquee Modes Screen.
If needed, PRESS [F8] to Stop the Selected Message.

Scale Setup 7 - 112


Quantum Scale System

12. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Marquee Setup Menu.


13. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.
14. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

☛ Note
If you designate Display Product Description to run
Continuously, the Product Marquee Display will not display
-- even if the toggle is set to Display. Notice the Softkey is
disabled when Description is displayed Continuously.

(F2) Timed Marquee In order to use this function, you must have at least one (1)
Messages PLU with a marquee message created for it. A complete
description of how to Create Marquee Messages is found in
the Change Product section of this manual.
QUICK STEPS
To access Timed Marquee Messages:
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F5] 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select the Scale
2. PRESS [F7] Setup Menu.
3. PRESS [F2] 2. PRESS [F7] to select Marquee Setup.
4. PRESS [F2] 3. You should now be on the Marquee Setup Menu. PRESS
5. TYPE the Time [F2] to select Timed Marquee Messages.
6. PRESS [F3]
7. PRESS [ENTER]
8. TYPE the Product Number
9. PRESS [ENTER]
10. PRESS [F8] / PRESS [F8]
11. PRESS [ESC]
12. PRESS [ESC]
13. PRESS [ESC]

7 - 113 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

4. You should now be on the Timed Marquee Messages


Screen. PRESS [F2] to select Create a Timed Message.

5. In the Display Time field, TYPE the time you want the
message to display.
6. PRESS [F3] to change AM/PM as needed.
7. PRESS [ENTER] to move the cursor to the Product
Number field.
8. TYPE the desired Product Number.
9. PRESS [ENTER] on the Control Panel to save the
changes.

Scale Setup 7 - 114


Quantum Scale System

10. To review the message, PRESS [F8]. The display shows


the message that is on the same line as the cursor in a
text box at the bottom of the screen. If needed, PRESS
[F8] again to select Stop Selected Message.

11. Repeat Steps 4 - 9 to setup other Timed Messages.


12. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Marquee Setup Menu.
13. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.
14. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

☛ Note
Each time you enter this function, the Timed Messages are
listed in the order in which they will display. However, if
you create a message out of sequence, you can select
Reorder List by Time to arrange them by time of display.
1. PRESS [F1] to Reorder List By Time. The list of timed
Marquee Messages is rearranged by the Display time.

7 - 115 Scale Setup


Quantum Scale System

Chapter Eight: Miscellaneous Menu


♦ Overview
♦ Delete Time Stamp Changes
♦ Information Tracker
• Network Report
• Operator Changes
♦ Return to Operate Mode

8-1 Miscellaneous Menu


Quantum Scale System

Miscellaneous Menu Flowchart

MISCELLANEOUS
MENU

PRESS [F6]
Miscellaneous Menu

Information
Tracker
Menu
(F8)

Network Report Operator Changes


(F1) (F2)

Delete Delete
All Changes This Change
(F1) (F2)

Miscellaneous Menu 8-2


Quantum Scale System

Miscellaneous Menu From this menu, you can complete the following:
Supervisor Menu ♦ Delete Time Stamp Changes (If IntraNet is configured)
“F” Key = F6 ♦ View and Delete Information Tracker Data including a
Network Report (If IntraNet is configured) and Operator
Changes

(F1) Delete Time If you have configured your scale with IntraNet, you can set
Stamp Changes your scale to transmit data changes at a predetermined time.
However, if you later decide that you do not want the Time
Stamp Changes to occur, you can delete them.

To access the Delete Time Stamp Changes:

1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F6] to select


QUICK STEPS Miscellaneous Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F6]
2. PRESS [F1]
3. PRESS [F7]
4. Press Any Key
5. PRESS ESC

2. PRESS [F1] to select Delete Time Stamp Changes.

8-3 Miscellaneous Menu


Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F7] to select Delete.

When you press [F7], the Time Stamp Changes are deleted
and you get a message informing you that the deletion
occurred.

4. Press Any Key to return to the Miscellaneous Menu.


5. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

Miscellaneous Menu 8-4


Quantum Scale System

(F8) Information Information Tracker provides you information on IntraNet


Tracker communication errors and Operator Changes made to
PLU’s during the Operate Mode. It contains the following
menu selections:
♦ Network Report (F1) {If IntraNet is ON}
♦ Operator Changes (F2)

To access the Information Tracker Menu:


QUICK STEPS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F6] to select
Miscellaneous Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F6]
2. PRESS [F8]

2. PRESS [F8] to select Information Tracker Menu.

8-5 Miscellaneous Menu


Quantum Scale System

(F1) Network Report Network Report provides you a list of communication


errors that occur during IntraNet Communications. From
this screen, you can view, print or delete individual
communication errors.
QUICK STEPS
To access Network Report:
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F6] 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F6] to select
2. PRESS [F8] Miscellaneous Menu.
3. PRESS [F1]
4. PRESS [F1] or [F2]
5. PRESS [ESC]
6. PRESS [ESC]
7. PRESS [ESC]

2. From the Miscellaneous Menu, PRESS [F8] to select


Information Tracker Menu.

Miscellaneous Menu 8-6


Quantum Scale System

3. You should now be on the Information Tracker Menu.


PRESS [F1] to select Network Report. The display gives
you a list of communications errors that occurred during
IntraNet Communications.

4. Use [UP ARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to


move through the list one error at a time. If necessary,
use [PREV] or [NEXT] to move view the report a page at
a time.
5. PRESS [F1] to remove all the errors displayed -- OR --
PRESS [F2] to remove the highlighted error only.
6. When you have finished, PRESS [ESC] to return to the
Information Tracker Menu.

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Miscellaneous Menu.


8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

8-7 Miscellaneous Menu


Quantum Scale System

(F2) Operator Changes Operator Changes allows you to view and/or delete
changes that each operator made to a PLU during the
Operate Mode. It allows you to print and/or delete each
change individually or all of them at one time.
QUICK STEPS
1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F6] to select
From the Supervisor Menu: Miscellaneous Menu.
1. PRESS [F6] 2. From the Miscellaneous Menu, PRESS [F8] to select
2. PRESS [F8] Information Tracker. You should now be on the
3. PRESS [F2] Information Tracker Menu.
4. Use [▲] or [▼] -- OR -- 3. PRESS [F2] to select Operator Changes. The display
[PREV] or [NEXT] shows all the changes made by your Operators, with the
5. PRESS [F1] or [F2] most recent changes listed first. It will display the
6. PRESS [ESC] Operator that made the changes, if known.
7. PRESS [ESC]
8. PRESS [ESC]

4. Use [UP ARROW (▲)] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to


move through the list one error at a time. If necessary,
use [PREV] or [NEXT] to move view the report a page at
a time.
5. PRESS [F1] to remove all the changes displayed --OR--
PRESS [F2] to remove the highlighted change only.

Miscellaneous Menu 8-8


Quantum Scale System

6. When you have finished, PRESS [ESC] to return to the


Information Tracker Menu.
7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Miscellaneous Menu.
8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

(F8) Return to Operate Return to Operate Mode quickly sends you back to the Start
Mode a Run Screen.

To return to the Operate Mode from the Supervisor Menu:

1. PRESS [F8] to select Return to Operate Mode --OR--


QUICK STEPS 2. PRESS [ESC] on the Control Panel.
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F8] or [ESC]

8-9 Miscellaneous Menu


Quantum Scale System

Chapter Nine: Self Service

♦ Overview
♦ Using the Keyboard and Self Service Keypad
♦ Configuring Self Service
• Setting the Date and Time
• Setting the Default Label Type
• Setting Up Security/Operator IDs
• Setting Up Auto Lookup
• Setting Up Self Service
• Setting Up the Consumer Default Merchandising Screen
• Zeroing the Scale
♦ Using the Self Service Produce Keypad
• Setting Up Speedkeys
• Deleting Speedkeys

9-1 Self Service


Quantum Scale System

Look At This
Be aware that this section redefines tasks, which are
described in early chapters. Procedures in this section are
written specifically for the Self Service Quantum. They may
be slightly different then described in previous chapters.

Self Service Self Service enables your consumers to use the scale with
minimal store employee involvement. Once the scale is set
up the consumer can enter the CODE number, weigh the
item and print a label.

Self Service scales vary slightly from most Quantum scales.


They are sold individually or as part of a Hobart
WeighStation. The WeighStation includes:
• a Self Service Scale - equipped with an interactive
display and keyboard; platter rails (optional)
• a Scale Stand
• a PLU Code Plexiglas Display/Holder (11X17)
• a Brochure
• a Brochure Holder
• a Poster
• Produce Keypad (optional)

Self Service 9-2


Quantum Scale System

Using the Keyboard Because the self service keypad has limited keys (enabling
and Self Service quicker and easier use by the consumer), you must use an
XT keyboard to access and work in Supervisor mode.
Keypad
The scale is equipped with a serial port that enables you to
use a keyboard for setting up and editing the system. The
Keyboard plug-in is located on the left side of the unit.

The keyboard should be plugged in when the scale displays


the Start a Run Screen. To access the Start a Run Screen,
press the Reset button.

From this point all Supervisor functions are accessible using


the XT keyboard. Keys [F1] - [F8] are valid on the keyboard,
however, you can not see a key designation. The top box on
the Screen is [F1] going down to [F8].

The [F10] key accesses the Supervisor Menu, [F11] accesses


the Operate Macros Screen and [F12] accesses Help.

Configuring Self Set up Self Service to allow consumers to use the scale
Service without employee involvement. The Hobart recommended
configuration for Self Service includes the following:
♦ Setting the Date and Time
♦ Setting the Default Label Types
♦ Setting Up Security/Operator IDs
♦ Setting Up Auto Look-up (4 and 5 digit)
♦ Setting Up Self Service
♦ Setting Up the Consumer Default Merchandising Screen
♦ Zeroing the Scale

☛ Note
Any random weight or by count product can be accessed.

9-3 Self Service


Quantum Scale System

Setting the Date and Time From this screen, you can change the date and time; as well
as select the format that the date will print on the label.

To set the Date/Time:


QUICK STEPS
1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] to access the
From the Supervisor Menu: Supervisor Menu.
1. PRESS [F10] 2. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
2. PRESS [F5] Setup Menu.
3. PRESS [F4] 3. PRESS [F4] to select Scale Operation. You should now be
4. PRESS [F2] on the Scale Operation Menu.
5. PRESS [F1] & TYPE new 4. PRESS [F2] to select Date/Time.
Date
6. PRESS [F2] & TYPE new
Time
7. PRESS [ESC]
8. PRESS [ESC]

5. To Change the Date, PRESS [F1]. TYPE the new date.


The date must be entered in the order of the selected
date format.
6. To Change the Time, PRESS [F2]. TYPE the new time. If
needed, PRESS [F3] to change AM/PM.

☛ Note
If applicable, PRESS [F5-F8] to select the date format you
prefer for printing.

Self Service 9-4


Quantum Scale System

7. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return you to the


Scale Operation Menu.
8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

Setting the Default Label Enter the appropriate label type in the primary label type
Type field. You should also, set the default secondary label type
to zero (0), so that the scale only prints one label.

To set the default secondary label type:


QUICK STEPS
1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] to access the
From the Supervisor Menu: Supervisor Menu.
1. PRESS [F10] 2. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
2. PRESS [F5] Setup Menu.
3. PRESS [F3]
4. PRESS [F3]
5. ENTER primary label type
6. ENTER 0
7. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F3] to select Labels Menu.


4. PRESS [F3] to select Label Information.

9-5 Self Service


Quantum Scale System

5. TYPE the appropriate primary label type and PRESS


[ENTER].
6. TYPE zero (0) in the default secondary label type field
and PRESS [ENTER].

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Labels Menu.

Setting Up Security/Operator To ensure scale security and prevent product loss, you
IDs should use Operator IDs as security identification numbers.
When set up, if you attempt to access the Supervisor Screen
(by pressing the Reset button) from Self Service, the Enter
Secret ID prompt displays. You must enter your ID number
to continue. This prevents consumers from tampering with
the scale.

Look At This
Hobart recommends setting up at least one Operator ID.
This will prevent the consumer from accidentally taking the
scale out of self service mode, where they could ultimately
PRESS [ZERO] and modify the weigher.

To set up Security/Operator IDs:


1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] to access the
Supervisor Menu.

Self Service 9-6


Quantum Scale System

2. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale


Setup Menu.

3. PRESS [F1] to select Operator ID’s.

4. TYPE the Operator ID Number and PRESS [ENTER].

9-7 Self Service


Quantum Scale System

5. PRESS [F1] to accept the new operator.

6. TYPE the Access Level Value and PRESS [ENTER].


For a detailed explanation of Operator Access
Levels, refer to the Appendix. (Level 9 is
recommended for Self Service.)
7. PRESS [F5] to select Edit Operator Name.
8. TYPE the Operator Name and PRESS [ESC].
9. TOGGLE [F8] to NO to require Operator Logon.

Setting Up Auto Lookup (for Set Up Auto Look-up as an added convenience for the
Both 4 & 5 Digit Code consumer. Auto Look-Up allows you to set the number of
Numbers) digits required for the system to automatically look-up the
item’s code number. CODE Numbers can range from 2-6
digits. Standard UPC Item Codes are 4 digits, and according
to the Produce Marketing Association, organic produce item
codes are 5 digits.

Self Service 9-8


Quantum Scale System

QUICK STEPS To set up Auto Look-up:

From the Start a Run screen: 1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] on the XT
1. PRESS [F10] keyboard, to access the Supervisor Menu.
2. PRESS [F5] 2. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
3. PRESS [F4] Setup Menu.
4. PRESS [F3]
5. PRESS [F1]
6. TOGGLE [F3] to YES
7. PRESS [F4] to 4
8. TOGGLE [F5] to YES
9. Enter number 9.
10. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F4] to select Scale Operation Menu.


4. PRESS [F3] to select Set Up Normal Scale Operation. The
Set Up Normal Scale Operation Screen displays.
5. PRESS [F1]. You should now be on Page 2 of 3.

6. TOGGLE [F3] to select Yes.

7. TOGGLE [F4] to select 4 as the number of digits to be


entered before the scale automatically looks up the PLU
(code number).
8. TOGGLE [F5] to Yes. This specifies that auto lookup is
set for both 4 and 5 digit code numbers.

9-9 Self Service


Quantum Scale System

9. Enter the number in the Special Auto Lookup Digit


prompt. For example, organic produce begins with a 9.
You would enter 9 as the special auto lookup digit.
10. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Operation Menu.

✎ Tip
PRESS [F1] Next Page to move to Page 3 of 3. You will Set
up Self Service from this page.

Setting Up Self Service Self Service is a mode of operation, similar to Wait on a


Customer or PrePack. However, once Self Service is on, no
additional modes can be accessed until you exit Self Service.

☛ Note
Hobart recommends turning off all other modes when using
Self Service.

QUICK STEPS To set the scale for Self Service:

From the Start a Run Screen: 1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] on the XT
1. PRESS [F10] on XT keyboard.
keyboard 2. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
2. PRESS [F5] Setup Menu.
3. PRESS [F4]
4. PRESS [F3]
5. PRESS [F1]
6. PRESS [F1] to Don’t
Display
7. PRESS [F2] to Don’t
Display
8. PRESS [F3] to Don’t
Display
9. PRESS [F4] to Don’t
Display
10. PRESS [F5] to Don’t
Display
11. PRESS [F6] to Don’t
Display
12. PRESS [F7] to Don’t
Display
13. PRESS [F8] to Display
14. PRESS [ESC]

Self Service 9 - 10
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F4] to select Scale Operation Menu.


4. PRESS [F3] to select Set Up Normal Scale Operation. The
Set Up Normal Scale Operation Screen displays.
5. PRESS [F1] twice. You should now be on Page 3 of 3.

6. TOGGLE [F2] through [F7] to select Don’t Display.


7. TOGGLE [F8] to select Display.
8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup.

9 - 11 Self Service
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up the Consumer The Consumer Default Screen is the first screen that the
Default Merchandising customer uses. Set up the Consumer Default Screen to
Screen specify what graphic and text displays. The following
screens show the Merchandising default screen and the
edited Merchandising screen.

Merchandising Default Screen

Edited Screen With Graphic

Self Service 9 - 12
Quantum Scale System

To set up the Consumer Default Screen:


QUICK STEPS
1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] on the XT
From the Start a Run Screen: keyboard, to access the Supervisor Menu.
1. PRESS [10] 2. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
2. PRESS [F5] Setup.
3. PRESS [F8]
4. Enter the self service
graphic number
5. PRESS [F5]
6. TYPE new text
7. PRESS[ESC]
8. Toggle [F8] for audible
beep
9. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F8] to select Setup Self Service.

9 - 13 Self Service
Quantum Scale System

4. Enter the self service graphic number.


5. PRESS [F5] to select Edit Self Service Text.

6. TYPE the new text in the Self Service Text box. Use
[F1-F5] to edit the text.

7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Setup Self Service Menu


Screen.

Self Service 9 - 14
Quantum Scale System

8. Toggle [F8] to Yes or No to indicate if you want an


audible beep to alert you when there is a problem with
the scale (i.e. negative gross weight, label cassette
removed, out of labels.)

9. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu Screen.

Zeroing the Scale Zero the scale to set the scale at 0.00 lbs. If the scale has a
negative gross weight or is outside the zero maintenance
zone, the following message displays.

QUICK STEPS

From the Consumer Default


Screen:
1. PRESS Reset button
2. Enter Secret ID, if
applicable
3. Remove weight from
platter
4. PRESS [ZERO]

To zero the scale:

1. From the Customer Default screen, PRESS the Reset


button on the left side of the scale.
2. Enter a secret Operator ID, if required and PRESS
[PRINT]. The Start a Run screen displays.
3. Remove any weight from the platter.
4. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [ZERO].

9 - 15 Self Service
Quantum Scale System

Using the Self Service The Produce Keypad provides a simple and user friendly
Produce Keypad method for your customer to use the self service scale. Set up
speedkeys to associate with specific product numbers.

Setting Up Speedkeys To set up Speedkeys:

1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] on the XT


keyboard, to access the Supervisor Menu.
QUICK STEPS 2. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup.
From the Start a Run Screen:
1. PRESS [10]
2. PRESS [F5]
3. PRESS [F2]
4. PRESS [F8]
5. Press the Speedkey on
Keypad
6. Enter the Product Number,
then PRESS [ENTER]
7. PRESS [F2]
8. Type the description
9. PRESS [ESC]

Self Service 9 - 16
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F2] to select Flashkey/Speedkeys.

4. PRESS [F8] to select Speedkeys.

5. Press the desired speedkey on the Produce Keypad.

9 - 17 Self Service
Quantum Scale System

6. Enter the Product Number that you want to associate


with the speedkey, then PRESS [ENTER].

7. PRESS [F2] to Edit Description, if desired.

8. TYPE the description in the Description box. Use [F1-F5]


to edit the text.

Self Service 9 - 18
Quantum Scale System

9. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Edit Speedkeys Screen.


10. If you want to set up or change additional speedkeys:
a. PRESS [ENTER].
b. PRESS [F1] to select Change Another Speedkey.
c. Repeat steps 5-10.
11. PRESS [ESC] until you return to the Supervisor Menu
Screen.

Deleting Speedkeys To delete Speedkeys:

1. From the Start a Run Screen, PRESS [F10] on the XT


keyboard, to access the Supervisor Menu.
QUICK STEPS 2. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup.
From the Start a Run Screen:
1. PRESS [10]
2. PRESS [F5]
3. PRESS [F2]
4. PRESS [F8]
5. Press the Speedkey on
Keypad
6. PRESS [F8]
7. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F2] to select Flashkey/Speedkeys.

9 - 19 Self Service
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [F8] to select Speedkeys.

5. Press the desired speedkey on the produce keypad that


you want to delete.

6. PRESS [F8] to select Delete This Speedkey.


7. Delete additional speedkeys.
--OR--
PRESS [ESC] until you return to the Supervisor Menu
Screen.

Self Service 9 - 20
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Ten: Interfacing the Security Label


Applier with the Quantum

♦ Overview
♦ Programming a Security Label to be Issued for a Specific PLU
• Programming a New PLU
• Programming an Existing PLU
♦ Programming a Minimum Price Per Pound, Total Price, or Both

10 - 1 Security Labels
Quantum Scale System

Interfacing the SLA The SLA interfaces with the standard Quantum Scale. The
with the Quantum SLA is designed to issue an Electronic Article Surveillance
(EAS) label with a Quantum scale label.

Setup the Quantum to designate which packages should


receive a security label.

You can use any one or all of the following methods to


apply a security label to a package:
• PLU
• Price Per Pound (Unit Price)
• Total Package Price

✎ Tip
⇒ If you program the Quantum to apply a security label to
a package with a specific PLU, the PLU overrides the
minimum Unit Price and Total Price that you may have
set.
⇒ If you do not program the Quantum for a specific PLU, a
security label will apply to the package if the price is the
same as, or is higher than the set minimum unit or total
price.

Programming a You can program the Quantum to have a security label


Security Label to be issued any time a specific PLU is used. This can be
programmed when you enter a new product into the
Issued for a Specific system, or when the product is already in the system.
PLU

☛ Note
If you are using a scale communication network, check that
this method is supported with your network company.

Security Labels 10 - 2
Quantum Scale System

Programming a New PLU 1. At the Quantum Keypad, PRESS [SUPER MENU


ON/OFF]. If applicable, enter your Secret ID. The
Supervisor Menu displays.
QUICK STEPS 2. PRESS [F1] to select Change Product.

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F1]
2. Type product number
3. PRESS [ENTER]
4. PRESS [F1]
5. Select a Weigh Type
6. PRESS [F2]
7. Enter PLU Information
8. PRESS [ESC]

3. Enter the new product number of the package that you


want the security label to apply.
4. PRESS [ENTER].
5. PRESS [F1] to select Add a New Product.

10 - 3 Security Labels
Quantum Scale System

6. Select a Weigh Type. Refer to the Quantum Supervisor


Manual for a further explanation of each softkey.

7. PRESS [F2] to change Do Not Apply Security Label to


Apply Security Label. [F2] toggles between Do Not Apply
Security Label and Apply Security Label.

8. Enter the information for the new PLU.


9. PRESS [ESC] on the Quantum Keypad to return to the
Supervisor Menu.

Security Labels 10 - 4
Quantum Scale System

Programming an Existing PLU 1. At the Quantum Keypad, PRESS [SUPER MENU


ON/OFF]. If applicable, enter your Secret ID. The
Supervisor Menu displays.
QUICK STEPS 2. PRESS [F1] to select Change Product.

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F1]
2. Type product number
3. PRESS [ENTER]
4. PRESS [F2]
5. PRESS [ESC]

3. Enter the product number of the package that you want to


apply a security label.
4. PRESS [ENTER].
5. PRESS [F2] to change Do Not Apply Security Label to
Apply Security Label. [F2] toggles between Do Not Apply
Security Label and Apply Security Label.

6. PRESS [ESC] on the Quantum Keypad to return to the


Supervisor Menu.

10 - 5 Security Labels
Quantum Scale System

Programming a You can program the Quantum to issue a security label


Minimum Price per when a package is equal to or above a designated price per
pound (unit price), total package price, or both.
Pound, Total Price, or
Both 1. At the Quantum Keypad, PRESS [SUPER MENU
ON/OFF]. If applicable, enter your Secret ID. The
Supervisor Menu displays.
QUICK STEPS 2. PRESS [F5] to select Scale Setup Menu.

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F3]
3. PRESS [F6]
4. Enter the Minimum Unit
Price Per Pound
5. PRESS [ENTER] or
[DOWN ARROW (▼)]
6. Enter the Minimum Total
Price of the Package
7. PRESS [ESC]

3. PRESS [F3] to select Labels Menu.

Security Labels 10 - 6
Quantum Scale System

4. PRESS [F7] to select Security Labels.

5. From the Security Labels Screen, enter the minimum Unit


Price per Pound. A security label will be issued to any
package with a unit price the same as, or higher than the
amount you enter. If a package has a lower price, the
security label will not be issued.

☛ Note
If you want a security label to be issued by Unit Price only,
set Total Price to 0.00. Skip steps 6 and 7.

6. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to the


minimum Total Price field.
7. Enter the minimum Total Price of the package. A security
label will be issued to any package with a total price the
same as, or higher than the amount you enter. If a
package has a lower total price, the security label will not
be issued.
8. PRESS [ESC] on the Quantum Keypad to return to the
Labels Menu.

10 - 7 Security Labels
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Eleven: Working with Merchandising


Programs
♦ Overview
♦ Setting Up your Scale for Merchandising Programs
♦ Using Advertised Price
• Advertised Sale Pricing
• Value Packing
• Retail Comparison
• Activating the Advertised Price
• Reactivating the Regular Price
♦ Using Frequent Shopper
• Frequent Shopper Configuration Questions
• Configuring Frequent Shopper
• Activating Frequent Shopper
• Reactivating the Regular Price
♦ Using Bonus Points
• Setting Up Bonus Points
♦ Using Portion Pricing
• Activating Portion Pricing
• Setting Up Portion Pricing
♦ Using Percent Added
• Activating the Percent Added
• Reactivating the Regular Price

11 - 1 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

Working with Merchandising programs are available as optional features.


Merchandising You must have a custom label to use these features.
Programs These include:
• Advertised Price - creates interest and awareness in sale
items.
• Frequent Shopper - rewards customer loyalty.
• Bonus Points – used for store promotions.
• Portion Pricing – gives customer an average cost per
portion.
• Percent Added - adds a percentage to the total price.

☛ Note
Contact your Hobart Representative to help set up these
programs.

Setting Up Your Scale New firmware may need to be installed to access


for Merchandising Merchandising Programs. Contact your Hobart
Representative to install the appropriate firmware. During
Programs the installation, the representative will unplug and
reconnect the battery in order to delete the scale memory.

Look At This
You must Backup the database before Hobart Service
updates your scale software. After the scale is updated you
must Restore the Database. Refer to the Backup/Restore
Chapter in this manual for detailed instructions.

Once your database is re-installed, add a custom label type


to enable merchandising fields. To add a custom label, refer
to the Backup Changes to Diskette section in the Backup/Restore
chapter.

☛ Note
Hobart offers a wide variety of custom label options. Create
your own according to your merchandising needs.

Merchandising Programs 11 - 2
Quantum Scale System

Using Advertised Use an Advertised Price as a merchandising tool to create


Price interest in sale items and increase product sales. Increase
customer loyalty by eliminating ‘consumer math’ often
associated with sale pricing, value packaging and
competitive retail comparisons; the scale simply does it all.

There are three types of Advertised Price that can be used


with many pricing incentives:
• Advertised Sale Pricing
• Value Packing
• Retail Comparison

This feature is controlled by the scale configuration (set up


for you by your Hobart representative) and the custom label
type you use. Refer to the following sections to set up the
special pricing feature in your scale.
• Activate the Advertised Price
• Deactivate the Advertised Price

☛ Note
Advertised Price is an optional feature. Contact your local
Hobart Representative for more information.

11 - 3 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

Advertised Sale Pricing This can be used for:


• Temporary Price Reduction
• Temporary Low Price
• Everyday Low Price

Here is an example of a label using Advertised Sale Pricing.

Value Packing This can be used for:


• Big Pack
• Value Pack
• Assorted Family Pack

Here is an example of a label using Value Packing.

Merchandising Programs 11 - 4
Quantum Scale System

Retail Comparison This can be used for:


• Savings compared to Regular Price
• Our Everyday Price compared to “Competitor X”

Here is an example of a label using Retail Comparison.

11 - 5 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

Activating the Advertised Activate the advertised price, for a specific PLU, by
Price replacing the existing label type with the custom label type.
The custom label type will enable access to the unit price
(sale) and regular price fields.
QUICK STEP
To activate the advertised price:
From the Supervisor Menu: 1. From the Supervisor Menu, TYPE 10 in the Function Code
1. TYPE 10 and PRESS prompt and PRESS [ENTER].
[ENTER]
2. TYPE the PLU and PRESS
[ENTER]
3. PRESS [F8]
4. Enter the custom label type
5. PRESS [F8]
6. Verify that the Regular
Price and Unit Price
display
7. Enter the Sale Price in the
Unit Price field
8. PRESS [ESC]

2. From the Change Product Screen, TYPE the PLU number


in the Product Number field and PRESS [ENTER].

3. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.

Merchandising Programs 11 - 6
Quantum Scale System

4. Enter the custom label type in the Primary or Secondary


label type field.

5. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page or PRESS [PREV] until


you return to Page 1.
6. Verify that the Regular Price and Unit Price fields are
activated.

7. Enter the sale price in the Unit Price field and the
original price in the Regular Price field. Remember, the
Unit Price cannot be greater than the Regular Price.
8. Modify additional PLUs --OR-- PRESS [ESC] to return to
the Start a Run Screen.

11 - 7 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

Reactivating the Regular Reactivate the regular unit price by replacing the special
Price label type with the regular label type and changing the unit
price back to the regular price.

QUICK STEPS To reactivate the regular price:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, TYPE [10] in the Function
From the Supervisor Menu: Code prompt and PRESS [ENTER].
1. TYPE [10] and PRESS
[ENTER]
2. TYPE the PLU and PRESS
[ENTER]
3. PRESS [F8]
4. Enter a label type
5. PRESS [ESC]

2. TYPE the PLU number in the Product Number field and


PRESS [ENTER].

3. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.

Merchandising Programs 11 - 8
Quantum Scale System

4. Enter a label type in the label type field.

Look At This
Be aware that when you change the label type the
information in the unit price field defaults to the advertised
price amount. For example, if the regular price was $2.39
and the unit price (sale) was $1.99, when you return to the
default label type, the unit price remains $1.99.

5. Modify additional PLUs --OR-- PRESS [ESC] to return to


the Start a Run Screen.

11 - 9 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

Using Frequent Frequent Shopper, or Customer Loyalty programs are


Shopper designed to focus on sales from existing customers. These
programs vary, but each is designed to build upon
relationships with existing customers.

For Hobart scales, the Frequent Shopper value is stored as the


Discount Price, Cents Off, or Percent Off in the PLU record.
Frequent shopper values are printed on the label, in different
formats:
• U-Pay which is the amount the customer pays.
• U-Save which is the amount the customer saves.
• Discounted Unit Price/lb. which is the discounted price per
pound.

Which format you use is controlled by the scale configuration


(set up for you by your Hobart Representative) and the
custom label type you use.

☛ Note
Frequent Shopper is an optional feature. Contact your local
Hobart Representative for more information.

✎ Tip - Loss Prevention


The Discount Price field does not display in Operate mode.
However, the operator can temporarily toggle between
regular and Frequent Shopper label types. This feature was
designed so the operator cannot change the price.

U-SAVE = THE FREQUENT SHOPPER SAVINGS ON THIS PACKAGE

U-PAY = THE FREQUENT SHOPPER TOTAL PRICE

DISCOUNT UNIT PRICE / LB = THE FREQUENT SHOPPER PRICE PER POUND

Merchandising Programs 11 - 10
Quantum Scale System

Frequent Shopper Answer these questions to help configure your scale with
Configuration Questions the necessary information. Your answers to these questions
are extremely important and should be discussed with your
Hobart Representative.

◊ Are you currently using a Frequent Shopper, Club Card


or similar program?

◊ What POS system is the Frequent Shopper Software


running on?
• IBM 4680, 4690, 4694
• IBM - EM2
• IBM - Cents Off
• RII (Retail Innovations Inc.) – Cents Off
• NCR 2127, 7000
• ICL - SASI

◊ What Frequent Shopper formula(s) does your POS


Software support?

◊ Which field(s) do you want to print on your label?


• U-Pay
• U-Save
• Discount Price/Lb.
Refer to examples in Adding Custom Label Types.

☛ Note
All formulas for the calculation process are determined from
your answers to the configuration questions. At the scale,
you enter the discount price, the percent off or the cents off,
depending on your Frequent Shopper method selected. For
Supervisor procedures, refer to Setting Up Your Scale for
Merchandising Programs.

11 - 11 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

Configuring Frequent Contact your Hobart Representative to configure the scale


Shopper for Frequent Shopper. The configuration is based on your
answers to the Configuration Questions.

Choose one of the following Frequent Shopper Rounding


Methods to be set up by a Hobart Service Representative:

Conventional When the number is greater than or


Rounding equal to 5 you round up, when the
number is less than 5 you round down.

Round Down Regardless of the number, you always


(Truncate) round down (i.e. 8.659 rounds to 8.65).

Round Up Any number greater than zero (0), you


always round up (i.e. 8.659 rounds to
8.66; 8.650 rounds to 8.65).

Choose one of the following Frequent Shopper Discount


Methods to be set up by a Hobart Service Representative:

Cents Off The monetary amount to be subtracted


from the unit price.

Discount Price The Frequent Shopper price per


(/lb.) pound, which is lower than the unit
price per pound.

Percent Off The percentage of the total price which


is subtracted from the total price.
You must enter percentages in
hundredths. For example, if you want
a discount of 5%, you must enter 500.

Merchandising Programs 11 - 12
Quantum Scale System

Activating Frequent Shopper Activate the Frequent Shopper feature, for a specific PLU,
by replacing the existing label type with the Frequent
Shopper label type.

Hobart offers a wide variety of custom label options. Refer


to the following examples or create your own according to
your merchandising needs.

Regular Format Frequent Shopper Format

To activate Frequent Shopper:


QUICK STEP 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select change
product --OR-- TYPE 10 in the Function Code prompt
From the Supervisor Menu: and PRESS [ENTER].
1. PRESS [F1]
2. PRESS [F5]
3. PRESS [F7]
4. TYPE the PLU and PRESS
[ENTER]
5. PRESS [F8]
6. Enter Frequent Shopper
Custom Label Type
7. PRESS [PREV]
8. Enter the Frequent Shopper
price in discount field
9. PRESS [ESCAPE]

2. PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field.


3. PRESS [F7] to select All Fields.

11 - 13 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

4. From the Change Product Screen, TYPE the PLU number


in the Product Number field and PRESS [ENTER].

5. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.


6. Enter the Frequent Shopper Custom Label Type in the
Primary Label Type field.

7. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page or PRESS [PREV] until


you return to Page 1.

Merchandising Programs 11 - 14
Quantum Scale System

8. Enter the Frequent Shopper Price in the discount value


field.

☛ Note
One of the following discount methods is set up by Hobart
Service:
• Discount Price
• Cents Off
• Percent Off - You must enter percentages in hundredths.
For example, if you want a discount of 5%, you must
enter 500.

9. Modify additional PLUs or PRESS [ESC] to return to the


Start a Run Screen.

Reactivating the Regular Reactivate the regular price, for a specific PLU, by replacing
Price the Frequent Shopper label type with the regular label type.
This does not enable access to the discount value fields.

To deactivate Frequent Shopper:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Change
Product.
2. PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field.
3. PRESS [F7] to select All Fields.
4. TYPE the PLU number in the Product Number field and
PRESS [ENTER].
5. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.
6. Enter a label type in the Primary Label Type field.
7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Start a Run Screen.

Look At This
It is extremely important that both the POS system and the
scale use the same rounding method. If one is using
conventional rounding and the other is rounding up, the
discount prices will not always match. Check with your
Hobart Representative for a detailed explanation.

11 - 15 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

Using Bonus Points Bonus Points are used for store promotions. Customers earn
points when they purchase certain products and can use
those points toward merchandise, future discounts, or any
other promotions.

You assign the points to the products. The type of PLU


determines how points are calculated.

• Random Weight and Fixed Weight PLUs – points are


assigned based on the scale configuration and the price
modifier.
Example:
If the scale is set up as price per 100 grams, the points
will be assigned per 100 grams.

• Random Weight - By Count PLUs – points are assigned


based on the by count value.
(Example):
If 4 points are assigned to a PLU with a by count
value of 2, the customer receives 4 points if they
purchase 2 of that product. If the customer purchases
4 products with that PLU, the customer is awarded 8
points.

Here is an example of a label using Bonus Points:

2 0 1 2 3 4 0 0 1 9 9 7

Net Wt/Ct Unit Price Total Price

0.61 lb $8.88/lb $5.42


SAVE MORE
Card Holder
U-SAVE $0.31
U-PAY $5.11
BONUS POINTS 92
Packed On Best Before

Jul 20, 99 U.S.D.A. Aug 12, 99

DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
STORE ADDRESS

☛ Note
You must have a custom label to activate the Bonus Points
feature. Contact your local Hobart Representative for more
information.

Merchandising Programs 11 - 16
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up Bonus Points To setup Bonus Points make sure you have the custom label
selected.

QUICK STEP 1. From the Supervisor Menu, Enter 10 in the Function


Code, then Press [ENTER].
From the Supervisor Menu: 2. Enter the PLU and PRESS [ENTER].
1. TYPE 10 and PRESS 3. Enter the PLU information in the available fields.
[ENTER] 4. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.
2. TYPE the PLU and PRESS 5. Enter the custom label type in the Primary Printer Label
[ENTER] Type field, then PRESS [ENTER] 2 times.
3. Enter PLU information
4. PRESS [F8]
5. Enter the custom label type
and PRESS [ENTER] 2 times
6. Enter the number of points
7. PRESS [ESC]

6. Enter the number of bonus points you want awarded for


the PLU in the Points field.
7. Modify addition PLUs –OR– PRESS [ESC] to return to
the Supervisor Menu.

Using Portion Pricing Portion pricing gives customers an average cost per portion.
To determine the portion price, the scale divides the total
price by the portion number. The user determines the
portion number; the portion number can be from 0-65535.

There are three available fields:


• Average Portion Price
• Average Portion Weight
• Portion

☛ Note
You must have a custom label to activate the Portion Pricing
feature. Contact your local Hobart Representative for more
information.

11 - 17 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

Here is an example of a label using Portion Pricing:

DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Net Wt/Ct Unit Price

0.27 lb $8.88/lb
REGULAR
TOTAL PRICE $2.40
Save on More Price
U-SAVE U-PAY
$0.14 $2.26
Portions 3

$0.80
AVERAGE PORTION COST

AVERAGE SAVE ON MORE PORTION COST

$0.75
Points Earned
41
Packed On Best Before

Jul 20, 99 U.S.D.A. Aug 12, 99

2 0 1 2 3 4 0 0 1 9 9 7

To activate Portion Pricing:


Activating Portion Pricing 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.

Merchandising Programs 11 - 18
Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F4] to select Scale Operation Menu.

3. PRESS [F1] to select Set What the Operator Can Modify.

4. PRESS [F1] to select Next Page.


5. PRESS [F7] to toggle Potions to Yes.

When the Portion Pricing feature is turned on (Yes selected),


the portion field displays on the second page of the Change
Product Screen.

11 - 19 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up Portion Pricing To use Portion Pricing make sure you have the custom label
selected.

QUICK STEP 1. From the Supervisor Menu, Enter 10 in the Function


Code, then Press [ENTER].
From the Supervisor Menu: 2. Enter the PLU and PRESS [ENTER].
1. TYPE 10 and PRESS 3. Enter the PLU information in the available fields.
[ENTER] 4. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.
2. TYPE the PLU and PRESS 5. Enter the custom label type in the Primary Printer Label
[ENTER] Type field, then PRESS [ENTER]. The Portions field
3. Enter PLU information appears.
4. PRESS [F8] 6. PRESS [ENTER] 2 times.
5. Enter the custom label type
and PRESS [ENTER]
6. PRESS [ENTER] 2 times
7. Enter the portion number
--OR-- PRESS [CLEAR]
8. PRESS [ESC]

7. Enter the portion number in the Portions field --OR--


PRESS [CLEAR] to set up forced portion. The forced
portion becomes –1.
8. Modify addition PLUs --OR-- PRESS [ESC] to return to
the Supervisor Menu.

Merchandising Programs 11 - 20
Quantum Scale System

Use Percent Added when you want to add a percentage to


Using Percent Added the total price. This is used when you perform additional
service, or when a private club wants to add a surcharge.

Here is an example of a label using Percent Added:

2 0 1 2 3 4 0 0 1 9 9 7

Net Wt/Ct Unit Price Total Price

0.27 lb $2.99/lb $0.81


PERCENT ADDED 0.05%
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Packed On Best Before

Jul 20, 99 U.S.D.A. Aug 12, 99

☛ Note
Percent Added is an optional feature. Contact your local
Hobart Representative for more information.

Activating the Percent Added Activate the percent added, for a specific PLU, by replacing
the existing label type with the custom label type. The
custom label type will enable access to the unit price and
QUICK STEP percent added fields.

From the Supervisor Menu: To activate the percent added:


1. TYPE 10 and PRESS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, TYPE 10 in the Function Code
[ENTER] prompt and PRESS [ENTER].
2. TYPE the PLU and PRESS
[ENTER]
3. PRESS [F8]
4. Enter the custom label type
5. PRESS [F8]
6. Verify that the Percent
Added field displays
7. Enter the percent you want
to add in the Percent
Added field
8. PRESS [ESC]

11 - 21 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

2. From the Change Product Screen, TYPE the PLU number


in the Product Number field and PRESS [ENTER].

3. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.


4. Enter the custom label type in the Primary or Secondary
label type field.

5. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page or PRESS [PREV] until


you return to Page 1.
6. Verify that the Percent Added field is activated.

Merchandising Programs 11 - 22
Quantum Scale System

7. Enter the percent you want to add in the Percent Added


field. You must enter percentages in hundredths. For
example, if you want to add 5%, you must enter 500.
8. Modify additional PLUs --OR-- PRESS [ESC] to return to
the Start a Run Screen.

Reactivating the Regular Reactivate the regular price, for a specific PLU, by replacing
Price the Percent Added label type with the regular label type.
This does not enable access to the percent added field.

To deactivate Percent Added:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F1] to select Change
Product.
2. PRESS [F5] to select Change Another Field.
3. PRESS [F7] to select All Fields.
4. TYPE the PLU number in the Product Number field and
PRESS [ENTER].
5. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.
6. Enter a label type in the Primary Label Type field.
7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Start a Run Screen.

11 - 23 Merchandising Programs
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Twelve: Configuring an EAN13 Barcode

♦ Overview
♦ Setting Up Your Scale For EAN13 Barcodes
1. Setting the EAN13 Default Prefix for PLUs
♦ Entering a New Product Using EAN13 Format
♦ Changing an Existing PLU to EAN13 Format
♦ Setting Up an EAN13 Barcode for Itemized Labels

12 - 1 EAN13 Barcode
Quantum Scale System

Configuring an EAN13 The EAN13 numbering system enables an extra character in


Barcode the barcode creating more flexibility in pricing (i.e. 999.99).
A total of 12 digits are available for in-store use. The set up
of these digits is entirely at the discretion of the retailer,
with the exception of the check digit which is printed in the
13th position on every EAN13 bar code. The EAN13 system
is intended to give retailers maximum flexibility to include
any non-standard codes, which may be required.

There are four EAN13 barcode formats:


• Random Weight
• Fixed Weight
• By Count
• Item Total

Each PLU record type (Random Weight, Fixed Weight, and


By Count) and itemized totals label are configurable to an
EAN13 barcode format.

This feature is controlled by the scale configuration (set up


for you by your Hobart Representative) and the custom
label type you use. The information entered into the scale
configuration is used to determine what fields display on
the Change Product Screen.

Refer to the following sections to setup EAN13 Barcodes:


• Setting Up Your Scale for EAN13 Barcodes
• Setting the EAN13 Default Prefix
• Entering a New Product Using EAN13 Format
• Changing an Existing PLU to EAN13 Format
• Setting Up EAN13 Barcodes for Itemized Labels

☛ Note
For more information on the configuration of EAN13
Barcodes and EAN13 barcode examples, Refer to the
Appendix: Understanding EAN13 Scale Configuration.

EAN13 Barcode 12 - 2
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up Your Scale New firmware may need to be installed to access EAN13
for EAN13 Barcodes Barcodes. Contact your Hobart Representative to install the
appropriate firmware. During the installation, the
representative will unplug and reconnect the battery which
will delete the scale memory.

Look At This
You must Backup the database before Hobart Service
updates your scale software. After the scale is updated you
must Restore the Database. Refer to the Backup/Restore
Chapter in this manual for detailed instructions.

Once your database is re-installed, add a custom label type


to enable merchandising fields. To add a custom label, refer
to the Backup Changes to Diskette section in the Backup/Restore
chapter.

☛ Note
Custom EAN13 labels must be ordered through Hobart
Product Support. Contact your Hobart Representative for
appropriate information.

Setting the EAN13 You can set a Random Weight, Fixed Weight, and By Count
Default Prefix for PLUs default prefix for all new products entered. You must have
an EAN13 barcode label type selected for a product to access
an EAN13 barcode.

QUICK STEPS To set up an EAN13 Barcode:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
From the Supervisor Menu: Setup Menu –OR—ENTER Function Code [48].
1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F3]
3. PRESS [F3]
4. Enter the custom label
5. PRESS [F1]
6. Type the EAN13 default
prefix
7. PRESS [ESC]
8. PRESS [ESC]

12 - 3 EAN13 Barcode
Quantum Scale System

2. PRESS [F3] to select Labels Menu.

3. PRESS [F3] to select Label Information. The Label


Information Screen displays.

4. Enter the EAN13 custom label type in Primary label type


field. The custom label will print for all new PLUs
created.
5. PRESS [F1] to select Next Page.

EAN13 Barcode 12 - 4
Quantum Scale System

6. Type the EAN13 default prefix for Random Weight,


Fixed Weight, and By Count to be used when new PLUs
are created. If applicable, PRESS [(▼) DOWN ARROW]
to move to the next field.

7. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the Labels


Menu.
8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

☛ Note
The number of X’s set up in your scale configuration
determines the number of digits that can be entered into the
default prefix. Refer to the Appendix: Understanding EAN13
Scale Configuration for more information on scale
configuration.

Entering a New New PLUs default to the EAN13 barcode when the default
Product Using EAN13 label type on the Label Information Screen is set to the
custom label that contains the EAN13 barcode. When the
Format custom label type is selected, different prompts display on
your Change Product Screen depending on your EAN13 and
scale configurations.

12 - 5 EAN13 Barcode
Quantum Scale System

To set up a new product using EAN13 format:


QUICK STEP 1. From the Supervisor Menu, TYPE 10 in the Function Code
prompt and PRESS [ENTER].
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. TYPE 10 and PRESS
[ENTER]
2. TYPE the PLU and PRESS
[ENTER]
3. PRESS [F1]
4. Select a Weigh Type
5. Enter information into
Change Product fields
6. PRESS [ESC]

2. From the Change Product Screen, TYPE a new PLU


number in the Product Number field and PRESS
[ENTER].
3. PRESS [F1] to add a new product.
4. Select a Weigh Type.
5. Enter information into the fields on the Change Product
Screen. The fields that display on Page 1 depend on your
EAN13 and scale configurations.

EAN13 Barcode 12 - 6
Quantum Scale System

6. Refer to the following table to enter information into the


Change Product fields. PRESS [(▼) DOWN ARROW] to
move through the fields.

In this Field Enter


Product Number The product number and PRESS
(PLU) [ENTER]. The Description prompt
displays.
Description The name or description of the product.
To enter the description:
1. PRESS [F5] to select change text
field. The Text Editor displays.
2. Enter the description.
Remember that your label selection
determines the text field size and your
font size determines the number of
available characters.
EAN Prefix Default prefix set on Label Information
Screen. The default can be changed.
EAN # The EAN13 code assigned to this PLU.
Vendor # The Vendor number and PRESS [ENTER].
Product # The Product number and PRESS
[ENTER].
By Count The by count value. This can be any
number from 0 to 99. If you PRESS
[CLEAR] the field changes to Forced By
Count and the operator is forced to enter
a by count value.
• Random Weight PLUs with a by
count = 0 are priced as they are
weighed.
• Random Weight PLUs with a by
count > 1 are priced by the count (i.e.,
3 for $1.00).
• Fixed Weight PLUs must have a by
count > 1.
NOTE:
If you enter a by count value > 1 for
random weight items, the Tare field
changes to Exception Price.
Unit Price The unit price of the product. The price
can be up to 5 digits depending on the
configuration.
If you PRESS [CLEAR] the field changes
to Forced Price and the operator is forced
to enter a price value.

12 - 7 EAN13 Barcode
Quantum Scale System

In this Field Enter


Tare The tare value. This is the weight of the
packaging for which the customer does
not pay (i.e., plastic wrap or a produce
tray). If using kilograms, the tare value
must be a multiple of .005. If using
pounds, the tare value must be a multiple
of .01.
If you PRESS [CLEAR] the field changes
to Forced Tare and the operator is forced
to enter a tare value.
NOTE:
The Tare prompt may not display,
depending on your configuration. By
Count and Fixed Weight PLUs do not
have a Tare value.
Platter Tare The tare value of the container. The value
is calculated by placing the container on
the scale when your cursor is in the tare
field.
Net Weight The net content or net weight of a fixed
weight item. Must be entered as Grams or
Ounces.
Exception Price The price that is used when a by count
product is sold, but not by the by count
quantity. For example, if apples are 3 for
$1, the price (or exception price) for 1
apple might be $.35.
Note: This prompt may not display
depending on your scale configuration.
Shelf Life The number of days that a product can
remain on the shelf. This number is used
to calculate the sell by date.
Product Life The number of days for which the
product is good (consumable). This
number is used to calculate the Best
Before and Use By dates.
Class The number of the class to which the
product reports. A class is a group of
similar products categorized together for
reporting.

7. Modify additional PLUs --OR-- PRESS [ESC] to return to


the Start a Run Screen.

EAN13 Barcode 12 - 8
Quantum Scale System

Changing an Existing Activate the EAN13 format for a specific PLU by replacing
PLU to EAN13 Format the existing label type with the custom label type. When you
select the custom label type for a specific PLU, different
fields display on the Change Product Screen depending on
your EAN13 and scale configurations.

To change to EAN13 format:


QUICK STEP 1. From the Supervisor Menu, TYPE [10] in the Function
Code prompt and PRESS [ENTER].
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. TYPE 10 and PRESS
[ENTER]
2. TYPE the PLU and PRESS
[ENTER]
3. PRESS [F8]
4. Enter the custom label type
5. PRESS [F8] until you return
to page 1
6. Enter information into
Change Product fields
7. PRESS [ESC]

2. From the Change Product Screen, TYPE the PLU number


in the Product Number field and PRESS [ENTER].

12 - 9 EAN13 Barcode
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page.


4. Enter the custom label type in the Primary Label Type
field.

5. PRESS [F8] to select Next Page or PRESS [PREV] until


you return to Page 1.
6. Enter information into the Change Product Screen. The
fields that display on Page 1 depend on your EAN13 and
scale configurations. Refer to the previous table in this
chapter to enter information in the Change Product
fields.

7. Modify additional PLUs --OR-- PRESS [ESC] to return to


the Start a Run Screen.

EAN13 Barcode 12 - 10
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up EAN13 You can print an EAN13 Barcode on an Item Total Label or
Barcodes for Itemized on an Itemized Receipt when you use the Accumulated
Items Mode. Refer to Chapter 9: Scale Setup for more
Labels information on Itemized Labels.

To print an EAN13 Barcode on an Itemized Label:


QUICK STEPS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu --OR-- ENTER Function Code [59].
From the Supervisor Menu:
1. PRESS [F5]
2. PRESS [F3]
3. PRESS [F6]
4. Toggle [F3-F5] to Yes or
No, if appropriate
5. TYPE the EAN13 number,
the PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
6. Type the EAN13 default
prefix
7. PRESS [ESC]
8. PRESS [ESC]

2. PRESS [F3] to select Labels Menu.

12 - 11 EAN13 Barcode
Quantum Scale System

3. PRESS [F6] to select Itemized Labels.

4. From the Itemized Label Screen, toggle [F3 - F5] to print


either an Itemized Receipt or Totals Label.

5. Type the EAN13 number to print on the label, then


PRESS [ENTER] or [▼].
6. Type the EAN13 default prefix.

☛ Note
The number of X’s set up in your scale configuration
determines the number of digits that can be entered into the
default prefix. Refer to the Appendix: Understanding EAN13
Scale Configuration for more information on scale
configuration.

7. PRESS [ESC] to save the changes and return to the Labels


Menu.
8. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Scale Setup Menu.

EAN13 Barcode 12 - 12
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Thirteen: Understanding Hardwire TCP/IP


Scale Communications
♦ Understanding the IP Address
• Setting Up IP Addresses on an Isolated Network
• Setting Up IP Addresses on an Existing Network
_ Intranet Scale IP Address Assignment Form
♦ Setting Up TCP/IP Networks
• Sample Ethernet Wiring Illustration
• Setting Up ScaleMaster Configuration
_ Scale IP Address
_ Server Scale IP Address
_ Subnet Mask
_ Well Known Port Number
_ Department IP Addresses
_ Saving Changes
• Example: ScaleMaster
• Setting Up ScaleMaster Located on a Different Network (Gateway IP Address)
• Setting Up IntraNet Configuration
_ Scale IP Address
_ Server Scale IP Address
_ Subnet Mask
_ Well Known Port Number
_ Department IP Addresses
_ Saving Changes
• Example: IntraNet
• Setting Up ScaleMaster/IntraNet Configuration
• Example: ScaleMaster/IntraNet
♦ Testing the Scales TCP/IP Connection
• PING Test
• L.E.D.

13 - 1 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

Understanding Transmission Communications Protocol/Internet Protocol


Hardwire TCP/IP Scale (TCP/IP) is a communication protocol which maybe used to
make your scale system communicate faster and more
Communications reliably. It serves as a traffic manager for sending and
receiving packets of information between scales and
devices. Scales can be automatically updated with
information which is sent directly from a server scale or
ScaleMaster.

☛ Note
TCP/IP is an optional feature. For more information contact
your local Hobart Representative.
You must have an Ethernet card in order for TCP/IP to
work. Refer to the Understanding Ethernet Networks in the
Appendix for more information.

Understanding the IP The IP Address is a naming convention used to identify a


Address scale or device located on a network. Each IP Address must
be unique to each scale (other scales or devices on a network
cannot have the same IP Address).

Contact the Network Administrator for the correct IP


Address information.

Scale Communications 13 - 2
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up IP Addresses on The following shows an example of an IP Address and the


an Isolated Network components of an IP addressing scheme for scales connected
to a Hobart only network.

This is an IP Address example in an isolated network:

Base_Number . Store_Number . Department_Number . Scale_Number


127 208 003 001
IP Address 127 . 208 . 003 . 001

IP Address Range Description


Base_Number (1-254) This is a number between 1 and
254.
Store_Number (1-254) This is a number assigned by the
customer that represents each
store in a chain.
Department_Number (1-254) This number identifies a
department in a store.
Server This represents the Scale ID
Scale_Number (1-254) number.
Intranet Client This represents the client Scale ID
Scale_Number (2-19) number. You can have 18 client
scales for a hardwired setup and
19 client scales for a wireless
setup.

Setting Up IP Addresses on When you have an existing network you must contact your
an Existing Network Network Administrator for the correct IP Addresses. Use
the IntraNet Scale IP Address Assignment Form on the next
page to fill in the IP Addresses assigned by your Network
Administrator.

13 - 3 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

IntraNet Scale IP Address Assignment Form


Scale Network Addressing Example Base_NumberStore_Number Dept._Number Scale_Number

I. Server Scale IP Address: Server Scale: . . .


Server scale located in the Department
(A maximum of 18 Client Scales can be added to a Department for
A) Bakery: XXX.XXX.001.001 Hardwired TCP/IP and 19 Client Scales can be added for Wireless TCP/IP)

B) Cheese: XXX.XXX.002.001 1) Scale: . . .

C) Deli: XXX.XXX.003.001 2) Scale: . . .


D) Meat: XXX.XXX.004.001
3) Scale: . . .
E) Service Meat: XXX.XXX.005.001
4) Scale: . . .
F) Sea Food: XXX.XXX.006.001
G) Produce: XXX.XXX.007.001 5) Scale: . . .

H) Specialty: XXX.XXX.008.001 6) Scale: . . .

ScaleMaster: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 7) Scale: . . .


(refer to your ScaleMaster documentation)
8) Scale: . . .
II. Scale Subnet Mask (same for all scales):
9) Scale: . . .
Scale Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000
10) Scale: . . .

III.Well Known Port Number (same for all scales): 11) Scale: . . .
Well known port number: 6000
12) Scale: . . .

IV.Client Scale IP Addresses: 13) Scale: . . .


(Intranet Configuration)
Note: Each Department will require a 14) Scale: . . .
separate Server with the Department
Client Scale IP information added. 15) Scale: . . .
A) Bakery: XXX.XXX.001.001
Client Scales XXX.XXX.001.002 - 019 16) Scale: . . .

B) Cheese: XXX.XXX.002.001 17) Scale: . . .


Client Scales XXX.XXX.002.002 - 019
18) Scale: . . .
C) Deli: XXX.XXX.003.001
Client Scales XXX.XXX.003.002 - 019
(wireless)
D) Meat: XXX.XXX.004.001 19) Scale: . . .
Client Scales XXX.XXX.004.002 - 019
ScaleMaster: . . .
E) Service Meat: XXX.XXX.005.001
Client Scales XXX.XXX.005.002 - 019
F) Sea Food: XXX.XXX.006.001
Client Scales XXX.XXX.006.002 - 019
G) Produce: XXX.XXX.007.001
Client Scales XXX.XXX.007.002 - 019
H) Specialty: XXX.XXX.008.001
Client Scales XXX.XXX.008.002 – 019

Scale Communications 13 - 4
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up TCP/IP Refer to the Appendix for a detailed explanation of TCP/IP


Networks Network Configurations and Ethernet Networks.

To set up TCP/IP networks:


QUICK STEPS 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
From the Supervisor Menu: 2. PRESS [F6] to select Communications Menu.
1. PRESS [F5]
3. PRESS [F2] to select Network.
2. PRESS [F6]
4. From the TCP/IP Network Screen, PRESS [F2] until
3. PRESS [F2]
IntraNet or ScaleMaster is the selected network type.
4. PRESS [F2]

☛ Note
There are several options available. Each time [F2] is pressed
it cycles through the options. Select either ScaleMaster or
IntraNet based on configuration needs.

✎ Tip
When you enter information on the TCP/IP Network
Screen:
⇒ PRESS [ENTER] to move from one number field to the
next.
⇒ Use the Left and Right arrow keys to move within a
number field.
⇒ Use the Up and Down arrow keys to move to a number
field above or below the number field that is active.

13 - 5 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

Sample Ethernet Wiring You can setup your network for one of the types listed
Illustration below:

• Multi Scales connected to a Hub with ScaleMaster


• Multi Scales connected in Stand Alone Department
(configured with IntraNet single point configuration)
• Multi Scales connected to a Hub with ScaleMaster
(Departments configured with IntraNet single point
configuration)

Scalemaster Example:

Look At This
The following information gives you a further explanation
of each network type. The IP addresses given in the
examples may vary for your network.

Scale Communications 13 - 6
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up ScaleMaster Use ScaleMaster when you have one main network in a
Configuration store which all information is transferred to each scale. Refer
to the Appendix in this manual or the ScaleMaster TCP/IP
Supplement manual (F-33863) for more information.

QUICK STEPS To set up ScaleMaster:


1. From the TCP/IP Network Screen, PRESS [F2] until
From the TCP/IP Network ScaleMaster is the selected network type.
Screen:
1. PRESS [F2]
2. TYPE Scale IP Address
3. TYPE 0’s for Server Scale IP
Address
4. TYPE Subnet Mask value
5. PRESS [ESC]
6. PRESS Reset button

Scale IP Address 2. TYPE the appropriate Scale IP Address information.


PRESS [ENTER] to move through the number fields in
the scale IP address.

☛ Note
Each IP address must be unique to each scale.

13 - 7 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

Server Scale IP Address 3. The Server Scale IP Address should be set to all 0’s.

Subnet Mask 4. TYPE the Subnet Mask value. It is the same for all scales.
PRESS [ENTER] to move through the number fields in
the subnet mask.

Well Known Port Number The Well Known Port Number defaults to 6000 and should
not be changed.

Department IP Addresses Do not set up Department IP addresses when you are using
the ScaleMaster network.

5. After entering all scale information, PRESS [ESC]. The


Saving Changes following screen displays:

Scale Communications 13 - 8
Quantum Scale System

6. PRESS the RESET button (located on the left side of the


scale) for 3 seconds and release. This will reset the scale
with the updated communication settings. The scale will
automatically power back on.

EXAMPLE: ScaleMaster The following illustrates scales connected to the network via
a Hub with ScaleMaster configuration.
Multi Scales Connected to a
Hub with ScaleMaster Each scale must use a unique IP address.

From the TCP/IP Network Screen, ENTER the following:

TCP/IP Network Scale Menu

Type: ScaleMaster (same for each scale)


Scale IP Address (unique for each scale)
127 . 208 . 003 . 001
Server IP Address (same for each scale)
000 . 000 . 000 . 000
Subnet Mask (same for each scale)
255 . 255 . 255 . 000
Well known port number 6000 (same for each scale)

☛ Note
If your scales are not physically located on the same
network as the PC which is running ScaleMaster, you must
set up the Gateway IP Addresses for that network. Contact
your Network Administrator for specific Gateway details
for Network IP Routing. (Refer to Setting Up ScaleMaster
Located on a Different Network [Gateway IP Address].)

After entering all IP Address information:


1. PRESS [ESC] to save the new information. The display
screen alerts you to restart your scale.
2. PRESS the RESET button (located on the left side of the
scale) for 3 seconds and release. This resets the scale with
the updated communication settings and enables the
changes to take affect. The scale will automatically
power back on.

13 - 9 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

Setting up ScaleMaster If your scales are not physically located on the same
Located on a Different network as the PC which is running ScaleMaster, you must
Network (Gateway IP set up the Gateway IP Addresses for that network.
Address)

☛ Note
Contact your Network Administrator for specific Gateway
details for Network IP Routing.

To enter a Gateway IP Address:


1. From the TCP/IP Network Screen, PRESS [F7] to select
Network IP Routing Table Screen.

2. Enter the Gateway IP Address and the Network IP


Address as specified by the Network Administrator.

Gateway IP Address
XXX . XXX . XXX . XXX

Network IP Address
XXX . XXX . XXX . XXX

☛ Note
In order for all of the scales to communicate in the network
using gateways, all of the scales in the network must have
the same Subnet Mask.

Scale Communications 13 - 10
Quantum Scale System

Gateway and Network IP The following illustration is an example of a common


Examples network configuration. There are a variety of network
system configurations using Gateway IP Addresses and
Network IP Addresses. Contact your Network
Administrator for more complex networks.

Location Gateway IP Address Network IP Address


Store 1 10.003.128.008 000.000.000.000
Store 2 12.003.128.024 000.000.000.000
Headquarters 14.003.128.007 000.000.000.000

☛ Note
The Network IP Address Default is 000.000.000.000.
If you only want to communicate to one store in the
network, you must enter that stores Network IP Address.
Refer to the examples on the next page.

13 - 11 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

Refer to the following scenarios for examples of how to use


Gateway and Network IP Addresses. Use the illustration on
the previous page as a reference.

Scenario 1: If the Network Address has a default of 0’s, information is


sent through all Gateways to all stores in the network.

Example:
For a scale at Store 1 to communicate to ScaleMaster or any
other scale in the network:
Gateway IP Address = 010.003.128.008
Network IP Address = 000.000.000.000

Example:
For a scale at Store 2 to communicate to ScaleMaster or any
other scale in the network:
Gateway IP Address = 012.003.128.024
Network IP Address = 000.000.000.000

Scenario 2: If you only want to communicate to one store in the


network, you must enter that stores Network IP Address.

Example:
For a scale at Store 1 to communicate only to a scale at
Store 2 in the network:
Gateway IP Address = 010.003.128.008
Network IP Address = 013.003.128.009

Example:
For a scale at Store 2 to communicate only to a scale at
Store 1 in the network:
Gateway IP Address = 012.003.128.024
Network IP Address = 011.003.128.014

☛ Note
If a store is between two Gateways, you must enter the
Gateway and Network IP Address for both Gateways.

☛ Note
Gateways are configured by your Network Administrator.

Scale Communications 13 - 12
Quantum Scale System

Setting Up IntraNet Use IntraNet when you want one scale to act as the central
Configuration server scale in a department environment. All other scales in
the department communicating with the server scale are
known as client scales. Refer to the Appendix for further
explanation.

When your IntraNet network is setup the server scale does


the following:
• Collects totals for all scales in the department
• Compares data at reset of a client scale
• Reloads data to client scale if data is different from the
server scale at reset

☛ Note
When you reset a client scale, the data is compared and
updated to match the server scale database.

☛ Note
Changes should be made on the server scale if all client
scales do not have a complete department IP address list.
This is done to ensure information is sent to all scales in the
network. Refer to Department IP Addresses for further details.

QUICK STEPS To set up intranet:


1. From the TCP/IP Network Screen, PRESS [F2] until
From the TCP/IP Network IntraNet is the selected network type.
Screen:
1. PRESS [F2]
2. TYPE the Scale IP Address
3. TYPE the Server Scale IP
Address
4. TYPE the Subnet Mask
value.
5. PRESS [F8]
6. PRESS [F3]
7. TYPE Scale IP Addresses in
the department list
8. PRESS [ESC]
9. PRESS [ESC]
10. PRESS Reset button

13 - 13 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

2. TYPE the appropriate Scale IP Address information for


Scale IP Address each scale. PRESS [ENTER] to move through the number
fields in the scale IP address.

☛ Note
Each IP Address must be unique to each scale or device on
the network (refer to the Intranet Scale IP Address Assignment
Form).

Server Scale IP Address 3. TYPE the appropriate Server Scale IP Address. (Refer to
the IntraNet Scale IP Address Assignment Form.) PRESS
[ENTER] to move through the number fields in the
server scale IP address.

Scale Communications 13 - 14
Quantum Scale System

Look At This
All Client Scales in the IntraNet network will have the same
“Server Scale IP Address” as the Server Scale.
Only the Server Scale will have the same “Scale IP Address”
and “Server Scale IP Address”.

Subnet Mask 4. TYPE the Subnet Mask value. It is the same for all scales.
(Refer to the IntaNet Scale IP Address Assignment Form.)
PRESS [ENTER] to move through the number fields in
the subnet mask.

Well Known Port Number The Well Known Port Number defaults to 6000 and should
not be changed.

13 - 15 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

Department IP Addresses 5. PRESS [F8] to select Setup Department IP Addresses.


The Department IP Address List Menu is where you set
up and identify each scale in the department. The list is
used by each scale to determine which scales receive the
changes.

☛ Note
Any scale that you make the PLU changes on becomes a
“temporary” master and sends all the changes to the scales
in the department list.

Look At This
If there are no Scale IP Addresses in the department list on a
client scale, make changes on the server scale to ensure to
information is sent to all scales in the network.

6. PRESS [F3] to select New IP Address. A line number


displays with space to enter the client scale IP Address.

Scale Communications 13 - 16
Quantum Scale System

7. TYPE the IP Address for the client scales on the line


which displays. PRESS [ENTER] to move through the
number fields in the IP address. Up to eighteen (18)
client scales can be added to a department.
--OR--
PRESS [F5] to delete an IP Address from a department
list.

This is an example of a scale’s department list:

☛ Note
Do not include the IP Address of the scale you are working
on or the server scale IP Address.

Refer to the table below for an example of what each scale’s


department lists would include for a department that has 4
scales:

Scale Department List Server IP


Address
Server Scale 001 127.208.003.002
127.208.003.003 127.208.003.001
127.208.003.004
Client Scale 002 127.208.003.003 127.208.003.001
127.208.003.004
Client Scale 003 127.208.003.002 127.208.003.001
127.208.003.004
Client Scale 004 127.208.003.002 127.208.003.001
127.208.003.003

13 - 17 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

☛ Note
The Department IP Address List identifies the scales by
department. Additional departments require a separate
server setup for each department.

8. After entering the client scales IP Addresses, PRESS


[ESC] to return to the TCP/IP Network Screen.

Look At This
Ensure your server has an active database before you reset
any client scales.

Saving Changes 9. After entering all scale information, PRESS [ESC]. The
following screen displays:

10. PRESS the RESET button (located on the left side of the
scale) for 3 seconds and release. This will reset the scale
with the updated communication settings. The scale will
automatically power back on.

Look At This
Contact your local Hobart Service Technician to service a
scale. Before a scale is serviced, make sure the scale is
disconnected from the network to ensure an incorrect or
empty database does not get loaded onto the network.
Ensure your server has an active database before you reset
any client scales.

Scale Communications 13 - 18
Quantum Scale System

EXAMPLE: IntraNet The following configuration shows two (2) stand alone
scales connected to a hub using the Intranet option.
Multi Scales Connected in
Stand Alone Department From the TCP/IP Network Screen, ENTER the following:

TCP/IP Network Scale Menu


Server Scale Setup
Type: Intranet (same for client)
Scale IP Address (unique for each scale)
127 . 208 . 003 . 001
Server IP Address (same for client)
127 . 208 . 003 . 001
Subnet Mask (same for client)
255 . 255 . 255 . 000
Well known port number 6000 (same for client)

Server Scale’s Department IP From the Department IP Address List Screen, set up the Client
Address List Scale’s Department IP Address on the server. A maximum of
eighteen (18) client scales for a single department can be
added to a Server.

Department IP Address List

1) 127 . 208 . 003 . 002 (Client scale 002 IP Address)

Client Scale 002 Setup From the TCP/IP Network Screen, ENTER the Client Scale’s
IP Address. All other fields must be the same as the Server
information.

Scale IP Address
127 . 208 . 003 . 002

After entering all IP Address information:


1. PRESS [ESC] to save the new information. The display
screen alerts you to restart your scale.
2. PRESS the RESET button (located on the left side of the
scale) for three (3) seconds and release. This resets the
scale with the updated communication settings and
enables the changes to take affect. The scale will
automatically power back on.

13 - 19 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

Setting Up In a ScaleMaster/IntraNet configuration, ScaleMaster


ScaleMaster/IntraNet communicates to the server scale in each department, then
Configuration the server scale communicates to all the client scales in its
department. Refer to the Appendix for further explanation.

To set up ScaleMaster/IntraNet:
1. Configure ScaleMaster to communicate only to the
Server Scale. Refer to your ScaleMaster TCP/IP
Supplement manual.
2. Configure the Server Scale to communicate to the client
scales in the network. Follow the steps in Setting Up
IntraNet Configuration to setup your intranet network.

Look At This
Make sure ScaleMaster is not configured to communicate
with the client scales.

EXAMPLE: The following illustrates scales connected to the network via


ScaleMaster/IntraNet a hub and configured for IntraNet. Multi Scales are connected
to a Hub with ScaleMaster, departments are configured with
IntraNet single point configuration.

From the TCP/IP Network Screen, ENTER the following:

TCP/IP Network Scale Menu


Server Scale Setup
Type: IntraNet (same for client)
Scale IP Address (unique for each scale)
127 . 208 . 003 . 001
Server IP Address (same for client)
127 . 208 . 003 . 001
Subnet Mask (same for client)
255 . 255 . 255 . 000
Well known port number 6000 (same for client)

Scale Communications 13 - 20
Quantum Scale System

Server Scale Department IP From the Department IP Address List Screen, set up the Client
Address List scales Department IP Address information on the server. A
maximum of eighteen (18) client scales can be added to a
Server.

Department IP Address List

1) 127 . 208 . 003 . 002 (Client Scale 002)


2) 127 . 208 . 003 . 003 (Client Scale 003)
-Through -
18) 127 . 208 . 003 . 018 (Client Scale 018)

Client Scales 002 thru 018 From the TCP/IP Network Screen, Enter each Scales IP
Setup Address. All other fields must be the same as the Server
information.

Scale IP Address
127 . 208 . 003 . 002 (Client Scale 002)
127 . 208 . 003 . 003 (Client Scale 003)
-Through -
127 . 208 . 003 . 018 (Client Scale 018)

After entering all IP Address information:


1. PRESS [ESC] to save the new information. The display
screen alerts you to restart your scale.
2. PRESS the RESET button (located on the left side of the
scale) for three (3) seconds and release. This resets the
scale with the updated communication settings and
enables the changes to take affect. The scale will
automatically power back on.

13 - 21 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

Testing the Scales You can determine if scales are connected and
TCP/IP Connection communicating by doing a PING test, or by checking the
Ethernet Diagnostic L.E.D.’s on the left side of the scale.

You can PING another scale or device to determine if the


PING Test scale is communicating properly. Once you type an IP
address and start the PING, your scale will indicate if there
is a response from the other device.

To PING a scale IP address:


QUICK STEPS 1. From the TCP/IP Network Screen, PRESS [F4] to select
Ping an IP Address.
From the TCP/IP Network
Screen:
1. PRESS [F4]
2. TYPE Scale IP Address
3. PRESS [F3]
4. PRESS [ESC]

2. TYPE the IP address of a different scale or device in the


network.
3. PRESS [F3] to select Start Pinging.

Scale Communications 13 - 22
Quantum Scale System

You will receive one of the following responses to determine


if the scales are communicating:

• This screen indicates GOOD communication:


# of pings sent = # of replies

• This screen indicates MARGINAL communication:


# of pings sent “is greater than” # of replies

☛ Note
If the screen indicates marginal communication, ping the
address again, the scale may not have been used in awhile.
If the scale continues to have a low response, verify the
scales are communicating by checking the L.E.D. as
described in the next section.

13 - 23 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

• This screen indicates NO communication:


# of replies = 0

☛ Note
If the screen indicates no communication, check the Ethernet
Diagnostic L.E.D.’s to see if the scales are communicating. If
the L.E.D.’s are not functioning, check the error log, refer to
Troubleshooting IP Addresses or reset each scale by pressing
and releasing the Reset button then repeat the PING test.

4. PRESS [ESC] to return to the TCP/IP Network Screen.

Scale Communications 13 - 24
Quantum Scale System

The following steps will confirm that the scales are


L.E.D. connected and communicating with each other over the
network.

1. Check the Ethernet Diagnostic L.E.D.’s to see if they are


functioning correctly.

This L.E.D. Does This


Ethernet Diagnostic L.E.D.’s LNK (Link) Indicates a link has been established with
the Ethernet network. This will be on
when the scale is connected to an Ethernet
network.
POL (Polarity) Verifies the polarity of the receive pair
from the network. This should be off if
the network wiring polarity is correct.
(Note: Even if the light is on, the scale
may still communicate and respond to a
ping test.)
COL (Collision) Indicates a collision condition on the
Ethernet network. This condition is
caused by 2 devices trying to
communicate at the same time. This
should be off most of the time. (Note: This
light may occasionally blink if connected
to an active Network.)
RCV (Receive) Indicates network activity. Any network
activity should cause it to flash. Intense
network activity may cause it to appear to
remain on.
XMT (Transmit) Indicates that the scale is communicating
to the Ethernet network. During
communication this will flash or may
appear to remain on.

13 - 25 Scale Communications
Quantum Scale Systems

2. Update a product on the Server Scale (updates are


automatic with the Intranet network selection).
3. Check the Server Scale for the Transmission Occured
message.
4. Verify that the product update is reflected on the Client
Scales associated with the Server.

☛ Note
If an error occurred and the Ethernet Diagnostic L.E.D.’s are
functioning correctly, check the error log, refer to
Troubleshooting IP Addresses or reset each scale by pressing
and releasing the Reset button then repeat steps 2 through 4.

Scale Communications 13 - 26
Quantum Scale System

Chapter Fourteen: Understanding Wireless TCP/IP


Scale Communications

♦ Understanding Frequencies
• What is Frequency Hopping?
• What is Direct Sequence?
• Frequency Protocols
♦ Setting Up Wireless Communication
• What is an Access Point?
• What is a PC Network Card and Adapter Board?
• Using an Antenna
♦ Configuring Wireless TCP/IP Networks
• Configuring the Network Card
_ Spectrum 24, Spectrum 802.11, and Telxon/Aironet 802.11
_ Telxon/Aironet 2.4
_ Telxon/Aironet 900
• Signal Strength Meter Test

14 - 1 Wireless Scale Communications


Quantum Scale Systems

Understanding Wireless TCP/IP operates the same as hardwired TCP/IP


Wireless TCP/IP Scale except the wire is replaced with a radio connection. All
existing applications, which operate over the network, will
Communication operate using wireless TCP/IP scale communication.

Wireless communication is currently supported by the


following communication types:
• Symbol Spectrum 24: Spring (proprietary protocol) &
802.11 frequency hopping
• Telxon/Aironet 900mhz: TMA (proprietary protocol)
• Telxon/Aironet 2.4ghz: TMA (proprietary protocol)
• Telxon/Aironet: 802.11 frequency hopping 2mbps,
802.11 direct sequence 2mbps, & 802.11 direct sequence
11mbps

☛ Note
For detailed information on your wireless system
configuration, refer to your provider’s manual (Symbol,
Telxon, and Aironet).

Understanding Information is transmitted through wireless TCP/IP


Frequencies communication utilizing spread spectrum technology.
Spread spectrum technology is a way to send data over the
air waves. It was developed for military communications
that were resistant to jamming, interference, and detection.
This technology makes it difficult for anyone to detect the
presence of the signal. The goal is to transmit information
with as much data as possible, sending it as far and as fast
as possible.

Frequency Hopping (FS) and Direct Sequence (DS) are the


most commonly used methods for the spread spectrum
technology. Although the basic idea is the same, they have
many distinct characteristics that result in different radio
performances.

In order for scales or devices to communicate, they must all


be on the same frequency (900Mhz or 2.4GHz) and the same
spreading technique (FS or DS). The frequency that you use
depends on your application and environment.

☛ Note
Each Country in the International market has a frequency
range specific to their country.

Wireless Scale Communications 14 - 2


Quantum Scale System

What is Frequency Hopping? Frequency Hopping (FH) is a spreading technique that has
its carrier signal changing its frequency many times a
second in a pseudo-random pattern making it multipath
resist. If a particular frequency runs into interference or a
high level of noise, the device “hops” to the other
frequencies less likely to be affected to continue the
transmission.

Interference is reduced because radio signal is constantly


moving (changing frequency) during the transmission of
data. Two separate wireless networks with frequency
hopping techniques can co-exist in the same environment.
The “hopping sequence” is specified by the network ID.

Here is an example of Frequency Hopping:

The FH signal is transmitted over a wide frequency band of


2.4-2.4835 Ghz. The maximum data rate for the 2.4Ghz
frequency hopping is 2Mbps. Use FH if you have a high
radio frequency multipath environment.

14 - 3 Wireless Scale Communications


Quantum Scale Systems

What is Direct Sequence? Direct Sequence (DS) is a spreading technique that remains
at a fixed frequency. The signal is transmitted over a wide
frequency range and low amplitude. This allows for filtering
out sharp high amplitude interference.

Here is an example direct sequence:

The data transmitted through direct sequence is multiplied


to add redundancy to the signal. The signal redundancy
enables reconstruction of data if a portion of the frequency
spectrum is knocked out by interference. This redundancy
results in a processing gain and provides for a successful
transmission at higher data rates. Use DS if you want to the
data to be sent with greater coverage and greater
throughput.

Frequency Protocols Each provider has its own protocol or internal way of
transmitting frequencies through a network.
• Telxon/Aironet’s proprietary protocol is TMA
• Symbol’s proprietary protocol is 802.3

Another frequency protocol, 802.11, can be used by Telxon,


Aironet, and Symbol. The 802.11 frequency protocol is the
standard developed by the industry enabling provider’s to
communicate with each other in a network.

☛ Note
In order to use 802.11, all providers must use the same
frequency spreading technique (Frequency Hopping or
Direct Sequence).

Wireless Scale Communications 14 - 4


Quantum Scale System

Setting Up Wireless To set up wireless communication you need the following:


Communication (From a supported supplier)
• Access Point
• PC Network Card
• Antenna
(Included in Hobart wireless kit)
• PC Adapter Board
• Operating Code
• Extra RAM (if needed)
• Hardware

What is an Access Point? The Access Point (AP) acts as a root unit and controls traffic
flow to the network. It attaches to the backbone, which is the
physical wired Ethernet or Token Ring connection. It
contains configuration information in its association table
that covers all stations in the communication system. The
AP is the point at which scales or other devices can access
the backbone and communicate with all wireless devices in
a cell area.

An access point can be added to extend the coverage range


of the service area. Add multiple AP to cover a larger area.
The AP coverage range depends on data rates being
transferred. The higher the data rates the smaller the
coverage range.

You can set up several system configurations in an


infrastructure depending how you use your access points.
An infrastructure is a communication system that combines
access points, mobile stations and fixed stations. Refer to
your provider’s manual for more information on system
configurations in an infrastructure.

14 - 5 Wireless Scale Communications


Quantum Scale Systems

What is a PC Network Card A PC Network Card is attached to the PC adapter board and
and Adapter Board? inserted into every scale in the wireless network. You need a
wireless PC network card and PC adapted board in each
scale to communicate within the network.

The PC Network card must be configured to determine if


the scale is connected in the network. Refer to Configuring the
Network Card on the next page.

☛ Note
Contact your Hobart Service Representative for proper
installation.

Using an Antenna Antennas help to maximize radio communication range in a


coverage area. Choosing the right antenna depends upon
the environment and the application. Knowing your
environment can help you determine the right antenna and
placement. Once you become familiar with the environment
and coverage area at your site, choose an antenna with a
coverage area that best matches your sites coverage area.

Antennas are either Omni-directional or Directional.


• Omni-directional antennas are ideal for square or
somewhat square areas because they have a 360°
coverage pattern on a horizontal plane. The coverage
area is doughnut-shaped. Place the antenna in the center
of the coverage area whenever possible.
• Directional antennas are ideal for elongated areas,
corners, and outdoor point-to-point applications because
they have a single direction coverage area on a vertical
plane (like a flashlight). The beam width angles are from
90° (somewhat directional) to 20° (very directional). The
antenna reaches a longer and more direct coverage area
when the beam is narrower. Point the antenna at the
direction of the coverage area.

Proper positioning of antennas is important to ensure you


are using the maximum coverage area. Generally, antennas
should be positioned so they are clear of obstructions. The
best performance coverage is achieved if the transmitting
and receiving antennas are located at the same height and
are in direct line of sight of each other.

For more information on antennas, refer to your provider’s


manual.

Wireless Scale Communications 14 - 6


Quantum Scale System

Configuring Wireless Wireless TCP/IP operates the same as hardwired TCP/IP


TCP/IP Networks except wire is replaced with radio connection. Refer to
Chapter 13; Setting Up TCP/IP Networks to configure and
setup your wireless network, and Testing the TCP/IP
Connection/PING to determine if you are communicate with
other scales in your wireless network.

The only additions to using wireless TCP/IP are configuring


the Network Card and performing a Signal Strength Meter
Test. Also, you can add up to nineteen (19) client scales to a
department in an IntraNet Configuration using wireless
TCP/IP.

☛ Note
The screen display varies depending on the supported
supplier that you choose.

Configuring the Network Once the IP Addresses are set up, you must configure the
Card network card to set up the System ID and determine if the
scale is connected. Both the Access Point and Scale System ID
must be the same.

Spectrum 24, Spectrum To configure the network card:


802.11, and Telxon/Aironet 1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
802.11 Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F6] to select Communications Menu.
3. PRESS [F2] to select Network.
4. PRESS [F5] to select Configure Network Card.

5. Enter the System ID. This must be a numeric value and


must be the same as the Access Point System ID. It may
be referred to as “Network ID”. The default is 101.

14 - 7 Wireless Scale Communications


Quantum Scale Systems

☛ Note
The system ID and access point use a hex (“H”) value. Hex
is an alphanumeric value.
At this time, the network card system ID uses 16 identifiers
(0-9 and A-F) and can accept a hex value with 4 digits
(e.g. AA22). Yet, the 802.11 access point system ID can
accept an alphanumeric value up to 32 characters. You must
change your access point system ID to a 4-digit hex value
that matches the network card system ID, if applicable.

6. PRESS [ESC].
7. PRESS [F5] again to select Configure Network Card.
8. Verify that the screen displays “Connected”. This
indicates the scale is connected to an Access Point and
can communicate within the network.

☛ Note
If “Disconnected” displays on the Network Card Screen try
any of the following:
• Verify the Access point and Scale “System ID” are the
same.
• Make sure you reset the scale after you entered the scales
configuration settings on the TCP/IP Network Screen.
• Verify all the TCP/IP setting are correct. If you change
anything, reset the scale.
• Relocate the scale closer to the Access Point or relocate
the Access Point.
• Reposition the antenna on the Access Point or the scale if
an external antenna is installed.

9. After entering the System ID, PRESS [ESC] to return to


the TCP/IP Network Screen.

Wireless Scale Communications 14 - 8


Quantum Scale System

Telxon/Aironet 2.4 To configure the network card:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F6] to select Communications Menu.
3. PRESS [F2] to select Network.
4. PRESS [F5] to select Configure Network Card.

5. Enter the System ID. This must be a numeric value and


must be the same as the Access Point System ID. It may
be referred to as “Network ID”. The default is 102.

☛ Note
The system ID and access point use a hex (“H”) value. Hex
is an alphanumeric value.
At this time, the network card system ID uses 16 identifiers
(0-9 and A-F) and can accept a hex value with 4 digits
(e.g. AA22). Yet, the Telxon/Aironet 2.4 access point system
ID can accept a 6-digit hex value. You must change your
access point system ID to a 4-digit hex value that matches
the network card system ID, if applicable.

14 - 9 Wireless Scale Communications


Quantum Scale Systems

6. Enter the Frequency channel. This must be the same as


the Access Point Frequency channel.
7. Enter the Bit Rate channel. This must be the same as the
Access Point Bit Rate channel. Bit Rate is the speed that
the data is transmitting.

☛ Note
Channels may need to be changed if there is an interference
because another device is on the same frequency or bit rate
channel. Contact your Hobart Service Technician to change
the Frequency or Bit Rate channels.

8. PRESS [ESC].
9. PRESS [F5] again to select Configure Network Card.
10. Verify that the screen displays “Connected”. This
indicates the scale is connected to an Access Point and
can communicate within the network.

☛ Note
If “Disconnected” displays on the Network Card Screen try
any of the following:
• Verify the Access point and Scale “System ID” are the
same.
• Make sure you reset the scale after you entered the scales
configuration settings on the TCP/IP Network Screen.
• Verify all the TCP/IP setting are correct. If you change
anything, reset the scale.
• Relocate the scale closer to the Access Point or relocate
the Access Point.
• Reposition the antenna on the Access Point or the scale if
an external antenna is installed.

11. After entering the System ID, PRESS [ESC] to return to


the TCP/IP Network Screen.

Wireless Scale Communications 14 - 10


Quantum Scale System

Telxon/Aironet 900 To configure the network card:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F6] to select Communications Menu.
3. PRESS [F2] to select Network.
4. PRESS [F5] to select Configure Network Card.

5. Enter the System ID. This must be a numeric value and


must be the same as the Access Point System ID. It may
be referred to as “Network ID”.

☛ Note
The system ID and access point use a hex (“H”) value. Hex
is an alphanumeric value.
At this time, the network card system ID uses 16 identifiers
(0-9 and A-F) and can accept a hex value with 4 digits
(e.g. AA22). Yet, the Telxon/Aironet 900 access point system
ID can accept a 6-digit hex value. You must change your
access point system ID to a 4-digit hex value that matches
the network card system ID, if applicable.

14 - 11 Wireless Scale Communications


Quantum Scale Systems

6. Enter the Frequency channel. This must be the same as


the Access Point Frequency channel.

☛ Note
Channels may need to be changed if there is an interference
because another device is on the same frequency or bit rate
channel. Contact your Hobart Service Technician to change
the Frequency.

7. PRESS [ESC].
8. PRESS [F5] again to select Configure Network Card.
9. Verify that the screen displays “Connected”. This
indicates the scale is connected to an Access Point and
can communicate within the network.

☛ Note
If “Disconnected” displays on the Network Card Screen try
any of the following:
• Verify the Access point and Scale “System ID” are the
same.
• Make sure you reset the scale after you entered the scales
configuration settings on the TCP/IP Network Screen.
• Verify all the TCP/IP setting are correct. If you change
anything, reset the scale.
• Relocate the scale closer to the Access Point or relocate
the Access Point.
• Reposition the antenna on the Access Point or the scale if
an external antenna is installed.

10. After entering the System ID, PRESS [ESC] to return to


the TCP/IP Network Screen.

Wireless Scale Communications 14 - 12


Quantum Scale System

The Signal Strength Meter test is used to check the radio


Signal Strength Meter connection and how it is effected by the radio traffic and
Test radio signal strength. It indicates how many pings and
responses occur within a specific time frame based on the
maximum that can occur.

To test the signal strength:


1. From the Supervisor Menu, PRESS [F5] to select Scale
Setup Menu.
2. PRESS [F6] to select Communication Menu.
3. PRESS [F2] to select Network.
4. PRESS [F6] to select Link Quality

5. Enter the Access Point IP Address.


6. PRESS [F2] to select Start Link Test.

☛ Note
You may not be prompted to enter an Access Point IP
Address depending on the type of network card you are
using.
• If you do need to enter an Access Point IP Address, the
Link Quality Screen will reflect relative time.
• If you do not need to enter an Access Point IP address,
the Link Quality Screen will reflect true signal strength.

14 - 13 Wireless Scale Communications


Quantum Scale Systems

7. Refer to the strength meter indicator to determine how


many pings and responses occurred within a specific
time frame.
8. PRESS [F2] to stop the Link Test.

☛ Note
If the signal strength is poor try any of the following:
• Check for interference between the Access Point and the
Scale.
• Relocate your antenna, if possible.
• Relocate the scale closer to the Access Point.

9. PRESS [ESC] to return to the TCP/IP Network Screen.

Wireless Scale Communications 14 - 14


Quantum Scale System

Appendix

♦ Understanding Network Configurations


• What Does Client and Server Really Mean?
• ScaleMaster
• IntraNet
• ScaleMaster/IntraNet
• MiniNet II
♦ Understanding Ethernet Networks
• Hubs
• Wiring
• Crossover Function
• TCP/IP – Troubleshooting IP Addresses
♦ Understanding EAN13 Scale Configuration
• EAN13 Barcode Examples
♦ Understanding the Text Editor
♦ Marquee Editor
♦ Creating Macro (Using the Save/Recall Key)
• Executing a Macro
• Deleting a Macro
♦ Proportional Tare (Percentage Tare)
♦ Percentage Tare Procedures
♦ How the Percentage Tare Value is Calculated
♦ Hobart Recommended Class Structure
♦ Quantum Function Codes
♦ Operator Access Levels

A-1 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Understanding The Quantum Scale System can be set with the following
Network networking configurations:
♦ None
Configurations ♦ Scalemaster
♦ IntraNet
♦ ScaleMaster/Intranet
♦ MiniNet

The following pages detail the differences between these


networking systems. However, before you get to that, let’s
take a look at the terms Server Scale and Client Scale.

What Does Client & Server There are three (3) “senses” to understanding how a scale
Really Mean? acts as a “Server” Scale. From the ScaleMaster standpoint,
the Server Scale is any scale connected to ScaleMaster and
IntraNet as well as other scales in the department. Keep in
mind, there is no setting in the software to designate a scale
as a server. Any scale that receives data from ScaleMaster
will attempt to send that data to scales connected via
IntraNet. Therefore, it is important to connect only one (1)
scale to ScaleMaster per department.

The second way a scale acts like a “Server” is for Totals


collection. Again, note the scale itself does not know that it
is a server. Other scales are configured to send their Totals
to it. Within a given department, some scales could send
their Totals to Scale ID x, others to Scale ID y, and others not
to send Totals at all. (This is done by sending their own
Scale ID or Scale ID 0.) All of this is independent of which
scale is connected to ScaleMaster; however, it is of greater
advantage for the scale connected to ScaleMaster to be
designated as the server.

The third way a scale can be designated as the Server Scale


is when you make a change and it looks for all other
department scales to where it should send the data. Also the
Server Scale compares its database to a client scale when the
client scale is reset. If the client scale’s database is different
from the server scale, the server scale database is loaded
onto the client scale to include the updated data. Ensure
your server has an active database before you reset any
client scale.

Now, let’s take a look at the descriptions of the various


network configurations.

Appendix A-2
Quantum Scale System

ScaleMaster ScaleMaster is a powerful data management tool for multi-


department, multi-scale operations. However with the
Quantum, it becomes even more powerful.

ScaleMaster sends the required database changes from a


centralized location directly to each scale configured in the
ScaleMaster network. Data can also be retrieved from each
scale. Refer to your ScaleMaster manual for more detailed
information.

IntraNet IntraNet is an acronym for Intradepartment Network. It is


internal to the scale software and combines the functionality
of ScaleMaster with an enhanced MiniNet II network by
connecting the data of all the scales in the department. This
means improved performance and convenience for you.

Assume you have five (5) scales in a department. If you


make a change to “user data” (i.e., PLU data, label types,
flashkeys, etc.) at Scale #1, through IntraNet that change
will update immediately or at a predetermined time stamp
Scales 2-5 in the department. When the update is successful,
a transmission message appears on the screen the next time
you enter the Supervisor Mode.

In this way, you have a peer-to-peer network in the sense


that any scale you make changes on becomes the “server”
scale and all other scales become “clients.”

A-3 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

If the data transmission is unsuccessful, this same window


will alert you with an error message.

☛ Note
The following screen may appear alerting you to the fact
that background tasks are running. This message tells you
that the scale is attempting to send data to other scales over
IntraNet. You will not be able to complete the
Backup/Restore function until the data transfer is complete.

Appendix A-4
Quantum Scale System

ScaleMaster/IntraNet ScaleMaster and IntraNet configuration saves time and


money when transferring data between scale locations
because you are not communicating with all the scales in all
the departments. You only have to communicate with one
scale (Server Scale). The Server Scale then has responsibility
for updating all the other scales in the department.

Before you get to the explanation of how the data is


transferred, let’s review a couple of terms.

Term Definition
Server Scale A designated department scale connected
to both ScaleMaster and IntraNet (intra-
department network).

Client Scale This is a scale or numerous scales that


connect to the Server Scale via IntraNet.

Look At This
Make sure ScaleMaster is not configured to communicate
with the client scales.

Sending Data to the Scales To update a scale, ScaleMaster sends the required database
changes to the Server Scale. This scale then sends the same
information down to the Client Scales connected in its
department network. If while sending these changes to the
Client Scales in its department, ScaleMaster then sends other
information to the Server Scale, the Server Scale stops
sending information to the Client Scales and accepts the
additional transmission from ScaleMaster. Once this
transmission is completed, the Server Scale again attempts
to send the previous changes, followed by the new changes,
in chronological order, to the scales in the department
network.

Reading Data from the Scales In addition to sending data to the scales, ScaleMaster also
allows you to retrieve information from the Server Scale.
Totals data is sent from the Client Scales and stored in the
Server Scales database. In other words, each Client Scale in
the department sends Totals information back to the Server
Scale after each transaction. The Server Scale adds these
values into its Totals file. The Server Scale totals then reflect
the Totals for the department. When ScaleMaster asks for
Totals information, it receives Totals for the whole
department, not just for the Server Scale.

A-5 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

MiniNet II The MiniNet II networking function allows each department


to be setup as its own individual network information
exchange. However, contrary to IntraNet, the changes do
not take place automatically. You must designate when the
changes occur. A detailed explanation of how to BackUp or
Restore Data through MiniNet II, is found in the BackUp or
Restore section.

Understanding To effectively set up Scales with TCP/IP, you should have a


Ethernet Networks basic understanding of Ethernet networking. A Network
Consultant or Network Administrator should be contacted
prior to implementing an Ethernet LAN system.

Hubs Hubs for 10BaseT are available with different numbers and
types of ports. The IEEE 802.3 standard recommends that the
signal crossover function for 10BaseT connection is done
inside the hub port. This standard also notes that all ports
featuring an internal crossover be designated with an "X".
Some hubs provide a port where the crossover function is
controlled by a switch. This port is generally used for
cascading hubs using straight through cables. Hubs where
all ports feature an internal crossover generally require a
crossover cable to cascade the hubs. Stackable hubs, which
provide a special connection for stacking two (2) or more
hubs, are also available. Stacked hubs count as one hub
when calculating the number of hubs and segments between
two stations.

☛ Note
10BaseT hubs are also available with connections for
attaching to a 10Base2 (coax cable) network.

Wiring An Ethernet network may consist of several different cable


types. ScaleMaster may be used successfully with any type
of Ethernet network if provisions are made to provide a
10BaseT connection for each scale. Refer to your ScaleMaster
TCP/IP Supplement for more information (F-33863).

10BaseT (or UTP-Unshielded Twisted Pair) length segments


Wiring Specifications have a maximum of 328ft (100m). This is the maximum
amount allowed between hubs or remote devices (i.e. scales
or computers). The network is also restricted to a maximum
of four (4) hubs between any two devices.

Appendix A-6
Quantum Scale System

Hobart Ethernet scales supporting TCP/IP require a network


Wiring Categories connection using 10BaseT wiring. Hobart recommends that
all wiring conform to Category 3 or 5 standards, published
by EIA.

☛ Note
Category 3 wiring may be used but is not recommended.

Look At This
All wiring and cabling must be installed to meet National
and Local Electrical Codes.
All Ethernet wiring must conform to IEEE 802.3
specifications.
All cabling should be installed to meet the cabling pathway
requirements of EIA/TIA Standard 569, table 4.8-5.

Crossover Function Two Ethernet 10BaseT devices can only communicate if the
transmitter on one device is connected to the receiver on the
other device. When connecting two identical 10BaseT ports
(ports that either both support the crossover function or both
do not support the crossover function), the crossover
function must be implemented in the wiring.

A patch cord is the connecting cable between two pieces of


Patch Cord Wiring hardware on an ethernet network. The recommended
standard for wiring patch cords is the EIA/TIA 568B
standard, using RJ-45 8 conductor connectors. The patch
cords used may be wired to any standard as long as all cords
are wired using the same standard. The EIA/TIA 568B
standard is recommended for conformity with industry
standards.

A-7 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Straight Thru Patch Cord A straight thru patch cord has both ends wired the same and
is generally used to connect computers to the hub and to
connect devices to hubs. Depending on the hub a straight
thru patch cord or crossover patch cord may be required to
cascade hubs. Refer to the documentation provided by the
manufacturer of your hub.

10 Base - T Straight Thru Patch Cord

Pin Color Signal


1 White/orange TX data +
2 Orange/white TX data -
3 White/green RX data +
4 Blue --
5 White/blue --
6 Green/white RX data -
7 White/brown --
8 Brown --

Appendix A-8
Quantum Scale System

Crossover Patch Cord A crossover patch cord is generally used to cascade hubs. A
crossover patch cord has one end wired as a straight thru
connection and the other end wired as a crossover
connection. Depending on the hub, a straight thru patch
cord, or a crossover patch cord may be required to cascade
hubs. Refer to the documentation provided by the
manufacturer of your hub.

10 Base - T Crossover Patch Cord

Pin Color Signal


1 White/green RX data +
2 Green/white RX data -
3 White/orange TX data +
4 Blue --
5 White/blue --
6 Orange/white TX data -
7 White/brown --
8 Brown --

A-9 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Wiring Identification As part of the Hobart recommended cable identification


scheme, all ethernet hubs should be marked with a unique
hub number. All ethernet patch cords should be marked at
both ends with the originating hub and port number and the
destination hub and port number. Refer to the following
example.

Appendix A - 10
Quantum Scale System

TCP/IP - Troubleshooting IP The following section contains information to help you


Addresses troubleshoot problems within your configuration. The
references give you items to troubleshoot, tools to use while
troubleshooting, and messages to look for when you are
troubleshooting. This section is only for systems equipped
with TCP/IP Communications.

Error Message Possible Cause Suggested Action


TCP/IP: Connect Invalid IP Address Compare the IP Address in the scale to the IP Address, which
error, check IP configured for the you configured in ScaleMaster. These addresses should match.
Address scale.
configuration.
TCP/IP: Could Something Check with your Network Administrator.
not talk to scale. terminated the
Check with connection between
Network the scale and
Administrator. ScaleMaster.
TCP/IP: Could After a successful Check with your Network Administrator. This is a network-
not disconnect. connection, the related problem.
System time-out disconnect from the
occurred. scale failed.
TCP/IP device Invalid components Check PathWay Runtime installation against Hobart
not installed installed. recommended installation. (This is a ScaleMaster component.
(PathWay Contact your Network Administrator for details.)
Runtime stack).
TCP/IP socket TCP/IP stack out of Increase packet buffer sizes in PathWay Runtime installation.
table full, no resource. This can be done through the Advanced Configuration Setup
sockets available available in PathWay Runtime. (This is a ScaleMaster
(no buffer space). component. Contact your Network Administrator for details.)
TCP/IP socket is ScaleMaster is trying Wait 30 seconds for the scale to time out and retry the operation.
already to connect to a scale
connected. that is already
connected.
TCP/IP could not Invalid IP Address Verify the IP Address in the scale against the IP Address, which
establish socket, configured or the PC you configured in ScaleMaster. The numbers should match.
check IP and is not connected to --OR--
network. the ethernet network. Check your network connection.
--OR--
Verify that Well Know Port setting in the uiconf.txt file matches
the scale (ScaleMaster uses 6000).
TCP/IP The scale has Give the scale 1-minute to regain its resources.
connection exhausted all of its
refused, check sockets.
cables/ports/IP
Address.
There are no All of the IP Contact your Network Administrator.
more available IP Addresses available
Addresses in the network have
been used.

A - 11 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Error Message Possible Cause Suggested Action


TCP/IP: The scale The scale View the Activities that were Attempted Screen concerning the
aborted the encountered a critical communication error. (This is a ScaleMaster component. Contact
communications error during your Network Administrator for details.)
task. communication and
aborted the task.
The scale is out of The scale does not Free memory available in the scale (i.e., delete totals, add
memory. have enough memory memory, delete unused PLUs, etc.).
available to process
any new data.

Ethernet Card

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action


Link light on A cable is Verify cable connections and integrity. The link light only
ethernet card not disconnected and/or functions for the RJ-45 connector. If the card has a BNC
on. (If the card is damaged. connector and the connector is in use, the link light may not
equipped with light.
lights.)
You receive There are Verify the correct drivers are being used. Consult the ethernet
system error configuration cards documentation and perform the card diagnostics provided
messages during problems. by the manufacturer.
boot.
The system The connections to Some manufacturers of ethernet adapters provide connector for
cannot both the BNC and both BNC and RJ-45 connections. If the card has both connectors
communicate. RJ-45 connectors. in use, generally the RJ-45 connection takes precedence. Consult
the manufacturers documentation for specific information.

Hub to Scale

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action


Both the scale • A cable is • Verify cable connections and cable integrity.
and hub link disconnected
lights are off or and/or damaged.
flashing.
• It is the incorrect • Verify the correct cable is being used for the port in use at the
cable and/or an hub (Straight Through or Crossover, depending on
incorrectly wired configuration). Verify the plug wiring at both ends.
cable.
• No power to hub • Verify that the hub and/or scale is connected to the
and/or scale. appropriate power source.
Both the scale The hub switch Verify that the hub crossover switch is set correctly. (Not all
and hub link setting is incorrect. hubs have switches.)
lights are off or
flashing.

Appendix A - 12
Quantum Scale System

Hub to Scale (continued)

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action


The scale link • A cable is • Verify cable connections and cable integrity.
light is off. disconnected
and/or damaged.
• It is the incorrect • Verify that a crossover cable is used if connecting to two ports
cable. marked with an "X" (internal crossover).
• Verify that a straight through cable is used if connecting to a
port on one hub marked with an "X" (internal crossover).
• The RJ-45 plug • Verify the wiring at both ends.
pins 3 & 6 are
wired incorrectly.
• No power to scale. • Verify that scale is connected to the appropriate power
source.
• Defective port on • Connect scale to a different port and recheck link light.
hub.
• The scale board is • Replace board. Prior to replacing the board, connect the scale
defective. in place of a scale that is working and recheck link light.
Hub link light is A cable is Verify cable connections and cable integrity.
off or flashing. disconnected and/or
damaged.
Hub link light is • There is no power • Verify that the hub is connected to the appropriate power
off or flashing. to the hub. source.
(continued)
• It is the incorrect • Verify that a crossover cable is used if connecting to two ports
cable. marked with an "X" (internal crossover).
• Verify that a straight through cable is used if connecting to a
port on one hub marked with an "X" (internal crossover).
• The RJ-45 plug • Verify the wiring at both ends.
pins 1 & 2 are
wired incorrectly.
• The hub switch • Verify that the hub crossover switch is set correctly. (Not all
setting. hubs have switches.) Refer to Understanding ScaleMaster
Ethernet Networks.
• A defective port on • Connect scale to a different port and recheck link light.
the hub and/or a
defective hub.
• The scale board is • Replace board. Prior to replacing the board, connect the scale
defective. in place of a working scale and recheck link light.

A - 13 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Hub to Hub

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action


The link lights on • It is an incorrect • Verify that a crossover cable is used if connecting to two ports
both hubs are off cable. marked with an "X" (internal crossover).
or flashing.
• Verify that a straight through cable is used if connecting to a
port on one hub marked with an "X" (internal crossover).
• There is no power • Verify that the hub(s) are connected to the appropriate power
to hub(s). source.
The polarity light The polarity is Verify cable wiring. The Polarity light indicates that the polarity
(POL) on scale is incorrect. is reversed in a RJ-45 plug between pins 3 & 6 in the cable from
on. the scale to the hub.
The collision Multiple devices are Contact the system administrator.
light (COL) on trying to
the scale is on. communicate at the
same time.
The partition There are Remove power from the hub. Wait 30 seconds and reconnect. If
light on the scale wiring/device the partition light comes back on, troubleshoot the wiring
is on. problem(s). attached to the indicated hub port. Look for bad wiring, EMF
sources close to the wiring, and/or a device problem.
All TCP/IP There are computer • Verify that all drivers are loading while the computer is
scales are off- problem(s). booting and that no error messages are displayed.
line.
• Attempt to ping the computer using an IP of 127.0.0.1. If the
ping test fails, troubleshoot the ethernet adapter board
and/or the drivers.
• Attempt to ping the computer where ScaleMaster is installed
from any other computer on the network.
• Initiate a ping test to any valid address. While the ping test is
in progress, observe the activity light on the ethernet adapter
board, (it should be flashing). Also observe the RCV L.E.D.s
on the scales. The L.E.D.s should be flashing. If the L.E.D.
flashes on the ethernet adapter, but not on the scales,
troubleshoot the configuration and/or network wiring. If the
L.E.D. on the ethernet adapter does not flash, troubleshoot
the computer/adapter installation.

Appendix A - 14
Quantum Scale System

Hub to Hub (continued)

Symptom Possible Cause Suggested Action


All TCP/IP • There are • Verify that the Well-Known Port setting in Uiconf.txt matches
scales are off- configuration the Well-Known Port setting in the scales (ScaleMaster uses
line. (continued) problem(s). 6000).
• Verify that the scale IP Addresses match the IP Addresses
configured in ScaleMaster.
• Verify that the IP configured in PathWay Runtime is correct
and that the correct subnet mask was specified.
• There are wiring • Verify that all cables are connected.
problem(s).
• Verify that all link lights are on at the hubs and at the scales.
• Disconnect all scales from the network and attempt to
communicate with each scale after reconnecting.
• Verify that the scale network has not been partitioned by the
ethernet hub.
Some scales are • The scale • Verify the scale network configuration.
on-line and one configuration is
• Verify that each scale has a unique IP Address.
or more scales incorrect.
are off line. • Verify the status of the scales ethernet L.E.D.s for link, polarity,
and collision.
• Verify the scale has the correct Well-Known Port (ScaleMaster
uses 6000).
• There are wiring • Verify that all cables are connected on the affected segments.
problem(s).
• Verify that all link lights are on at the hubs and at the scales.
• Verify that the scale network has not been partitioned by the
ethernet hub.
• There are hub • If all the scales that are off-line are connected to one hub,
problem(s). troubleshoot the hub.

A - 15 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Understanding EAN13 The EAN13 configuration consists of 12 characters which


Scale Configuration represent the data printed in each position of the barcode.

Discuss with your Hobart Representative how you want to


set up Random Weight, Fixed Weight, and By Count
Configurations. Refer to the following table for an
explanation of which data is represented by which
character, and the maximum number of positions available
for the data. Refer to the following rules to understand how
your configuration is set up.

Character Description Max.


Symbol Digits
X Prefix Digit 2
W Weight 5
w Weight Check Digit 1
P Price 5
p Price Check Digit 1
E EAN Code 9
N Product Number 6
V Vendor Number 6
Q By Count Quantity 2

☛ Note
The first character in the format string is always an X for the
number system or a fixed digit from 0-9. If the first character
in the format string is X, you can set a default prefix number
for a custom label type in Supervisor Mode. Refer to Setting
the EAN13 Default Prefix for PLUs in chapter 12.

Appendix A - 16
Quantum Scale System

Any combination of characters can be used for the


remaining eleven characters, however they must comply
with the following rules:
• Any data field, with the exception of fixed numbers,
must be continuous.
• The Price check digit ‘p’ is only allowed if there is a price
field of 4 or 5 digits entered before or after the price
check digit.
• The weight check digit ‘w’ will only be allowed if there
is a weight field of 4 to 5 digits entered before or after
the weight check digit.
• If the value of the weight or total price for a transaction
exceeds the number of digits configured, no EAN bar
code is printed for the transaction.
• If the value of the EAN code is larger than the number of
digits configured then the right most digits are
truncated.
• If the value of the EAN code is shorter than the number
of digits configured, the EAN code is padded with
leading zeros.
• No format string is allowed to incorporate both an EAN
code ‘E’ field and either a vendor number ‘V’ field or
product number ‘N’ field.
• If during download of a database from an external serial
device the prefix is not sent and this is a new PLU, then
the default EAN prefix is used based on the PLU type
and the presence of prefix digits in the corresponding
format string.

EAN13 Barcode Examples Refer to the following examples for EAN13 barcodes.
Remember, the last digit is always the check digit. In the
examples these character symbols are used.

X = Prefix Digit
W = Weight
w = Weight Check Digit
P = Price
p = Price Check Digit
E = EAN Code
N = Product Number
V = Vendor Number
Q = By Count Quantity
S = Scale ID
C = Check Digit

A - 17 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

EAN13 Methods

WEIGHT

X E E E E E E WWWWW C X X E E E E E E WWWW C
1 Prefix Digit 2 Prefix Digit
6 EAN Code 6 EAN Code
5 Weight 4 Weight
1 Check Digit 1 Check Digit

X X E E E E E WWWWW C X X E E E E E wWWWW C
2 Prefix Digit 2 Prefix Digit
5 EAN Code 5 EAN Code
5 Weight 1 Weight Check Digit
1 Check Digit 4 Weight
1 Check Digit

Appendix A - 18
Quantum Scale System

PRICE

X E E E E E E P P P P P C X X E E E E E E P P P P C
1 Prefix Digit 2 Prefix Digit
6 EAN Code 6 EAN Code
5 Price 4 Price
1 Check Digit 1 Check Digit

X X E E E E E P P P P PC X X E E E E E p P P P P C
2 Prefix Digit 2 Prefix Digit
5 EAN Code 5 EAN Code
5 Price 1 Price Check Digit
1 Check Digit 4 Price
1 Check Digit

VENDOR/PRODUCT NUMBER BY COUNT

X V V V V VV N N N N N C X XE E E E Q Q P PPPC
1 Prefix Digit 2 Prefix Digit
6 Vendor Number 4 EAN Code
5 Product Number 2 By Count Quantity
1 Check Digit 4 Price
1 Check Digit

A - 19 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Understanding the Within some functions, you have the ability to change the
Text Editor text field. From the Text Editor you can add or edit the
following:

♦ Description of a product or Flashkey


♦ Operator Name
♦ Special Messages
♦ Expanded Text

To access the Text Editor from all accessible functions,


PRESS the Change Text Field Softkey. A screen similar to
the one below displays.

Once you are on the Text Editor Screen, there are several
options for what you can do with the text. Each selection
will be discussed in the following paragraphs.

Appendix A - 20
Quantum Scale System

(F1) Select Font Select Font allows you to change the font and size of the
Text field.

To Change the Font and/or Size of text:

1. Position the cursor where you want to begin marking


text. (See the explanation for Mark Text.)
2. PRESS [F2] to select Mark.
3. Use the Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the end of the
text. The marked text will be highlighted.
4. PRESS [F1] to access Select Font. The current font is
shown in < >.

5. PRESS the appropriate “F” Key to select the font or


PRESS [F8] to view More Fonts. PRESS the “F” Key to
select the new font.

6. You may continue making changes to the text.

A - 21 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

(F2) Mark Text Select Mark Text to define blocks of text that can quickly be
copied modified or deleted from the record.

To Mark Text for editing:

1. Position the cursor before the text you want to Mark.


2. PRESS [F2] to select Mark.

3. Use the Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the end of the
text block. The marked text will be highlighted.

✎ Tip
To quickly mark a whole line of text:
1. Place the cursor at the beginning of the line.
2. PRESS [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to select the entire text
line.

Appendix A - 22
Quantum Scale System

(F3) Cut Text Cut Text allows you to remove text from the position it is in,
usually to delete it. Once you cut the text, it can be copied to
another location.

1. Position the cursor where you want to begin marking


text.
2. PRESS [F2] to select Mark.
3. Use the Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the end of the
text. The marked text will be highlighted.

4. PRESS [F3] to select Cut and remove the text.

A - 23 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

(F4) Paste Text The Paste Text function allows you to move or copy a block
of text from one position to another.

1. Position the cursor where you want to begin marking


text.
2. PRESS [F2] to select Mark.
3. Use the Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the end of the
text. The marked text will be highlighted.

4. PRESS [F3] to select Cut and remove the text.

Appendix A - 24
Quantum Scale System

5. Use the Arrow Keys to place the cursor in the position


where you want to paste the text.
6. To insert the text, PRESS [F4] to Paste.

☛ Note
When you edit text, the Editor fits the text in the field
specified by the label. The auto-wrap feature enables you to
use the expanded text in a different label with a different
sized field.

(F5) Copy Text The Copy Text function allows you to copy a block of text
from one position to another.

1. Position the cursor where you want to begin marking


text.
2. PRESS [F2] to select Mark.

A - 25 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

3. Use the Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the end of the
text. The marked text will be highlighted.
4. PRESS [F5] to select Copy.

5. Use the Arrow Keys to place the cursor in the position


where you want to copy the text.
6. To insert the text, PRESS [F4] to Paste.

Appendix A - 26
Quantum Scale System

Marquee Editor Marquee Messages can be created for each PLU within your
database. In addition to text, the Marquee Message can be
displayed to draw your customer’s attention to the display.
Use the following commands to setup your merchandising
strategy.

“F” Command Purpose

F1 - Scroll This function moves each character in


the text group from right to left across
the display.

F2 - Frame This function displays the text group in a


fixed position.

F3 - Blink On/Blink The Blink On/Blink Off toggle blinks the


Off text group (entire message or a specific
part of the message) at 1 blink per
second.

F4 - Clear The Clear function clears the display


when changing from the Frame to the
Scroll mode.

F5 - Hold In the Scroll mode, this command freezes


the display for 1 second. In the Frame
mode, it adds 1 second to the display
time.

F6 - Roll This command rolls the message off to


the left before displaying additional
information.

F7 - Scroll/Frame When in the Scroll mode, you can choose


Speed from the following speeds:
♦ Slow - 2 Characters/Second
♦ Normal - 3 Characters/Second
♦ Quick - 4 Characters/Second
♦ XQuick - 5 Characters/Second

When in the Frame mode, you can


choose from the following speeds:
♦ Slow - 2 Seconds/Frame
♦ Normal - 1.5 Seconds/Frame
♦ Quick - 1 Second/Frame
♦ XQuick - .5 Second/Frame

F8 - Start/Stop This function allows you to start or stop


Marquee Test the Marquee Message preview that
displays on the Control Panel.

A - 27 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Creating Macros In order to speed your operation of the scale, you can create
(Using the Save/Recall macros by recording in advance, commonly or frequently
used keystrokes. Basically, you record the series of
Key) keystrokes one time and then execute (i.e., playback) the
macro as often as needed to perform the operation.

For example, you may want to print a specific range of


PLU’s during the Print Product List function. You can assign
the “function” a Macro Number and then record the
keystrokes to perform the operation. When you want to
execute the Macro, all you have to do is PRESS
[SAVE/RECALL] and enter the Macro Number. Detailed
instructions on recording, executing and deleting Macros
are on the following pages.

☛ Note
You can record or execute a Supervisor Macro from the
Supervisor Menu only.

Recording a Macro To record a Macro:

1. You should be on the Supervisor Menu.


2. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL]. You should now be on the
QUICK STEPS Supervisor Macros Screen.

From the Supervisor Menu:


1. Position Cursor
2. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL]
3. TYPE the Macro Number
4. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
5. TYPE the Macro Name
6. PRESS [F1]
7. Enter the keystrokes to
Record Macro
8. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL]
9. PRESS [SUPER MENU
ON/OFF]

3. TYPE the Macro Number.


4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
the Macro Name field.
5. If desired, TYPE the Macro Name.

Appendix A - 28
Quantum Scale System

6. PRESS [F1] to start recording the Macro.

7. PRESS the keys required. The PLU records and the


keystrokes are recorded to be replayed or executed later.
8. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL] to complete the Macro.
9. PRESS [SUPER MENU ON/OFF] to return to the
Supervisor Menu.

Executing a Macro To execute a Macro:

1. You should be on the Supervisor Menu.


2. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL]. You should now be on the
QUICK STEPS Supervisor Macros Screen.
3. TYPE the Macro Number.
From the Supervisor Menu: 4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
1. Position Cursor the Macro Name field and confirm the Macro Name.
2. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL] 5. PRESS [F3] to select Execute. After you press [F3], the
3. TYPE the Macro Number scale will move through the Macro sequence and stop.
4. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼]
5. PRESS [F3]
6. PRESS [SUPER MENU
ON/OFF]

6. When you have completed the operation, PRESS [SUPER


MENU ON/OFF] to return to the Supervisor Menu.

A - 29 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

☛ Note
An error message during the Execute function terminates the
Macro.

To delete a Macro:
Deleting a Macro
1. You should be on the Supervisor Menu.
2. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL]. You should now be on the
Supervisor Macros Screen.
QUICK STEPS 3. TYPE the Macro Number.
4. PRESS [ENTER] or [DOWN ARROW (▼)] to move to
From the Supervisor Menu: the Macro Name field and confirm the Macro Name.
1. Position Cursor 5. PRESS [F5] to select Delete. The Macro is immediately
2. PRESS [SAVE/RECALL] deleted.
3. TYPE the Macro Number 6. If desired, repeat Steps 3 - 5 to delete other Macros.
4. PRESS [ENTER] or [▼] 7. PRESS [ESC] to return to the Supervisor Menu.
5. PRESS [F5]
6. Repeat Steps 3 - 5 (If
desired)
7. PRESS [ESC]

☛ Note
You can access Supervisor Macros from the Supervisor
Menu only.

Proportional Tare
(Percentage Tare)

☛ Note
The following explanation on Percentage Tare (i.e.,
Proportional Tare) comes from Weights & Measures Today,
National Conference on Weights and Measures, November
1993.

Appendix A - 30
Quantum Scale System

Percentage Tare Procedure The procedure used to compute net weight involves the
determination of two (2) tare weights. One tare will be a
fixed tare for the outer container; the second, a percentage
tare for individual wrappers on the items.

The store (or product manufacturer) determines the


percentage of the gross weight represented by the tare
weight on one (1) pound of the wrapped candy (scales with
metric units would follow similar procedures).

For example, a pound of wrapped chocolate drops is


unwrapped and the percentage tare weight determined on a
suitable scale (e.g., on a scale with a minimum increment of
0.002 lb.) to be 0.04 pound or 4%. In some stores, similar
products such as wrapped candy of different flavors and
types are offered for sale at the same price; in these cases,
consumers can mix the different candies in the same
package. Tare weights can vary slightly on each type of
candy, so tare averaging may be used to establish a
percentage tare value. Once determined, the percentage tare
is programmed into the device with the PLU of the candy.

The fixed tare of the bag or other container used by


consumers is determined by the seller (e.g., 0.01 lb.) and is
either programmed into the device with the Price Look-Up
Code (PLU) for wrapped chocolate drops or is manually
entered into the cash register by the sales clerk during each
weighing process.

☛ Note
The following explanation on calculating the Percentage
Tare value is a portion of the Discussion Paper, The Use of
Proportional Tare, Weights and Measures Industry Canada,
June 22, 1994.

How the Percentage Tare Percentage Tare value is the value expressed as a percentage
Value is Calculated (e.g. 5.6%, 2.3%, etc.), that represents the proportion of tare
material in comparison with the gross weight of a commodity.
For example, if the percentage tare value for a specific
individually wrapped confection is 14%, it means that for a
gross weight of 100 grams, the total weight of individual
wrappers is 14 grams.

The percentage tare value (Proportional Tare) is the figure that


should be used to calculate the proper tare to be used when
weighing individually wrapped confections (IWC).

A - 31 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Here is an example illustrating how it is calculated. In order to


determine the net weight of candies, a fixed tare (weight of the
cellophane bag and the twist tie) must first be deducted from
the total gross weight.

Then, the weight of the individual wrappers must also be


deducted. This weight is proportional to the number of
candies in the bag. To determine this weight, two methods can
be used: 1) candies are unwrapped and the individual
wrappers are weighed, or 2) it is calculated using the
percentage tare value (%T) and the gross weight.

The first method, which is a destructive method, should be


used by the IWC manufacturers or importers to calculate the
percentage tare value applicable to their products. This
percentage tare value should then be provided to retailers so
that they can use the second method which is non-destructive.

Method to be used by the manufacturer or importer for


determining Percentage tare value (%T):

1) Ensure the scale is indicating zero (0).


2) Select a minimum sample of 25 candies.
3) Unwrap the candies, place the unwrapped candies aside
for further weighing, and weigh the wrappers. The total
weight of the wrappers must be at least ten times greater
than the increment size (e.g. at least 20 grams if the scale
has 2 gram increments). If not, unwrap more candies and
add wrappers on the scale until the target weight is
reached.
4) Record the total weight of the wrappers. This is the tare
weight (TW).
5) Leave all the wrappers on the scale platter and add all the
candies that were unwrapped. Weigh all wrappers and
candies together and record this as the gross weight
(GW).
6) Calculate the percentage tare value.

%T = TW x 100%
GW

where:
%T = Percentage Tare Value
TW = Tare Weight
GW = Gross Weight

Appendix A - 32
Quantum Scale System

Hobart Recommended
Class Structure

☛ Note
The pages that follow are an excerpt from the Hobart PLU
Scales Product Look-Up Data Standards Workbook, F-2066 (R3-
91). For the complete workbook, request Form 2066 (R3-91)
from your local Hobart office.

Whenever an item is weighed on a Hobart PLU Scale, the


total’s information (i.e., the number of packages, pounds
and dollars weighed) are stored in the Scale’s memory.
These totals are stored by individual items, but they can also
be stored by groups of items, called Classes.

For example, in the meat department, the item file can be


easily grouped into major commodities such as BEEF,
PORK, VEAL, etc. The major commodities can then be
grouped into their primal cuts such as CHUCK, RIB, LOIN,
GROUND, etc. This allows you to monitor major groups of
items (classes), instead of having to monitor each individual
item.

The chart on the following pages shows the Hobart


Recommended Class Structure, including a detailed
structure for the Meat Department. The class descriptions
have been established in accordance with the UPC Council
Standards, and the Class Numbers have been assigned
using PLU’s 009000-009989. (These numbers were chosen
because not many retailers are using these upper level
numbers as PLU’s in their own files.) The numbers and
descriptions can be changed as needed in order to customize
the file for each individual retailer, but this class system
should be used in the absence of a preferred alternative.
Other random weight departments should be structured
according to the needs of the department’s merchandisers.

A - 33 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Appendix A - 34
Quantum Scale System

A - 35 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Appendix A - 36
Quantum Scale System

Quantum Function In the event you want to move to a specific scale function,
Codes you can press the two-digit function code to move directly
to that operation without going through all the menus and
screens. The following chart is grouped by categories and
details the function codes, the functions they select and the
operator access level associated with it.

Change Function Code Function Access Level


Product
9 Batch Price Changes 4
10 All Fields 5
11 Unit Price 4
12 Delete Product/Class 5
13 Tare 5
14 Shelf Life 5
15 Class (Change a Reporting Class No. in 5
a PLU Record)
16 Price Fields 5
17 Create/Edit a Class Record 5
18 Time Stamp Changes (Set a Date & 5
Time for changes to take effect)

Totals Function Code Function Access Level

19 Collect Totals via MiniNet II 5


20 Configure Totals Types 7
21 Clear All Totals Records 7
22 Clear One Product’s Totals 7
23 Clear One Total’s Type for All PLU’s 7
24 Clear All Product Totals 7
25 Clear All Hourly Totals 7
26 Clear All Operator Totals 7
27 Void a Product’s Totals 7
28 Void an Operator’s Totals 7
29 Void an Hour’s Totals 7
40 View Product Totals 5
41 View Operator Totals 5
42 View Hourly Totals 5

A - 37 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Scale Setup Function Code Function Access Level

30 Setup Flashkeys 3
38 Setup Marquee Message Modes 3
39 Setup Timed Marquee Messages 3
46 Select Special Fields to Print on a Label 9
47 Label Text Names 9
48 Label Information 9
49 Scale ID & Store Information 5
50 Setup Operator IDs 9
51 Set Cassette/Disk Parameters 7
52 Set Network Parameters 7
54 Set What the Operator Can Modify 7
55 Change Date & Time 3
56 Setup Normal Scale Operation 9
57 Graphics 5
58 Label Types 5
59 Itemized Labels 5

BackUp/ Function Code Function Access Level


Restore
81 Restore from Diskette or Cassette 3
82 BackUp to Diskette or Cassette 3
83 Add Changes from Diskette or 3
Cassette
84 Update Scales via MiniNet II 3
85 Update Changes via MiniNet II 3
86 Unmark Changed Items 3
87 Select Data to Transfer 5
88 Bad Record Scan 3
89 BackUp Changes to Diskette or 3
Cassette

☛ Note
Creating Supervisor Macros requires Access Level 9.

Appendix A - 38
Quantum Scale System

Print Reports Function Code Function Access Level

60 Print All Product Totals 5


61 Print Product Totals by Range of PLU’s 5
62 Print All Operator Totals 5
63 Print All Hourly Totals 5
64 Print Hourly Totals by Range of Hours 5
65 Print All Totals Reports 5
66 Print All Product List 5
67 Print Product List by Range of PLU’s 5
68 Print Product Review - All 5
69 Print Product Review by Range of 5
PLU’s
70 Print Flashkey Groups 3
71 Print Operator ID List 9
72 Print All Special Messages 3
73 Print Spec. Messages for a Range of 3
Spec. Messages
74 Print All Expanded Text 3
75 Print Expanded Text for a Range of 3
Expanded Text
76 Print All Marquee Messages 3
77 Print Marquee Messages for a Range of 3
Marquee Messages
78 Print Configuration 7
79 Print Cutting Test Report 3
90 Print All Time Stamp Changes 5
91 Print Time Stamp Changes by PLU 5
Range
92 Print Operator Changes 9
95 Print All Label Types 3
96 Print Labels Types by Range of Label 3
Types
97 Print All Graphics 3
98 Print Graphics by Range of Graphics 3

Miscellaneous Function Code Function Access Level

43 Operator Changes 9
7 Delete Time Stamp Changes 9
37 View Network Communications 3
Report

A - 39 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Operator Access The following chart is grouped by Access Level and details
Levels the functions and function codes associated with each level
of access.

☛ Note
Remember, if you select an upper level access code, you can
access all functions from lower levels.

Access Level 3 Function Code


Add Changes from Diskette or Cassette 83
Backup Changes to Diskette or Cassette 89
Backup to Diskette or Cassette 82
Bad Record Scan 88
Change Date & Time 55
Print Cutting Test Report 79
Print All Expanded Text 74
Print All Graphics 97
Print All Label Types 95
Print All Marquee Messages 76
Print All Special Messages 72
Print Expanded Text by Range 75
Print Flashkey Groups 70
Print Graphics by Range 98
Print Label Types by Range 96
Print Marquee Msg. by Range 77
Print Special Msg. by Range 73
Restore from Diskette or Cassette 81
Setup Flashkeys 30
Setup Marquee Message Modes 38
Setup Timed Marquee Msg. 39
Unmark Changed Items 86
Update Scales via MiniNet II 84
Update Changes via MiniNet II 85
View Network Comm. Report 37

Appendix A - 40
Quantum Scale System

Access Level 4 Function


Code
Batch Price Changes 9
Unit Price 11

Access Level 5 Function


Code
All Fields 10
Class 15
(Change a Reporting Class in a PLU Record)
Collect Totals via MiniNet II 19
Create/Edit a Class Record 17
Delete Product/Class 12
Graphics 57
Itemized Labels 59
Label Types 58
Price Fields 16
Print All Hourly Totals 63
Print All Operator Totals 62
Print All Product List 66
Print All Product Totals 60
Print All Time Stamp Changes 90
Print All Totals Reports 65
Print Hourly Totals by Range of Hours 64
Print Product List by Range of PLU’s 67
Print Product Review - All 68
Print Product Review by Range of PLU’s 69
Print Product Totals by Range of PLU’s 61
Print Time Stamp Changes by Range 91
Scale ID & Store Information 49
Select Data to Transfer 87
Shelf Life 14
Tare 13
Time Stamp Changes 18
(Set a Date & Time for changes)
View Product Totals 40
View Operator Totals 41
View Hourly Totals 42

A - 41 Appendix
Quantum Scale System

Access Level 7 Function


Code
Clear All Hourly Totals 25
Clear All Operator Totals 26
Clear All Product Totals 24
Clear All Totals Records 21
Clear One Product’s Totals 22
Clear One Total’s Type for All PLU’s 23
Configure Totals Types 20
Print Configuration 78
Set Cassette/Disk Parameters 51
Set Network Parameters 52
Set What the Operator Can Modify 54
Void an Hour’s Totals 29
Void an Operator’s Totals 28
Void a Product’s Totals 27

Access Level 9 Function


Code
Delete Time Stamp Changes 7
Label Information 48
Label Text Names 47
Operator Changes 43
Print Operator Changes 92
Print Operator ID List 71
Select Special Fields to Print on a Label 46
Setup Operator IDs 50
Setup Normal Scale Operation 56

Appendix A - 42
Quantum Scale System

Glossary

G-1 Glossary
Quantum Scale System

Glossary

A
Abstract Notation Syntax One A language used in OSI and TCP/IP networks to define
(ASN.1) data types for use in network management.

Address An identifiable location. A location within memory. A


location of a node within a network. A way of identifying a
network, sub network, or node.

Address Mask A way of omitting certain parts of an IP Address in order to


reach the target destination without broadcasting an
address to unnecessary LAN segments or sub networks. It is
also referred to as a subnet mask. The address mask uses the
32-bit IP Addressing scheme. A variation of 255.255.255.255
is used.

Address Resolution The mapping of an IP Address to a hardware address. In the


TCP/IP suite of protocols, Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP) performs this function.

API Application Program Interface. Defined routines that are


callable services by a program.

Application Layer The topmost layer in the OSI reference model that aids in
the identification of communicating partners.

Auto Look-Up This feature automatically looks up the product after a set
number of digits has been entered. This feature is
configured in Scale Setup by your Supervisor.

B
Backbone Used to refer to a set of nodes and links connected together
compromising a network. It is also used to refer to the
physical media that connects components to a network.

Barrier Determines the strength of how a film can pass oxygen


through it.

Baseband A type of channel where data transmission is carried across


only one communication channel. Baseband supports one
signal transmission at a time. Ethernet is an example of
baseband technology.

BER Bit Error Rate

Glossary G-2
Quantum Scale System

Bit rate The rate, usually expressed in seconds, that bits are
transmitted.

Bridge A network device capable of connecting networks using


similar protocols.

Broadband A range of frequencies divided into narrow bands, each of


which can be used for different transmission purposes. Also
known as wideband.

Broadcast Simultaneous transmission of the same data to all nodes


connected to a network.

By Count An item which is priced by the number of items rather than


by weight (i.e., 3 for $1.00).

C
Carrier Sense A signal generated at the physical network layer to inform
the data link layer that one or more nodes are transmitting
on the underlying medium.

Carrier Sense Multiple Access This is the media access control protocol. Nodes using this
with Collision Detection protocol listen to the medium to which they are attached. As
(CSMA/CD) long as there is no signal on the medium being monitored, a
node listening can send data across the medium.

Cents Off The monetary amount to be subtracted from the unit price.

Class A way of grouping similar items.

Client A program that can be invoked by a user; a user being a


human or a program.

Client/Server Architecture A general phrase used to refer to a distributed application


environment where a program exists that can initiate a
session and a program exists to answer requests of a client.

Client/Server Terms used to refer to a peer to peer method of operation of


applications within hosts.

Collision An event that occurs when two or more nodes broadcast on


the same network medium at the same time.

Collision Detection The ability of a device to detect if a collision has occurred.

Conventional Rounding A rounding convention. When the number is greater than or


equal to 5 you round up , when the number is less than 5
you round down.

Crosstalk Signals that interfere with another signal being transmitted.

G-3 Glossary
Quantum Scale System

D
Daemon A common UNIX program that operates unattended,
performing standard services. This type of program can be
triggered by time intervals for execution.

Datagram A basic unit of data that traverses a TCP/IP internet.

Data Link The part of a node that is controlled by a data link protocol.
It is the logical connection between two nodes.

Data Link Protocol A prescribed way of handling the establishment,


maintenance, and termination of a logical link between two
nodes.

Destination Address In an Ethernet network, this refers to the target node


address.

Discount Price (/lb.) The Frequent Shopper price per pound, which is lower than
the unit price per pound.

Distributed Processing I/O processing, control functions, and actual processing is


dispersed among two or more nodes.

Domain Name System A service used with TCP/IP to replace the previous method
of keeping track with host names, aliases, and internet
addresses. The domain name service is a distributed
database used to convert node names to internet addresses.

Dotted Decimal Notation A representation of addressing typically used in expressing


internet protocol addresses. For example, 137.1.1.100 is an
internet address identifying a network and host.

Double Byte Character Set A character set where alphanumeric characters are
represented by two bytes. Examples of languages where this
is used include: Japanese, Chinese, and Korean.

E
EAN13 Barcode The Ean13 Barcode is based on the 12 Digit UPC Code and is
widely used in international markets. EAN13 uses numeric
data only.

Glossary G-4
Quantum Scale System

Encapsulation A technique used by layered network protocols where, as


data travels down the network layers, headers and trailers
are added to represent that layer. For example, when data is
passed from an application above the TCP layer, TCP adds a
header and a trailer encapsulating the data; likewise, this
datagram is passed to the IP layer where IP wraps an IP
header and trailer around the TCP portion, and so on for
each layer. When this arrives at the target host, the reverse
occurs, as the data travels up the layers, respective headers
and trailers are removed.

Ethernet A data link level protocol. It comprises layers one and two
when compared to the OSI reference model. Ethernet is a
broadcast technology and can be implemented with
different media types, such as thick or thin coaxial cable or
twisted pair cable. Ethernet uses CSMA/CD mechanism to
access the medium.

Ethernet Address A 48 bit address, commonly referred to as a hard address.


This address identifies an Ethernet network interface card
(NIC), thus identifying a host hardware address.

F
Fixed Fluid Volume Item An item sold by a predetermined volume (i.e., Fresh-
squeezed orange juice from a Juice Bar is always 16 ounces).

Fixed Weight Item An item priced by a pre-determined weight (i.e., bread is


always 16 oz.).

Fixed Weight - By Count PLU An item normally sold by a specific weight, but in this case,
sold by count (i.e., 2 - 16 oz. loaves of bread for $.79).

Flashkey A programmed preset key used to provide a descriptive on-


screen look up of Product Numbers, Operator IDs, Macro
Numbers, or Go To Groups.

Flashkey Home Group This is the first Flashkey Screen you will come to after
Pressing [ENTER] on the Start a Run Screen. It can be
different for each scale in the department or store.

Fluid Ounce Item An item sold by the Fluid Ounce (i.e., Fresh-squeezed
orange juice from a Juice Bar).

Fractional Pricing Enables you to price items by the 1/4 or 1/2 pound or by
100 grams if operating in the metric mode. This pricing
mode is determined by your Supervisor and configured by a
Hobart technician during scale setup. This mode is disabled
if Pounds for Pricing is enabled.

G-5 Glossary
Quantum Scale System

Frame Refers to the data and all headers and trailers.

Frame Check Sequence (FCS) A mathematical function used with bits in a frame. The FCS
is appended to the frame and used by the receiving end to
recalculate the value to determine if an error has occurred.

Frame Relay A switching mechanism for routing frames as quickly as


possible.

Function Codes Numbers which identify Supervisor functions and take you
directly to the function by entering its two-digit code. These
codes are listed in the Appendix.

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) A TCP/IP based application used for transferring files from
one system to another. Part of FTP provides password
protection.

G
Gateway A networking device that translates all protocols of one type
network into all protocols of another type network. (i.e.
Ethernet to Token Ring).

Graphic (User) Provided the Label Type can accommodate a graphic, there
is a list of available graphics (listed by number) found in the
Appendix.

H
Hardware Address A low-level address associated with each node on the
network. This address is generally the address related to the
interface card in the node. This may also be referred to as
the Ethernet Address.

I
Internet Control Message Protocol A protocol that works in conjunction with the Internet
(ICMP) Protocol (IP) that handles error messages.

Interface A shared point between two entities, either software or


hardware.

Internet Address A 32-bit address used to identify hosts and networks.

Glossary G-6
Quantum Scale System

Internet Protocol (IP) The part of the TCP/IP protocol that handles routing of
data.

IP Datagram The basic unit of information passed through a TCP/IP


network. This datagram contains source and destination
addresses.

ISO International Standards Organization

ISO Reference Model The networking model created by ISO defining seven layers
of a network, isolating functions within each layer. It is used
as a baseline for comparison with other network types.

J
Jitter A situation that can occur with a 10BaseT network where
signals are out of phase with each other.

Julian Date The numeric day of the year designates the date (i.e.,
February 10 = 41). If configured, this date type may be
printed in a date field.

L
Label Stock Labels may be arranged into a roll in several ways: Die Cut,
Continuous Paper or Linerless Paper. Each type has its own
purpose and use.

Label Type The Label Type determines the size, orientation and fields to
print on the label.

Local Area Network (LAN) A collection of computer related equipment connected in


such a way that communication can occur between all nodes
connected to the medium.

Learning Bridge Serves as a bridge but has the capability to learn what nodes
are connected and route data accordingly.

Leased Line A dedicated communication line between two points.

Link Used to refer to a connection between two end points.

Logical Link Control The upper part of the data link sublayer protocol
responsible for governing the exchange of data between two
endpoints.

G-7 Glossary
Quantum Scale System

M
Macro A series of keystrokes that can be recalled by entering a
reference number (Macro Number).

Management Information Base A database containing configuration and statistical


(MIB) information about nodes on a network.

Maximum Transmission Unit The largest datagram that can transverse a given network
(MTU) such as Ethernet or Token Ring.

Media Access Control (MAC) The lower half of the data link sublayer. It is responsible for
framing data and controlling the physical link between two
stations.

Medium Access Unit (MAU) A device for central connection of nodes operating in a
network.

N
Name Resolution The process of mapping aliases to an address. The domain
name system provides a mechanism to perform this
function.

Network Administrator The person designated to maintain the network. This person
should have working knowledge of network wiring,
requirements, etc. See System Administrator.

Network Basic Input Output An IBM and compatible network programming interface.
Operating System (NETBIOS)

Network A collection of computers and related devices connected so


that communication can occur.

Network Address In TCP/IP networks, this refers to the IP Address of a node.

Network File System (NFS) Sun MicroSystems protocols that permit clients to mount
remote directories onto their own local file system, thus
appearing to be local.

Network Interface Card (NIC) A generic reference to a networking interface card.

Node Refers to different types of networking devices.

Glossary G-8
Quantum Scale System

O
On Screen Library A list of products organized by Class; with the PLU number
as the primary key. Press [HELP] to access the library
whenever you are on a “Product/Class Number” field.

Open Systems Interconnection A set of ISO standards relating to data communications.


(OSI)

Operator ID Identification number assigned to scale operators so that


your Supervisor can track various totals information by
operator.

P
Packet In TCP/IP networks, this refers to the data passing between
the internet layer and the data link layer. A packet includes
the IP header, TCP header, and data.

Pathname The complete string of information that must be entered into


a system in order to access or identify a file.

Packet InterNet Groper (PING) A program used with TCP/IP networks. The PING program
provides a way of testing access to a destination by sending
an ICMP echo request, then waiting for a response from the
target host.

Percent Added The percent that is added to the total price in the instance of
additional service.

Percent Off The percentage of the total price which is subtracted from
the total price.

Point to Point Protocol (PPP) A protocol that has the ability to provide host to network
and router to router connections over synchronous and
asynchronous lines.

Port In TCP/IP, a number used to identify applications. In


general, a port is referred to as an entry or exit point. Ports
are associated with TCP or UDP transport protocols.

Pounds for Pricing Allows you to price items x Lbs. for $ _____ (x can be 2-9).
This pricing mode is determined by your Supervisor and
configured by a Hobart technician during scale setup. This
mode is disabled if Fractional Pricing is enabled.

PrePack To package items before offering them for sale to the


consumer (i.e., meats, cheeses, etc.).

G-9 Glossary
Quantum Scale System

Primary Printer The printer that is built-in to the scale system.

Printhead The surface of the printer that comes in contact with the
label stock.

Product Life The number of days before a perishable product should be


consumed or frozen (i.e., Use By, Freeze By or Best Before).

Proportional Tare Thje percentage of the total product weight that is the
“wrapper” for the individual pieces.

Protocol A set of rules governing the method of operation.

Protocol Conversion Changing one type of protocol to another type of protocol.

R
Random Weight An item that need to be weighed before it can be priced.

Random Weight - By Count PLU An item which is priced by the number of items per package
rather than by weight (i.e., 3 for $1.00).

Repeater A network device that repeats signals so the length of a


network can be extended.

Reset Button Use this button to reset the scale to the Start a Run Screen in
the unlikely event the scale stops responding to keyboard
input.

Rezero Defines zero weight on weigher as the current weight on the


platter. Used to add/remove platter tare or after Power-up
when weight was accidentally left on the platter.

Round Down (Truncate) A rounding convention. Regardless of the number, you


always round down (i.e. 8.659 rounds to 8.65).

Round Up A rounding convention. Any number greater than zero (0),


you always round up (i.e. 8.659 rounds to 8.66; 8.650 rounds
to 8.65).

Routing The process of determining which path is to be used for data


transmission.

Routing Table A list of valid paths through which data can be transmitted.

RS-232-C A physical layer specification for connecting devices.

Glossary G - 10
Quantum Scale System

S
Save/Recall The Save/Recall Key is used to begin or end a macro
function (creating, executing or deleting macros).

Secondary Printer A printer attached to the scale system by means of a cable.


It is typically used to print secondary labels or NutriFacts.

Segment A protocol data unit that consists of TCP header information


and optional data. Parts of a network; typically Ethernet
LANs are divided into parts, generally referred to as
segments.

Sell By Date This number is the date that the store must sell the item. It
is calculated by taking today’s date and adding it to the
Shelf Life (from the item record).

Server An application that answers requests from clients.

Shelf Life The number of days that a perishable product may stay on
the shelf.

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol In TCP/IP, an application including a client and a server
(SMTP) providing E-Mail services for all hosts with TCP/IP
software installed and enabled.

Serial Line Internet Protocol A protocol used to utilize Internet protocol over serial lines,
(SLIP) such as a switched telephone line.

Socket In TCP/IP, a socket is an addressable point that consists of


the IP Address and the TCP or UDP port number. It
provides access to TCP/IP protocols.

Socket Address The complete designation of a TCP/IP node. It consists of a


32-bit IP Address and a 16 bit port number.

SubClass The second-tier of the class structure (i.e., Class = Meat,


SubClass = Chicken).

Subnet The part of a TCP/IP network identified by a portion of the


internet address.

Subnet Address The part of the IP Address that identifies the subnetwork.

Subnet Mask A way of isolating broadcasts to the desired network(s).

System Administrator The person responsible for maintaining the ScaleMaster


system. See Network Administrator.

G - 11 Glossary
Quantum Scale System

T
Tare (Fixed Tare) The weight of the packing material for which the customer
does not pay.

Total Tare This tare is calculated by adding Fixed Tare and


Proportional Tare.
(Fixed Tare + Proportional Tare = Total Tare)

TCP Transmission Control Protocol. A transport layer protocol


that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. TCP provides a
reliable stream mechanism performing re-transmission
when a positive acknowledgment is not returned to the
source from the destination node.

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol. TCP/IP


is an upper layer networking protocol. It is client/server
based at the application layer.

Telnet A TCP/IP application using TCP as a transport mechanism.


It consists of a client and a server. All TCP/IP protocol
suites have this application because it is part of the
definition of TCP/IP.

Throughput The amount of data that can be successfully moved across a


medium or processed within a certain time period.

Token Ring A lower layer networking protocol using a token passing


method controlling data traffic. It is connection oriented at a
data link level.

Topology The configuration of network devices. Examples include:


BUS, Star, Ring, Dual Ring, etc.

Totals Type A means of categorizing totals information by specific types.


As an example, there can be a Totals Type for items that
have been repackaged or rewrapped (for whatever reason).

Traffic A generic term used to describe the amount of data on a


network backbone at a given period in time.

Transceiver A network device required in baseband networks. It takes a


digital signal and puts it on the analog baseband medium.
Transceivers are devices that also sense collisions.

Glossary G - 12
Quantum Scale System

U
Unit Price (/lb.) The price per unit of measure

UPC Numbering System The UPC Number System identifies the type of Bar Code
used by the item. Random Weight items use number
systems 02 or 04. Fluid ounces and fixed weight items use
UPC number system 00, 04, 06, 07.

Number System UPC Bar Code


02 2XXXXXB$$$$C
04 4XXXXXB$$$$C
00 0VVVVVPPPPPC
04 4VVVVVPPPPPC
06 6VVVVVPPPPPC
07 7VVVVVPPPPPC

XXXXX = UPC Number (Product Identifying)


$$$$ = Price (99.99)
B = 2nd Check Digit (Price Check Sum Digit; used for error detection)
C = Check Digit (Check Sum Digit; used for error detection)
VVVVV = Vendor Number or Manufacturer Number
PPPPP = Product Number

User Data Protocol (UDP) A transport layer protocol in the TCP/IP protocol suite.
Unlike TCP it does not provide re-transmission.

V
Virtual Appearing to exist, but in reality the appearance is achieved
by functions or processes.

W
Well Known Port In TCP/IP, an address for an expressed purpose generally
agreed upon by TCP/IP users.

Weigh Type The way to select the mode that the scale will operate in (i.e.,
Auto Weigh, Manual Weigh, etc.).

Wide Area Network (WAN) A network spanning large geographic distances.

G - 13 Glossary
Quantum Scale System

123
10Base2 A reference to the cabling used in an Ethernet network. It
literally means 10Megabits per second, using baseband
signaling, with a continuous cable segment length of 100
meters and a maximum of 2 segments.

10Base5 A reference to the cabling used in an Ethernet network. It


literally means 10Megabits per second, using baseband
signaling, with 5 continuous segments, not exceeding 100
meters per segment.

10BaseT A reference to the cabling used in an Ethernet network.


Meaning 10Megabits per second, using baseband signaling,
and twisted pair cabling.

Glossary G - 14
Quantum Scale System

Index

I-1 Index
Quantum Scale System

—A— —C—
Access Levels, Operator, A-40 (Change Product Continued...)
Access Point, 14-5
Accumulate Items, 7-86 All Price Fields, 3-76
Adapter Board, PC, 14-6 By Count PLU’s, 3-78
Add a New Product (Add a New PLU), 3-14 Fixed Weight PLU’s, 3-79
Add Changes from Diskette, 6-5, 6-19 Fluid Ounce PLU’s, 3-80
Address, IP, 13-2 Random Weight PLU’s, 3-77
See Also IP Address Batch Price Changes, 3-81
Advertised Price, 11-2, 11-3 By Class, 3-82
Activating, 11-6 By PLU Range, 3-84
Advertised Sale Pricing, 11-3, 11-4 Change Another Field, 3-7, 3-9
Reactivating Regular Price, 11-8 Change Pricing Mode, 3-7
Retail Comparison, 11-3, 11-5 Pounds for Pricing, 3-7
Value Packing, 11-3, 11-4 Fractional Pricing, 3-7
Advertised Sale Pricing, 11-3, 11-4 Changing All Fields, 3-81
All Totals Changing a Product’s Reporting Class, 3-74
Print, 5-5, 5-11 Changing Shelf Life/Product Life, 3-73
Clear, 4-17, 4-27 Changing Tare, 3-69
Antenna, 14-6 Changing Unit Price, 3-68
Directional, 14-6 Common“ F” Keys, 3-7
Omni-directional, 14-6 Creating a Class, 3-10
Assignment Form, IntraNet Scale IP Address, 13-4 Delete This Product, 3-7, 3-8
Auto Look-Up, 7-98 Editing a Class, 3-13
Auto Look-Up, Self Service, 9-8 Fixed Weight PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17, 3-18
Fluid Ounce PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17, 3-18
Function Codes, A-37
Making Changes to Product Information, 3-65
—B— Menu Screen (Accessing), 3-66
Backup Changes to Diskette, 6-5, 6-11 Random Weight PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17
Backup or Restore with Intranet, 6-23 Security Label, 3-7
Send Changes via Intranet, 6-25 Changes
Send to Scales via Intranet, 6-23 Immediate, 3-6, 3-8, 3-66
Backup/Restore, 1-4, 6-3 Time Stamp, 3-3, 3-62, 3-66, 3-68, 3-69
Backup/Restore Flowchart, 6-2 Print, 5-23
Backup/Restore Function Codes, A-38 Changing Flashkey Height/Width, 7-8
Backup to Diskette, 6-5, 6-6 Class, 3-3, 3-4, 3-10, 3-13, 3-82, A-33
Bad Record Scan, 6-3, 6-5, 6-18, 6-22 Creating New, 3-10
Batch Price Changes, Making, 3-81 Editing, 3-13
Bonus Points, 11-2, 11-16 Reporting, 3-11, 3-12, 3-74, 3-75
Random Weight & Fixed Weight PLU’s, 11-16 Structure, Recommended, 3-4, 3-10, A-33
Random Weight-By Count PLU’s, 11-16 Clear All Hourly Totals, 4-17, 4-25
Setting Up, 11-17 Clear All Operator Totals, 4-17, 4-24
By Count PLU, 3-18, 3-78, 4-10, 4-13, 4-15 Clear All Product Totals, 4-17, 4-19
Clear All Totals, 4-17, 4-27
Clear One Product’s Totals, 4-17, 4-20
Clear One Totals Type for All Products, 4-17, 4-22
—C— Clear Totals, 4-17
Clear Totals Menu, 4-3
Cassette/Disk, 7-103 Client Scale, 13-3, A-2, A-5
Cassette Player/Recorder, 2-3, 6-6 See also IntraNet
Change Product, 1-4, 3-66, 3-76, 3-81 Collect Totals via MiniNet II, 4-3, 4-40
Accessing, 3-5, 3-66 Communication Connections, 2-3
Add a New Product (Add a New PLU) 3-14 Communications, 7-102
All Fields, 3-81 Cassette/Disk, 7-103
See also Add a New Product Network, 7-105
Configuration, 6-3
Configuration Report, Print, 5-3, 5-43

Index I-2
Quantum Scale System

—C— —D—
(Continued...) (Continued...)

Configure Totals Types, 4-3, 4-34 Delete


Configuring Frequent Shopper, 11-12 Expanded Text, 3-40
Configuring Network Card, 14-7 Marquee Messages, 3-60
Spectrum 24, 14-7 NutriFacts, 3-48
Spectrum 802.11, 14-7 Product, 3-8
Telxon/Aironet 2.4, 14-9 Special Messages, 3-29
Telxon/Aironet 802.11, 14-7 Deleting a Macro, A-30
Telxon/Aironet 900, 14-11 Delete Flashkey, 7-18
Configuring Self Service, 9-3 Delete Flashkey Group, 7-20
See also Self Service Configuring Delete Time Stamp Changes, 8-3
Configuring Wireless TCP/IP Networks, 14-7 Description, 3-11, 3-15, 3-16
Connections Direct Sequence, 14-2, 14-4
Communications, 2-3 Directional Antenna, 14-6
Electrical, 2-2 Disk Drive, Floppy, 2-3
Consumer Default Merchandising Screen, Self Service, 9-12 Disk Player/Recorder, 2-3, 6-6, 6-15, 6-19
Continuous Paper Labels, 7-31 Die Cut Labels, 7-31
Control Panel Overview, 2-4
Copy and Edit
Expanded Text, 3-33
Marquee Messages, 3-54
—E—
NutriFacts, 3-44 EAN13 Barcode, 12-2
Special Messages, 3-24 Changing an Existing PLU, 12-9
Copy Text, A-25 Entering a New Product, 12-5
Creating Macros, A-28 Examples, A-17
Create New Itemized Labels, 12-11
Expanded Text, 3-31 Setting Default Prefix for PLUs, 12-3
Marquee Messages, 3-52 Setting Up, 12-3
NutriFacts, 3-43 Understanding…, A-16
Special Messages, 3-22 Edit
Creating Flashkeys, 7-10 Expanded Text, 3-37
Creating Operator ID’s, 7-3 Marquee Messages, 3-58
Creating Permanent or Daily Messages, 7-110 NutriFacts, 3-47
Creating a Product Group Flashkey, 7-15 Special Messages, 3-27
Custom Labels, 7-83 Edit Home Flashkey Group, 7-17
Customer Loyalty Programs, 11-10 Editor
Cut Text, A-23 Marquee, A-27
Cutting Test Report, Printing 5-13 Text, A-20
Electrical Connections, 2-2
Ethernet Card, 13-2, A-12
—D— Ethernet Networks, A-6
Hubs, A-6
Daily Message Crossover Function, A-7
Creating, 7-110 Patch Cord Wiring, A-7
Data Type Straight Trough Patch Cord, A-8
Flashkeys/Macros, 6-3 Crossover Patch Cord, A-9
Label Data, 6-3 Wiring, A-6
Operator Data, 6-3 Wiring Identification, A-10
PLU Data, 6-3 Wiring Illustration, 13-6
Scale Configuration, 6-3 Executing a Macro, A-29
Store Name/Number, 6-3 Expanded Text, 3-3, 3-19, 3-20, 3-21, 3-31
Date Copy and Edit, 3-33
Julian, 7-33 Create New, 3-31
Sell By, 7-33 Delete, 3-40
Date/Time, 7-94 Edit, 3-37
Date/Time, Self Service, 9-4 Print, 5-32
Department IP Addresses Use, 3-36
IntraNet, 13-16 External Disk Drive, 6-6
ScaleMaster, 13-8

I-3 Index
Quantum Scale System

—F— —H—
FCC Note, 1-2 HELP Key Functions, 2-10
FCC Rules, 1-2 About the Keyboard, 2-11
Fields, Reviewing Available, 7-36 Basic Help, 2-10, 2-12
Fixed Weight PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17, 3-18, 3-71, 3-79 Help on “F” Keys, 2-11
Flashkeys, 2-2, 2-4, 6-3, 7-6 Moving Through the System, 2-10, 2-13
Changing Height/Width, 7-8 HELP, Product Number Lookup, 2-5, 2-10
Clear Group, 7-22 Home Flashkey Group, 7-17
Copy Group, 7-27 See also Flashkeys
Creating, 7-10 Hourly Totals, 4-7, 5-5
Deleting, 7-18, 7-20 Clear, 4-17, 4-25
Edit Home Flashkey Group, 7-17 Collect, 7-36
Group/Product, 7-15, 7-19 View, 4-14
Insert Group, 7-23 Void, 4-32
Move Group, 7-25 Print, 5-9
Positioning, 7-8 Hobart Recommended Class Structure, A-33
Printing, 5-25 Hub, A-12
Print Reports, 5-3
View Group, 7-16
Flowchart
Backup/Restore, 6-2 —I—
Change Product, 3-2
Immediate Changes, 3-6, 3-8, 3-66
Miscellaneous Menu, 8-2
Information Tracker, 8-5
Print Reports, 5-2
Network Report, 8-6
Scale Setup, 7-2
Operator Changes, 8-8
Totals, 4-2
Insert Flashkey Group, 7-23
Fluid Ounce PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17, 3-18, 3-80
Item Tickets, Selecting, 7-88
Forced Price, 3-86
Itemized Receipts, Selecting, 7-90
Forced Tare, 3-72
IntraNet, 6-4, 8-3, 8-5, 8-6, 13-5, A-3
Frequencies, Understanding, 14-2
Assignment Form, 13-4
Direct Sequence, 14-2, 14-4
Example, 13-19
Frequency Hopping, 14-2, 14-3
Send Changes via…, 6-25
Frequency Hopping, 14-2, 14-3
Send to Scales via…, 6-23
Frequency Protocols, 14-4
Setting Up, 13-13
Frequent Shopper, 11-2, 11-10
Department IP Addresses, 13-16
Activating, 11-13
Saving IP Changes, 13-18
Configuration Questions, 11-11
Scale IP Address, 13-14
Configuring, 11-12
Server Scale IP Address, 13-14
Reactivating Regular Price, 11-15
Subnet Mask, 13-15
Function Codes, Quantum, A-37
Well Known Port Number, 13-15
IntraNet/ScaleMaster, 13-20, A-5
Reading Data From Scales, A-5
—G— Sending Data to Scales, A-5
Setting Up, 13-20
Gateway IP Address, 13-9 IP Addresses, 13-2
Examples, 13-11 Assignment Form, 13-4
Setting Up, 13-10 Setting Up on Existing Network, 13-3
General Information, 1-4, 2-2 Setting Up on Isolated Network, 13-3
Glossary of Common Terms, G-2 See also IntraNet
Graphics, 7-84 See also ScaleMaster
Print, 5-40 Troubleshooting, A-11
Itemized Labels, 7-86
Itemized Labels, Setting Up EAN13 Barcode, 12-11

—J—
Julian Packed-on, 7-33
Julian Product Life, 7-33
Julian Sell By, 7-33

Index I-4
Quantum Scale System

—K— —M—
Keyboard, 2-3, 2-9, 2-10, 2-11 (Continued...)
Cherry, 2-9
IBM PC, 2-3 Marquee Messages, 3-3, 3-19, 3-20, 3-21, 3-46, 3-50, A-27
Key Tronic, 2-9 Copy and Edit, 3-54
Maxi Switch, 2-9 Create New, 3-52
Self Service, 9-3 Daily, 7-108, 7-110
Keypad, Produce, 9-16 Delete, 3-60
Keypad, Self Service, 9-3 Edit, 3-58
Permanent, 7-108, 7-110
Print, 5-35
Timed, 7-108, 7-113
—L— Use, 3-56
Label Data, 6-3 Marquee Modes, 7-108
Label Information, 7-37 Marquee Setup, 7-107
Label Related Item, Print, 5-28 Memory, 2-2
Print Expanded Text Menu, 5-32 Merchandising Programs, 11-2
Print Marquee Messages Menu, 5-35 Setting Up Your Scale, 11-2
Print Reports, 5-3, 5-28 Minimum Price Per Pound, Programming Security Label, 10-6
Print Reusable Text Menu, 5-29 MiniNet II, 6-3, 6-4, 6-23, A-6
Print Special Messages Menu, 5-29 Collect Totals via, 4-3, 4-41
Label, Select Special to Print, 7-33 Miscellaneous Function Codes, A-39
Label Stock Styles, 2-8, 7-31 Miscellaneous Menu
Continuous, 7-31 Overview, 8-3
Die Cut, 7-31 Print, 5-45
Linerless, 7-31 Miscellaneous Reports, Print, 5-3
Label Text Names, 7-34 MODNET, 2-3
Label Types, 7-40, 7-41 Move a Flashkey Group, 7-25
Label Types, Changing the Default, 7-37
Label Types, Self Service Default, 9-5
Labels, 7-30
By Family, Standard, 7-43 to 7-63 —N—
By Size, Standard, 7-64 to 7-80 Narrow Labels, 7-81
Custom, 7-83 Network Card, PC, 14-6
Itemized, 7-86 Configuring, 14-7
Menu, Using the, 7-32 See also Configuring Network Card
Narrow, 7-81 Network Configurations, A-2
Label Graphics, 7-84 IntraNet, A-3
L.E.D., 13-25 See also IntraNet
Link Quality, 14-13 MiniNet II, A-6
ScaleMaster, A-3
See also ScaleMaster
ScaleMaster/IntraNet, A-5
—M— Reading Data from the Scales, A-5
Macros, 6-3, A-28 Sending Data to the Scales, A-5
Creating, A-28 Understanding..., A-2
Deleting, A-30 Networks, Ethernet
Executing, A-29 See Ethernet Networks
Recording, A-28 Network IP Address, 13-10
Manual, How to Use, 1-4, 1-5 Setting Up, 13-10
Mark Text, A-22 Examples, 13-11
Marquee Editor, 3-20, 3-50, 3-52, 3-56, 3-59, A-27 Network Report, 8-6
Blink On/Blink Off, 3-50, A-27 NutriFacts Data, 3-19, 3-42
Clear, 3-50, A-27 Copy and Edit, 3-44
Frame, 3-50, A-27 Create New, 3-43
Hold, 3-50, A-27 Delete, 3-48
Roll, 3-50, A-27 Edit, 3-47
Scroll, 3-50, A-27
Scroll/Frame Speed, 3-50, A-27
Start/Stop Marquee Test, 3-50, A-27

I-5 Index
Quantum Scale System

—O— —P—
Omni-directional Antenna, 14-6 (Continued...)
On Screen Library, 2-2, 2-5, 2-10
Operator Access Levels, A-40 PLU, Text
Operate Mode, Return to, 8-9 Description, 3-11, 3-15, 3-16
Operator Changes, 5-45, 8-5, 8-8 Expanded Text
Print, 5-45 See also Expanded Text
Operator Data, 6-3 Marquee Messages
Creating, 7-3 See also Marquee Messages
List, 5-3 NutriFacts
Print, 5-26 See also Nutrifacts
Operator Log-on Required, 7-5 Special Messages
Operator/Security ID’s, Self Service, 9-6 See also Special Messages
Operator Totals, 4-7 PLU Data, 6-3
Clear, 4-17, 4-24 Portion Pricing, 11-2, 11-17
Print, 5-8 Activating, 11-18
View, 4-11 Setting Up, 11-20
Void, 4-31 Positioning the Flashkey, 7-8
Overview Power Cord, 2-2
Backup/Restore, 6-3 Power Key, 2-3, 2-4
Change Product, 3-3 Price Changes, 3-68
Configuring an EAN13 Barcode, 12-2 Pricing Mode, Change, 3-7
Control Panel, 2-4 Print
Interfacing the SLA or SLD with the Quantum, 10-2 All Operator Totals, 5-8
Miscellaneous Menu, 8-3 All Totals Reports, 5-11
Print Reports, 5-3 Configuration Report, 5-3, 5-43
Scale Setup, 7-3 Cutting Test Report, 5-13
Self Service, 9-2 Expanded Text Menu, 5-32
Supervisor Manual, 1-3 Flashkeys, 5-3, 5-25
Supervisor Mode, 2-14 Graphics, 5-40
Support File, 3-19 Hourly Totals, 5-9
Totals Menu, 4-3 Label Related Items Menu, 5-3, 5-28
Understanding Hardwired TCP/IP Scale Communication, 13-2 Label Types, 5-38
Working with Merchandising Programs, 11-2 Marquee Messages Menu, 5-35
Miscellaneous Menu, 5-45
Operator Changes, 5-3, 5-45
Operator ID List, 5-3, 5-26
—P— Product List Menu, 5-3, 5-19
Product Review Menu, 5-3, 5-21
Packed-on Date, 7-33
Product Totals Menu, 5-6
Parallel Port, 2-3
Products Menu, 5-18
Paste Text, A-24
Reusable Text Menu, 5-29
Percent Added, 11-2, 11-21
Special Messages Menu, 5-29
Activating, 11-21
Time Stamp Changes, 5-23
Reactivating Regular Price, 11-23
Totals Menu, 5-3, 5-5
Percentage Tare, A-30
Printer
Permanent Message, Creating, 7-110
Primary, 3-18
PING Test, 13-22
Secondary, 2-3, 3-18
Platter Tare, 3-72
Print Reports, 5-3
Player/Recorder
Configuration, 5-3, 5-43
Cassette, 2-3, 6-6
Cutting Test, 5-13
Disk, 2-3, 6-5, 6-6, 6-11, 6-15, 6-19
Expanded Text Menu, 5-32
PLU, EAN13 Barcode, 12-2, 12-3
Flashkeys, 5-3, 5-25
Default Prefix, 12-3
Marquee Messages Menu, 5-35
Existing PLU, 12-9
Miscellaneous Menu, 5-3, 5-45
New PLU, 12-5, 12-9
Operator Changes, 5-46
PLU, Programming a Security Label, 10-2

Index I-6
Quantum Scale System

—P— —R—
(Print Reports Continued...) (Continued...)

Operator ID List, 5-3, 5-26 Reusable Text Menu, Print, 5-29


Label Related Items Menu, 5-3, 5-28 Expanded Text Menu, 5-32
Reusable Text Menu, 5-29 Marquee Messages Menu, 5-35
Label Types, 5-38 Special Messages Menu, 5-29
Graphics, 5-40 Recording Available Fields, 7-36
Reusable Text Menu, 5-29 Rezero, 2-5
Special Messages Menu, 5-29
Product Information, 5-3 —S—
Time Stamp Changes, 5-23
Save/Recall, A-28
Totals, 5-3, 5-11
Save/Recall Key, A-28
Print Reports Menu, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5
Saving IP Changes
Accessing, 5-4
IntraNet, 13-18
Produce Keypad, 9-2, 9-16
ScaleMaster, 13-8
See also Self Service Produce Keypad, Using
Scale Communication, Testing
Product Life
See TCP/IP Connection, Testing
Changing, 3-73
Scale ID & Store Information, 7-100
Date, 7-33
Scale IP Address
Product List Menu, Print, 5-19
IntraNet, 13-14
Product Review Menu, Print, 5-21
ScaleMaster, 13-7
Products Menu, Print, 5-18
ScaleMaster, 6-3, 13-5, A-3
Product Totals, 4-7, 5-5
Example, 13-9
Clear, 4-17, 4-19
Gateway IP Address, 13-10, 13-11
Print, 5-6
Network IP Address, 13-10, 13-11
View, 4-8
Setting Up, 13-7
Void, 4-29
Department IP Address, 13-8
Product Totals Menu, Print, 5-6
Saving IP Changes, 13-8
Programming Minimum Price Per Pound, Security Label, 10-6
Scale IP Address, 13-7
Programming a Security Label for a PLU, 10-2
Server Scale IP Address, 13-8
New PLU, 10-3
Subnet Mask, 13-8
Existing PLU, 10-5
Well Known Port Number, 13-8
Programming Total Price Per Pound, Security Label, 10-6
Setting Up On Different Network
Proportional Tare (Percentage Tare), 3-18, 3-70, A-30
See Gateway IP Address
How the Percentage Tare Value is Calculated, A-31
ScaleMaster/IntraNet, A-5, 13-20
Percentage Tare Procedure, A-31
Example, 13-20
Reading Data from the Scales, A-5
Sending Data to the Scales, A-5
—Q— Setting Up, 13-20
Scale Operation, 7-91
Quantum Function Codes, A-37 Date/Time, 7-94
Scale ID & Store Information, 7-100
Set What the Operator Can Modify, 7-92
Setup Normal Scale Operation, 7-95
—R— Scale Setup, 1-4, 7-3
Creating Operator ID's, 7-3
Random Weight PLU’s, 3-15, 3-17, 3-77 Communications, 7-102
Reporting Class, 3-11, 3-12, 3-74
Flashkeys, 7-6
Reading Data From the Scales, A-5
Function Codes, A-37
Recording a Macro, A-28 Labels Menu, 7-32
Reset Button, 2-3 Marquee Setup, 7-107
Restore
Scale Operation, 7-91
Add Changes from Diskette, 6-5, 6-19 Scale Setup Menu, 7-3
Restore from Diskette, 6-5, 6-15 Screen Highlights, 2-6, 2-7
Retail Comparison, 11-3, 11-5
Security/Operator ID’s, 9-6
Return to Operate Mode, 8-9

I-7 Index
Quantum Scale System

—S— —S—
(Continued...) (Continued...)

Security Label, 10-2 Speedkeys, Self Service Produce Keypad, 9-16


Programming a PLU, 10-2 Setting Up, 9-16
New PLU, 10-3 Deleting, 9-19
Existing PLU, 10-5 Spread Spectrum Technology, 14-2
Programming Minimum Price Per Pound, 10-6 Standard Labels by Family, 7-43
Programming Total Price, 10-6 Standard Labels by Size, 7-64
Programming Total Price and Minimum Price Per Pound, 10-6 Store Information, Scale ID, 7-100
Security Label Applier, (SLA), 10-2 Store Name, 6-3
See also Security Label Store Name/Number, 6-3
Select Font, A-21 Store Number, 6-3
Select Special Field to Print on Label, 7-33 SubClass, 3-12
Selecting Item Tickets, 7-88 Subnet Mask
Selecting Itemized Receipts, 7-90 IntraNet, 13-15
Selecting Label Types, 7-41 ScaleMaster, 13-8
Self Service, 9-2 Supervisor Menu, Accessing, 2-5, 2-14
Keyboard, 9-3 Supervisor Mode, Overview, 2-14
Keypad, 9-3 Supervisor Manual Overview, 1-3
Produce Keypad, 9-2, 9-16 Support File, 3-19
Scale, 9-2
Self Service, Configuring, 9-3
Auto Look-Up, 9-8
Consumer Default Merchandising Screen, 9-12 —T—
Date & Time, 9-4
Tare
Default Label Types, 9-5
Forced, 3-72
Security/Operator ID’s, 9-6
Percentage, A-30
Self Service, Setting Up, 9-10
Platter, 3-72
Self Service, Zeroing the Scale, 9-15
Proportional, A-30
Self Service Produce Keypad, Using, 9-16
Tare, Changing, 3-69
Setting Up Speedkeys, 9-16
TCP/IP, 13-2
Deleting Speedkeys, 9-19
IntraNet Configuration, 13-13
Secondary Printer, 2-3
See also IntraNet
Security Label, 3-7
ScaleMaster Configuration, 13-7
Sell By Date, 7-33
See also ScaleMaster
Send Changes via Intranet, 6-5, 6-25
Setting Up, 13-5
Send to Scales via Intranet, 6-5, 6-23
Wireless, 14-2
Sending Data to Scales, A-5
TCP/IP, Connection, Testing, 13-22
Server Scale, 13-13, A-2, A-5
L.E.D., 13-25
See also IntraNet
PING Test, 13-22
Server Scale IP Address
Temperature Range, 2-2
IntraNet, 13-14
Text Block, 3-51
ScaleMaster, 13-8
Text Editor, A-20
Set What the Operator Can Modify, 7-92
Copy Text, A-25
Setting Up the Scale for Merchandising Programs, 11-2
Cut Text, A-23
Setting Up Wireless Communication, 14-5
Mark Text, A-22
Setup Normal Scale Operation, 7-95
Paste Text, A-24
Shelf Life, Changing, 3-73
Select Font, A-21
Signal Strength Meter Test, 14-13
Timed Marquee Messages, 7-113
Special Messages, 3-3, 3-19, 3-20, 3-21, 3-22
Time/Date, 7-94
Copy and Edit, 3-24
Time/Date, Self Service, 9-4
Create New, 3-22
Time Stamp Changes, 3-3, 3-62, 3-66, 3-68, 3-69
Delete, 3-29
Delete, 8-3
Edit, 3-27
Print, 5-23
Print, 5-29
Use, 3-26

Index I-8
Quantum Scale System

—T— —U—
(Continued...) Understanding EAN13 Scale Configuration, A-16
Understanding Ethernet Networks, A-6
Totals, 4-4 Understanding Frequencies, 14-2
Clear, 4-3, 4-17 Understanding Network Configuration, A-2
Clear All, 4-17, 4-27 Understanding Text Editor, A-20
Clear All Hourly, 4-17, 4-25 Understanding Wireless TCP/IP Scale Communication, 14-2
Clear All Operator, 4-17, 4-24 Unit Price, 3-68
Clear All Product, 4-17, 4-19 Unmark Changed Items, 6-3, 6-5, 6-9, 6-10, 6-14, 6-25
Clear One Product’s, 4-17, 4-20 Use
Clear One Type for All Products, 4-17, 4-22 Expanded Text, 3-36
Collect via MiniNet II, 4-3, 4-40 Marquee Messages, 3-56
Cutting Test Report, 5-13 Special Messages, 3-26
Hourly (Clear), 4-17, 4-25 Using the Keyboard and Self Service Keypad, 9-3
Hourly (Print), 5-9
Hourly (View), 4-7, 4-14
Hourly (Void), 4-32
Operator (Clear), 4-17, 4-24
—V—
Operator (Print), 5-8 Value Packing, 11-3, 11-4
Operator (View), 4-7, 4-11 View
Operator (Void), 4-31 Flashkey Group, 7-16
Print, 5-3, 5-11 Hourly Totals, 4-7, 4-14
Print All Totals Reports, 5-11 Operator Totals, 4-7, 4-11
Product (Clear), 4-17, 4-19 Product Totals, 4-7, 4-8
Product (Print), 5-6 Totals, 4-3, 4-7
Product (Void), 4-29 Void
Product (View), 4-7, 4-8 Hourly Totals, 4-32
View, 4-3, 4-7 Operator Totals, 4-31
Void, 4-3, 4-28 Product Totals, 4-29
Totals Function Codes, A-37 Totals, 4-3, 4-28
Totals Menu, 1-4, 4-3
Accessing, 4-5
Total Price, Programming Security Label, 10-6
Totals Record —W—
Items, 4-4 Weigh Station, 9-2
Packages, 4-4 Well Known Port Number
Price, 4-4 IntraNet, 13-15
Runs, 4-4 ScaleMaster, 13-8
Weight, 4-4 Wireless TCP/IP, 14-2
Totals Type Configuring, 14-7
Clear One for All Product, 4-22 Setting Up, 14-5
Configure, 4-3, 4-34 Understanding, 14-2
Create, 4-35 Wiring Illustration, Ethernet, 13-6
Delete, 4-39 Word Wrap, 7-39
Edit, 4-37 Working with Labels, 7-30
Troubleshooting, A-11
Ethernet Card A-12
IP Address, A-11
Hub to Hub, A-14 —Z—
Hub to Scale, A-12
Zeroing Scale, Self Service, 9-15

I-9 Index
701 S. RIDGE AVENUE
TROY, OHIO 45374-0001

F-34350 LITHO IN U.S.A.

You might also like